Relion® 670 SERIES

Line differential protection RED670

Version 2.2 ANSI
Application manual
 Document ID: 1MRK 505 376-UUS
Issued: November 2018
Revision: D
Product version: 2.2

© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written permission
from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor used for any
unauthorized purpose.

The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may be
used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic software written/developed by:
Eric Young ([email protected]) and Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product names
mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or product
description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All persons
responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy themselves that
each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other
operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system
failure and/or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but
not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity
applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all
measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely ruled out.
In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the manufacturer. Other
than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any
loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC
Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage
limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB
in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product
standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is designed in
accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series and ANSI C37.90.
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction............................................................................................................27
1.1 This manual.............................................................................................................................................. 27
1.2 Intended audience.................................................................................................................................. 27
1.3 Product documentation........................................................................................................................ 28
1.3.1 Product documentation set.............................................................................................................28
1.3.2 Document revision history............................................................................................................... 29
1.3.3 Related documents............................................................................................................................29
1.4 Document symbols and conventions................................................................................................. 30
1.4.1 Symbols................................................................................................................................................30
1.4.2 Document conventions..................................................................................................................... 31
1.5 IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping............................................................................................ 31

Section 2 Application..............................................................................................................41
2.1 General IED application......................................................................................................................... 41
2.2 Main protection functions.................................................................................................................... 42
2.3 Back-up protection functions..............................................................................................................44
2.4 Control and monitoring functions...................................................................................................... 45
2.5 Communication.......................................................................................................................................52
2.6 Basic IED functions................................................................................................................................ 54

Section 3 Configuration......................................................................................................... 57
3.1 Description of configuration RED670................................................................................................ 58
3.1.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................ 58
3.1.2 Description of configuration A42................................................................................................... 58
3.1.3 Description of configuration B33................................................................................................... 59
3.1.4 Description of configuration B42................................................................................................... 60
3.1.5 Description of configuration C42................................................................................................... 61

Section 4 Analog inputs......................................................................................................... 63

4.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................63
4.2 Setting guidelines.................................................................................................................................. 63
4.2.1 Setting of the phase reference channel........................................................................................ 64
4.2.1.1 Example............................................................................................................................................ 64
4.2.2 Setting of current channels............................................................................................................. 64
4.2.2.1 Example 1..........................................................................................................................................65
4.2.2.2 Example 2......................................................................................................................................... 65
4.2.2.3 Example 3......................................................................................................................................... 65
4.2.2.4 Examples on how to connect, configure and set CT inputs for most commonly
used CT connections......................................................................................................................69

Line differential protection RED670 1

Application manual
Table of contents

4.2.2.5 Example on how to connect a wye connected three-phase CT set to the IED................... 70
4.2.2.6 Example how to connect delta connected three-phase CT set to the IED..........................74
4.2.2.7 Example how to connect single-phase CT to the IED..............................................................76
4.2.3 Relationships between setting parameter Base Current, CT rated primary current
and minimum pickup of a protection IED......................................................................................77
4.2.4 Setting of voltage channels............................................................................................................. 78
4.2.4.1 Example.............................................................................................................................................78
4.2.4.2 Examples how to connect, configure and set VT inputs for most commonly used
VT connections................................................................................................................................ 78
4.2.4.3 Examples on how to connect a three phase-to-ground connected VT to the IED............ 79
4.2.4.4 Example on how to connect a phase-to-phase connected VT to the IED............................81
4.2.4.5 Example on how to connect an open delta VT to the IED for high impedance
grounded or ungrounded networks............................................................................................83
4.2.4.6 Example how to connect the open delta VT to the IED for low impedance
grounded or solidly grounded power systems.........................................................................85

Section 5 Local HMI.................................................................................................................89

5.1 Display...................................................................................................................................................... 90
5.2 LEDs...........................................................................................................................................................91
5.3 Keypad...................................................................................................................................................... 92
5.4 Local HMI functionality......................................................................................................................... 94
5.4.1 Protection and alarm indication..................................................................................................... 94
5.4.2 Parameter management ..................................................................................................................95
5.4.3 Front communication....................................................................................................................... 95

Section 6 Wide area measurement system..........................................................................97

6.1 C37.118 Phasor Measurement Data Streaming Protocol Configuration PMUCONF................. 97
6.1.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................................97
6.1.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................97
6.1.3 Operation principle............................................................................................................................ 97
6.1.3.1 Short guidance for use of TCP..................................................................................................... 98
6.1.3.2 Short guidance for use of UDP.................................................................................................... 99
6.2 Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118 PMUREPORT........................................................ 100
6.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 100
6.2.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................101
6.2.3 Operation principle..........................................................................................................................103
6.2.3.1 Frequency reporting.................................................................................................................... 104
6.2.3.2 Reporting filters............................................................................................................................ 105
6.2.3.3 Scaling Factors for ANALOGREPORT channels.......................................................................106
6.2.3.4 PMU Report Function Blocks Connection Rules in PCM600 Application
Configuration Tool (ACT)............................................................................................................ 108
6.2.4 Setting guidelines.............................................................................................................................113

Section 7 Differential protection........................................................................................ 117

2 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
 Table of contents

7.1 High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF (87)........................................... 117
7.1.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................... 117
7.1.2 Application......................................................................................................................................... 117
7.1.2.1 The basics of the high impedance principle............................................................................ 118
7.1.3 Connection examples for high impedance differential protection........................................123
7.1.3.1 Connections for three-phase high impedance differential protection..............................123
7.1.3.2 Connections for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87)......................124
7.1.4 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 125
7.1.4.1 Configuration.................................................................................................................................125
7.1.4.2 Settings of protection function................................................................................................. 125
7.1.4.3 T-feeder protection...................................................................................................................... 126
7.1.4.4 Tertiary reactor protection......................................................................................................... 128
7.1.4.5 Restricted earth fault protection (87N)....................................................................................130
7.1.4.6 Alarm level operation....................................................................................................................132
7.2 Low impedance restricted earth fault protection REFPDIF (87N).............................................. 133
7.2.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................... 133
7.2.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................133
7.2.2.1 Transformer winding, solidly grounded...................................................................................134
7.2.2.2 Transformer winding, grounded through Zig-Zag grounding transformer..................... 134
7.2.2.3 Autotransformer winding, solidly grounded...........................................................................135
7.2.2.4 Reactor winding, solidly grounded............................................................................................136
7.2.2.5 Multi-breaker applications.......................................................................................................... 137
7.2.2.6 CT grounding direction................................................................................................................138
7.2.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 138
7.2.3.1 Setting and configuration...........................................................................................................138
7.2.3.2 Settings...........................................................................................................................................139
7.3 High speed line differential protection for 4 CT sets, 2-3 line ends L4CPDIF..........................140
7.3.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 140
7.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 140
7.3.2.1 Charging current compensation............................................................................................... 140
7.3.2.2 Charging current calculation using the exact method......................................................... 140
7.3.2.3 Charging current calculation using the approximate method............................................ 143
7.3.2.4 Open CT detection........................................................................................................................144
7.3.2.5 Loss of data synchronism detection........................................................................................ 144
7.3.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 145
7.3.3.1 General settings............................................................................................................................ 145
7.3.3.2 Percentage restrained differential operation settings.........................................................145
7.3.3.3 2nd and 5th harmonic settings.................................................................................................... 147
7.3.3.4 Charging current compensation settings............................................................................... 148
7.3.4 Setting examples............................................................................................................................. 148
7.3.4.1 Setting example with a two-end power line ...........................................................................148
7.3.4.2 Setting examples for charging current compensation using the exact method.............153
7.4 Line differential protection................................................................................................................ 162

Line differential protection RED670 3

Application manual
Table of contents

7.4.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................162
7.4.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................162
7.4.2.1 Power transformers in the protected zone............................................................................. 163
7.4.2.2 Small power transformers in a tap............................................................................................164
7.4.2.3 Charging current compensation................................................................................................165
7.4.2.4 Time synchronization...................................................................................................................166
7.4.2.5 Communication channels for line differential protection....................................................166
7.4.2.6 Configuration of analog signals................................................................................................ 168
7.4.2.7 Configuration of output signals................................................................................................ 168
7.4.2.8 Open CT detection........................................................................................................................169
7.4.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 170
7.4.3.1 General settings............................................................................................................................ 170
7.4.3.2 Percentage restrained differential operation..........................................................................171
7.4.3.3 The 2nd and 5th harmonic analysis........................................................................................... 175
7.4.3.4 Internal/external fault discriminator........................................................................................ 175
7.4.3.5 Power transformers in the protected zone............................................................................. 176
7.4.3.6 Settings examples........................................................................................................................ 180
7.5 Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC (11).............................................. 189
7.5.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................189
7.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 190
7.5.3 Setting guidelines.............................................................................................................................191

Section 8 Impedance protection......................................................................................... 193

8.1 Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines
ZMCPDIS (21), ZMCAPDIS (21), ZDSRDIR (21D)................................................................................193
8.1.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................193
8.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................193
8.1.2.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................... 193
8.1.2.2 System grounding.........................................................................................................................193
8.1.2.3 Fault infeed from remote end.................................................................................................... 195
8.1.2.4 Load encroachment......................................................................................................................196
8.1.2.5 Long transmission line application........................................................................................... 197
8.1.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling........................................................................ 198
8.1.2.7 Tapped line application...............................................................................................................204
8.1.2.8 Series compensation in power systems.................................................................................. 206
8.1.2.9 Challenges in protection of series compensated and adjacent power lines....................214
8.1.2.10 Impact of series compensation on protective IED of adjacent lines................................. 224
8.1.2.11 Distance protection......................................................................................................................225
8.1.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 231
8.1.3.1 General.............................................................................................................................................231
8.1.3.2 Setting of zone1............................................................................................................................ 232
8.1.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone..................................................................................................... 232
8.1.3.4 Setting of reverse zone................................................................................................................233

4 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
 Table of contents

8.1.3.5 Series compensated and adjacent lines...................................................................................233

8.1.3.6 Setting of zones for parallel line application.......................................................................... 238
8.1.3.7 Setting of reach in resistive direction...................................................................................... 239
8.1.3.8 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function................................... 240
8.1.3.9 Load impedance limitation, with load encroachment function activated........................ 241
8.1.3.10 Setting of minimum operating currents.................................................................................. 241
8.1.3.11 Setting of timers for distance protection zones....................................................................242
8.2 Phase selection, quad, fixed angle, load encroachment FDPSPDIS (21)....................................242
8.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 242
8.2.1.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 242
8.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 242
8.2.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 243
8.2.3.1 Load encroachment characteristics......................................................................................... 243
8.2.3.2 Resistive reach with load encroachment characteristic.......................................................248
8.2.3.3 Minimum operate currents.........................................................................................................249
8.3 Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS (21), ZMQAPDIS (21),
ZDRDIR (21D)......................................................................................................................................... 249
8.3.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 249
8.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 249
8.3.2.1 System grounding........................................................................................................................ 249
8.3.2.2 Fault infeed from remote end.................................................................................................... 252
8.3.2.3 Load encroachment......................................................................................................................253
8.3.2.4 Short line application...................................................................................................................254
8.3.2.5 Long transmission line application...........................................................................................255
8.3.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling........................................................................ 256
8.3.2.7 Tapped line application............................................................................................................... 262
8.3.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................264
8.3.3.1 General............................................................................................................................................264
8.3.3.2 Setting of zone 1........................................................................................................................... 265
8.3.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone..................................................................................................... 265
8.3.3.4 Setting of reverse zone............................................................................................................... 266
8.3.3.5 Setting of zones for parallel line application.......................................................................... 266
8.3.3.6 Setting of reach in resistive direction...................................................................................... 268
8.3.3.7 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function................................... 268
8.3.3.8 Load impedance limitation, with Phase selection with load encroachment,
quadrilateral characteristic function activated .....................................................................270
8.3.3.9 Setting of minimum operating currents..................................................................................270
8.3.3.10 Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics......................................270
8.3.3.11 Setting of timers for distance protection zones....................................................................272
8.4 Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS (21).........................................273
8.4.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................273
8.4.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................273
8.4.2.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 273

Line differential protection RED670 5

Application manual
Table of contents

8.4.2.2 System grounding.........................................................................................................................273

8.4.2.3 Fault infeed from remote end.................................................................................................... 276
8.4.2.4 Load encroachment......................................................................................................................277
8.4.2.5 Short line application................................................................................................................... 279
8.4.2.6 Long transmission line application.......................................................................................... 280
8.4.2.7 Parallel line application with mutual coupling........................................................................280
8.4.2.8 Tapped line application...............................................................................................................285
8.4.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................286
8.4.3.1 General............................................................................................................................................286
8.4.3.2 Setting of zone 1........................................................................................................................... 287
8.4.3.3 Setting of zone 2........................................................................................................................... 287
8.4.3.4 Setting of zone 3........................................................................................................................... 287
8.4.3.5 Setting of overreaching zone.....................................................................................................288
8.4.3.6 Setting of reverse zone............................................................................................................... 288
8.4.3.7 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function................................... 294
8.4.3.8 Load impedance limitation, with load encroachment function activated........................296
8.4.3.9 Setting of minimum operate currents..................................................................................... 296
8.4.3.10 Setting of directional mode....................................................................................................... 296
8.4.3.11 Setting of direction for offset mho...........................................................................................297
8.4.3.12 Setting of timers for distance protection zones....................................................................297
8.5 Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults ZMMPDIS (21),
ZMMAPDIS (21)...................................................................................................................................... 297
8.5.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................297
8.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 297
8.5.2.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................... 297
8.5.2.2 System grounding........................................................................................................................ 298
8.5.2.3 Fault infeed from remote end................................................................................................... 300
8.5.2.4 Load encroachment......................................................................................................................301
8.5.2.5 Short line application...................................................................................................................302
8.5.2.6 Long transmission line application.......................................................................................... 303
8.5.2.7 Parallel line application with mutual coupling........................................................................303
8.5.2.8 Tapped line application...............................................................................................................308
8.5.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 310
8.5.3.1 General............................................................................................................................................ 310
8.5.3.2 Setting of zone1............................................................................................................................. 311
8.5.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone......................................................................................................311
8.5.3.4 Setting of reverse zone................................................................................................................ 312
8.5.3.5 Setting of zones for parallel line application...........................................................................312
8.5.3.6 Setting of reach in resistive direction...................................................................................... 314
8.5.3.7 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function....................................314
8.5.3.8 Load impedance limitation, with load encroachment function activated........................ 315
8.5.3.9 Setting of minimum operating currents.................................................................................. 316
8.5.3.10 Setting of timers for distance protection zones....................................................................316

6 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
 Table of contents

8.6 Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults ZDARDIR.......................316
8.6.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................316
8.6.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................316
8.6.3 Setting guidelines.............................................................................................................................317
8.7 Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC................................................................................. 318
8.7.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................318
8.7.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................318
8.7.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 319
8.8 Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS (21)........................................320
8.8.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 320
8.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 320
8.8.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................320
8.8.3.1 Load encroachment...................................................................................................................... 321
8.9 Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings ZMRPDIS
(21), ZMRAPDIS (21) and ZDRDIR (21D)............................................................................................. 323
8.9.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................323
8.9.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................323
8.9.2.1 System grounding........................................................................................................................ 323
8.9.2.2 Fault infeed from remote end.................................................................................................... 326
8.9.2.3 Load encroachment......................................................................................................................327
8.9.2.4 Short line application...................................................................................................................328
8.9.2.5 Long transmission line application...........................................................................................329
8.9.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling........................................................................ 329
8.9.2.7 Tapped line application............................................................................................................... 336
8.9.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 338
8.9.3.1 General............................................................................................................................................ 338
8.9.3.2 Setting of zone 1........................................................................................................................... 338
8.9.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone..................................................................................................... 338
8.9.3.4 Setting of reverse zone................................................................................................................339
8.9.3.5 Setting of zones for parallel line application.......................................................................... 340
8.9.3.6 Setting of reach in resistive direction...................................................................................... 341
8.9.3.7 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function....................................342
8.9.3.8 Load impedance limitation, with Phase selection with load encroachment,
quadrilateral characteristic function activated .....................................................................343
8.9.3.9 Setting of minimum operating currents..................................................................................343
8.9.3.10 Setting of timers for distance protection zones................................................................... 344
8.10 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS (21)...................344
8.10.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 344
8.10.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 344
8.10.3 Load encroachment characteristics............................................................................................ 348
8.10.3.1 Phase-to-ground fault in forward direction............................................................................349
8.10.3.2 Phase-to-ground fault in reverse direction..............................................................................351
8.10.3.3 Phase-to-phase fault in forward direction.............................................................................. 352

Line differential protection RED670 7

Application manual
Table of contents

8.10.4 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 353

8.10.4.1 Resistive reach with load encroachment characteristic.......................................................354
8.10.4.2 Minimum operate currents......................................................................................................... 355
8.11 Phase selection, quad, fixed angle, load encroachment FDPSPDIS (21)....................................355
8.11.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 355
8.11.1.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 355
8.11.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 355
8.11.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................356
8.11.3.1 Load encroachment characteristics......................................................................................... 356
8.11.3.2 Resistive reach with load encroachment characteristic....................................................... 361
8.11.3.3 Minimum operate currents......................................................................................................... 362
8.12 High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS (21)...............................................................................362
8.12.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 362
8.12.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 362
8.12.2.1 System grounding........................................................................................................................ 362
8.12.2.2 Fault infeed from remote end....................................................................................................365
8.12.2.3 Load encroachment..................................................................................................................... 366
8.12.2.4 Short line application................................................................................................................... 367
8.12.2.5 Long transmission line application.......................................................................................... 368
8.12.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling........................................................................368
8.12.2.7 Tapped line application............................................................................................................... 374
8.12.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 376
8.12.3.1 General............................................................................................................................................ 376
8.12.3.2 Setting of zone 1............................................................................................................................377
8.12.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone..................................................................................................... 377
8.12.3.4 Setting of reverse zone................................................................................................................378
8.12.3.5 Setting of zones for parallel line application.......................................................................... 378
8.12.3.6 Setting the reach with respect to load.................................................................................... 380
8.12.3.7 Zone reach setting lower than minimum load impedance...................................................381
8.12.3.8 Zone reach setting higher than minimum load impedance.................................................382
8.12.3.9 Other settings............................................................................................................................... 383
8.12.3.10 ZMMMXU settings........................................................................................................................386
8.13 High speed distance protection for series compensated lines ZMFCPDIS (21)...................... 387
8.13.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................387
8.13.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 387
8.13.2.1 System grounding........................................................................................................................ 387
8.13.2.2 Fault infeed from remote end....................................................................................................389
8.13.2.3 Load encroachment..................................................................................................................... 390
8.13.2.4 Short line application................................................................................................................... 391
8.13.2.5 Long transmission line application...........................................................................................392
8.13.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling........................................................................ 392
8.13.2.7 Tapped line application...............................................................................................................399
8.13.3 Series compensation in power systems..................................................................................... 401

8 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
 Table of contents

8.13.3.1 Steady state voltage regulation and increase of voltage collapse limit........................... 401
8.13.3.2 Increase in power transfer..........................................................................................................402
8.13.3.3 Voltage and current inversion....................................................................................................403
8.13.3.4 Impact of series compensation on protective IED of adjacent lines................................. 410
8.13.3.5 Distance protection......................................................................................................................412
8.13.3.6 Underreaching and overreaching schemes............................................................................. 412
8.13.4 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 418
8.13.4.1 General............................................................................................................................................ 418
8.13.4.2 Setting of zone 1........................................................................................................................... 418
8.13.4.3 Setting of overreaching zone..................................................................................................... 419
8.13.4.4 Setting of reverse zone................................................................................................................419
8.13.4.5 Series compensated and adjacent lines.................................................................................. 420
8.13.4.6 Setting of zones for parallel line application.......................................................................... 424
8.13.4.7 Setting of reach in resistive direction...................................................................................... 425
8.13.4.8 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function................................... 426
8.13.4.9 Zone reach setting higher than minimum load impedance.................................................427
8.13.4.10 Parameter setting guidelines.....................................................................................................428
8.13.4.11 ZMMMXU settings........................................................................................................................430
8.14 Power swing detection ZMRPSB (68)............................................................................................... 431
8.14.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................431
8.14.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................431
8.14.2.1 General............................................................................................................................................ 431
8.14.2.2 Basic characteristics.................................................................................................................... 432
8.14.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 432
8.15 Power swing logic PSLPSCH ............................................................................................................. 438
8.15.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 438
8.15.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 439
8.15.3 Setting guidelines........................................................................................................................... 440
8.15.3.1 Scheme communication and tripping for faults occurring during power swinging
over the protected line................................................................................................................440
8.15.3.2 Blocking and tripping logic for evolving power swings....................................................... 443
8.16 Pole slip protection PSPPPAM (78)................................................................................................... 445
8.16.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 445
8.16.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 445
8.16.3 Setting guidelines........................................................................................................................... 448
8.16.3.1 Setting example for line application........................................................................................ 449
8.16.3.2 Setting example for generator application.............................................................................453
8.17 Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM (78)............................................................................................457
8.17.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 457
8.17.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 457
8.17.3 Setting guidelines........................................................................................................................... 460
8.18 Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF ................................................................................. 462
8.18.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 462

Line differential protection RED670 9

Application manual
Table of contents

8.18.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 463

8.18.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................463
8.19 Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ....................................................................................................... 464
8.19.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 464
8.19.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 465
8.19.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................468
8.20 Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ..................................................................................................... 469
8.20.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 469
8.20.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 469
8.20.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 472

Section 9 Current protection.............................................................................................. 475

9.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC (50).........................................................475
9.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 475
9.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 475
9.1.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................475
9.1.3.1 Meshed network without parallel line...................................................................................... 476
9.1.3.2 Meshed network with parallel line.............................................................................................478
9.2 Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC(51_67)................................. 479
9.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 480
9.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................480
9.2.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 481
9.2.3.1 Settings for each step................................................................................................................. 482
9.2.3.2 Setting example............................................................................................................................485
9.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N).................................................. 490
9.3.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 490
9.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................490
9.3.3 Setting guidelines........................................................................................................................... 490
9.4 Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC (51N/67N)........................ 493
9.4.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 493
9.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 493
9.4.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................495
9.4.3.1 Common settings for all steps.................................................................................................. 495
9.4.3.2 2nd harmonic restrain................................................................................................................. 496
9.4.3.3 Parallel transformer inrush current logic.................................................................................497
9.4.3.4 Switch onto fault logic................................................................................................................ 497
9.4.3.5 Settings for each step (x = 1, 2, 3 and 4).................................................................................. 498
9.4.3.6 Line application example............................................................................................................500
9.5 Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (46I2)...505
9.5.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 505
9.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 505
9.5.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................506
9.5.3.1 Settings for each step ................................................................................................................ 507

10 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
 Table of contents

9.5.3.2 Common settings for all steps.................................................................................................. 509

9.6 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE (67N)................ 510
9.6.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................510
9.6.2 Application......................................................................................................................................... 511
9.6.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 512
9.7 Thermal overload protection, one time constant Fahrenheit/Celsius LFPTTR/
LCPTTR (26)........................................................................................................................................... 520
9.7.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 520
9.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 520
9.7.3 Setting guideline.............................................................................................................................. 521
9.8 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF(50BF)....................................................................................... 521
9.8.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................522
9.8.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................522
9.8.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 522
9.9 Stub protection STBPTOC (50STB).................................................................................................. 530
9.9.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 530
9.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 530
9.9.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 531
9.10 Pole discrepancy protection CCPDSC(52PD).................................................................................. 531
9.10.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................532
9.10.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 532
9.10.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 532
9.11 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37)....................................................................... 533
9.11.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................533
9.11.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 533
9.11.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 535
9.12 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32).........................................................................538
9.12.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 538
9.12.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 538
9.12.3 Setting guidelines........................................................................................................................... 540
9.13 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC (46)..........................................................................................544
9.13.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 544
9.13.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 544
9.13.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................544
9.14 Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC (51V)................................................ 545
9.14.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 545
9.14.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 545
9.14.2.1 Base quantities............................................................................................................................. 546
9.14.2.2 Application possibilities............................................................................................................. 546
9.14.2.3 Undervoltage seal-in....................................................................................................................546
9.14.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................547
9.14.3.1 Explanation of the setting parameters....................................................................................547
9.14.3.2 Voltage-restrained overcurrent protection for generator and step-up transformer.... 548

Line differential protection RED670 11

Application manual
Table of contents

9.14.3.3 Overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in................................................................549

Section 10 Voltage protection.............................................................................................. 551

10.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)......................................................................... 551
10.1.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................551
10.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................551
10.1.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 552
10.1.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators................................................552
10.1.3.2 Disconnected equipment detection......................................................................................... 552
10.1.3.3 Power supply quality ................................................................................................................... 552
10.1.3.4 Voltage instability mitigation.................................................................................................... 552
10.1.3.5 Backup protection for power system faults........................................................................... 552
10.1.3.6 Settings for two step undervoltage protection..................................................................... 552
10.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59).......................................................................... 554
10.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 554
10.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 554
10.2.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................555
10.2.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators, reactors and transformers.... 555
10.2.3.2 Equipment protection, capacitors............................................................................................555
10.2.3.3 Power supply quality....................................................................................................................555
10.2.3.4 High impedance grounded systems.........................................................................................555
10.2.3.5 The following settings can be done for the two step overvoltage protection................556
10.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N)...................................................... 557
10.3.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................557
10.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 557
10.3.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................558
10.3.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators, reactors and
transformersEquipment protection for transformers......................................................... 558
10.3.3.2 Equipment protection, capacitors............................................................................................558
10.3.3.3 Power supply quality....................................................................................................................558
10.3.3.4 High impedance grounded systems.........................................................................................559
10.3.3.5 Direct grounded system............................................................................................................. 559
10.3.3.6 Settings for two step residual overvoltage protection........................................................560
10.4 Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24)....................................................................................... 562
10.4.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 562
10.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 562
10.4.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................564
10.4.3.1 Recommendations for input and output signals...................................................................564
10.4.3.2 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 564
10.4.3.3 Service value report......................................................................................................................565
10.4.3.4 Setting example............................................................................................................................565
10.5 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60).............................................................................. 567
10.5.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 567

12 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
 Table of contents

10.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 567

10.5.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................568
10.6 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27)................................................................................................569
10.6.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 569
10.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 570
10.6.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................570
10.6.3.1 Advanced users settings.............................................................................................................570
10.7 Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC (27)...........................................................................................570
10.7.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 570
10.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 570
10.7.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 571

Section 11 Frequency protection.......................................................................................... 573

11.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81).........................................................................................573
11.1.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................573
11.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................573
11.1.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 573
11.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)...........................................................................................574
11.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 574
11.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 574
11.2.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 575
11.3 Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC (81)..................................................................575
11.3.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................575
11.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 575
11.3.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 576

Section 12 Multipurpose protection.....................................................................................577

12.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC.......................................................................... 577
12.1.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................577
12.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................577
12.1.2.1 Current and voltage selection for CVGAPC function.............................................................578
12.1.2.2 Base quantities for CVGAPC function...................................................................................... 580
12.1.2.3 Application possibilities.............................................................................................................. 581
12.1.2.4 Inadvertent generator energization..........................................................................................581
12.1.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................582
12.1.3.1 Directional negative sequence overcurrent protection........................................................583
12.1.3.2 Negative sequence overcurrent protection............................................................................ 584
12.1.3.3 Generator stator overload protection in accordance with IEC or ANSI standards.........586
12.1.3.4 Open phase protection for transformer, lines or generators and circuit breaker
head flashover protection for generators...............................................................................588
12.1.3.5 Voltage restrained overcurrent protection for generator and step-up transformer.....588
12.1.3.6 Loss of excitation protection for a generator........................................................................589

Section 13 System protection and control.......................................................................... 591

Line differential protection RED670 13

Application manual
Table of contents

13.1 Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC........................................................................................................... 591

13.1.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................591
13.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................591
13.1.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................592
13.1.3.1 Setting example............................................................................................................................ 592

Section 14 Secondary system supervision.......................................................................... 597

14.1 Current circuit supervision (87)......................................................................................................... 597
14.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 597
14.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 597
14.1.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 597
14.2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC.................................................................................................... 598
14.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 598
14.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 598
14.2.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................599
14.2.3.1 General............................................................................................................................................599
14.2.3.2 Setting of common parameters................................................................................................599
14.2.3.3 Negative sequence based.......................................................................................................... 600
14.2.3.4 Zero sequence based.................................................................................................................. 600
14.2.3.5 Delta V and delta I ........................................................................................................................601
14.2.3.6 Dead line detection...................................................................................................................... 601
14.3 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC (60)..............................................................................................602
14.3.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 602
14.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 602
14.3.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................603
14.4 Voltage based delta supervision DELVSPVC(78V)........................................................................ 604
14.4.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 604
14.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................604
14.4.3 Setting guidelines........................................................................................................................... 606
14.5 Current based delta supervision DELISPVC(7I)..............................................................................607
14.5.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 607
14.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 607
14.5.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................607
14.6 Delta supervision of real input DELSPVC........................................................................................ 608
14.6.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 608
14.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................608
14.6.3 Setting guidelines........................................................................................................................... 609

Section 15 Control...................................................................................................................611
15.1 Synchronism check, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN (25)................................. 611
15.1.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................... 611
15.1.2 Application......................................................................................................................................... 611
15.1.2.1 Synchronizing.................................................................................................................................611

14 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
 Table of contents

15.1.2.2 Synchronism check....................................................................................................................... 612

15.1.2.3 Energizing check........................................................................................................................... 614
15.1.2.4 Voltage selection.......................................................................................................................... 615
15.1.2.5 External fuse failure......................................................................................................................615
15.1.3 Application examples...................................................................................................................... 616
15.1.3.1 Single circuit breaker with single busbar.................................................................................617
15.1.3.2 Single circuit breaker with double busbar, external voltage selection..............................618
15.1.3.3 Single circuit breaker with double busbar, internal voltage selection...............................619
15.1.3.4 Double circuit breaker................................................................................................................. 620
15.1.3.5 Breaker-and-a-half........................................................................................................................ 621
15.1.4 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 623
15.2 Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase operation SMBRREC (79).......................... 628
15.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 628
15.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 628
15.2.2.1 Auto reclosing operation Off and On........................................................................................631
15.2.2.2 Initiate auto reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle..................................631
15.2.2.3 Initiate auto reclosing from circuit breaker open information........................................... 632
15.2.2.4 Blocking of the auto recloser..................................................................................................... 632
15.2.2.5 Control of the auto reclosing dead time for shot 1............................................................... 632
15.2.2.6 Long trip signal............................................................................................................................. 633
15.2.2.7 Maximum number of reclosing shots.......................................................................................633
15.2.2.8 ARMode = 3ph, (normal setting for a three-phase shot)...................................................... 633
15.2.2.9 ARMode = 1/2/3ph........................................................................................................................633
15.2.2.10 ARMode = 1/2ph, 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot........................................ 634
15.2.2.11 ARMode = 1ph+1*2ph, 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot................................634
15.2.2.12 ARMode = 1/2ph + 1*3ph, 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the first shot......... 634
15.2.2.13 ARMode = 1ph + 1*2/3ph, 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the first shot......... 634
15.2.2.14 External selection of auto reclosing mode..............................................................................635
15.2.2.15 Auto reclosing reset timer.......................................................................................................... 635
15.2.2.16 Pulsing of the circuit breaker closing command and counter............................................ 636
15.2.2.17 Transient fault...............................................................................................................................636
15.2.2.18 Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal..............................................................636
15.2.2.19 Lock-out initiation........................................................................................................................636
15.2.2.20 Evolving fault................................................................................................................................. 637
15.2.2.21 Automatic continuation of the auto reclosing sequence.....................................................638
15.2.2.22 Thermal overload protection holding the auto recloser back.............................................638
15.2.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................638
15.2.3.1 Configuration................................................................................................................................ 638
15.2.3.2 Auto recloser settings................................................................................................................. 645
15.3 Apparatus control................................................................................................................................ 649
15.3.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 649
15.3.2 Bay control QCBAY...........................................................................................................................653
15.3.3 Switch controller SCSWI................................................................................................................. 654

Line differential protection RED670 15

Application manual
Table of contents

15.3.4 Switches SXCBR/SXSWI................................................................................................................. 655

15.3.5 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY........................................... 656
15.3.6 Reservation function (QCRSV and RESIN).................................................................................. 658
15.3.7 Interaction between modules.......................................................................................................660
15.3.8 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................662
15.3.8.1 Bay control (QCBAY).................................................................................................................... 662
15.3.8.2 Switch controller (SCSWI)........................................................................................................... 663
15.3.8.3 Switch (SXCBR/SXSWI)............................................................................................................... 664
15.3.8.4 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY........................................664
15.3.8.5 Bay Reserve (QCRSV)................................................................................................................... 665
15.3.8.6 Reservation input (RESIN).......................................................................................................... 665
15.4 Interlocking (3)......................................................................................................................................665
15.4.1 Configuration guidelines............................................................................................................... 666
15.4.2 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3).........................................................................................666
15.4.2.1 Application.....................................................................................................................................666
15.4.2.2 Signals from bypass busbar.......................................................................................................667
15.4.2.3 Signals from bus-coupler............................................................................................................668
15.4.2.4 Configuration setting.................................................................................................................. 671
15.4.3 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC (3)..............................................................................671
15.4.3.1 Application..................................................................................................................................... 672
15.4.3.2 Configuration................................................................................................................................ 672
15.4.3.3 Signals from all feeders............................................................................................................... 672
15.4.3.4 Signals from bus-coupler............................................................................................................674
15.4.3.5 Configuration setting.................................................................................................................. 676
15.4.4 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3)........................................................................ 677
15.4.4.1 Application..................................................................................................................................... 677
15.4.4.2 Signals from bus-coupler............................................................................................................ 677
15.4.4.3 Configuration setting.................................................................................................................. 678
15.4.5 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS (3)..................................................................... 679
15.4.5.1 Application..................................................................................................................................... 679
15.4.5.2 Signals from all feeders...............................................................................................................679
15.4.5.3 Configuration setting.................................................................................................................. 682
15.4.6 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC (3).......................................................... 682
15.4.6.1 Application.....................................................................................................................................683
15.4.6.2 Signals in single breaker arrangement.................................................................................... 683
15.4.6.3 Signals in double-breaker arrangement.................................................................................. 686
15.4.6.4 Signals in breaker and a half arrangement............................................................................. 688
15.4.7 Interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES (3)............................................................... 689
15.4.7.1 Application.....................................................................................................................................689
15.4.7.2 Signals in single breaker arrangement.................................................................................... 689
15.4.7.3 Signals in double-breaker arrangement.................................................................................. 693
15.4.7.4 Signals in breaker and a half arrangement............................................................................. 694
15.4.8 Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3)......................................................................................... 694

16 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
 Table of contents

15.4.8.1 Application.....................................................................................................................................694
15.4.8.2 Configuration setting..................................................................................................................695
15.4.9 Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter BH (3)................................................................696
15.4.9.1 Application.....................................................................................................................................696
15.4.9.2 Configuration setting..................................................................................................................696
15.5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC....................... 697
15.5.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 697
15.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 697
15.5.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................698
15.6 Selector mini switch VSGAPC............................................................................................................ 698
15.6.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 698
15.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 698
15.6.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................699
15.7 Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC.................................. 699
15.7.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 699
15.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 699
15.7.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................700
15.8 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC.........................................................................700
15.8.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 700
15.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 700
15.8.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 701
15.9 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS....................................................... 701
15.9.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................701
15.9.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................701
15.9.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 701
15.10 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD........................................................................................702
15.10.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 702
15.10.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 702
15.10.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................703

Section 16 Scheme communication......................................................................................705

16.1 Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent protection ZCPSCH(85)............. 705
16.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 705
16.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 705
16.1.2.1 Blocking schemes......................................................................................................................... 705
16.1.2.2 Delta blocking scheme................................................................................................................ 706
16.1.2.3 Permissive schemes..................................................................................................................... 707
16.1.2.4 Intertrip scheme............................................................................................................................710
16.1.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 710
16.1.3.1 Blocking scheme........................................................................................................................... 710
16.1.3.2 Delta blocking scheme................................................................................................................. 711
16.1.3.3 Permissive underreaching scheme............................................................................................ 711
16.1.3.4 Permissive overreaching scheme............................................................................................... 711

Line differential protection RED670 17

Application manual
Table of contents

16.1.3.5 Unblocking scheme....................................................................................................................... 711

16.1.3.6 Intertrip scheme............................................................................................................................ 712
16.2 Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection ZC1PPSCH (85).. 712
16.2.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................... 712
16.2.2 Application......................................................................................................................................... 712
16.2.2.1 Blocking scheme............................................................................................................................713
16.2.2.2 Permissive schemes..................................................................................................................... 714
16.2.2.3 Intertrip scheme............................................................................................................................ 715
16.2.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 715
16.2.3.1 Permissive underreache scheme............................................................................................... 716
16.2.3.2 Permissive overreach scheme.................................................................................................... 716
16.2.3.3 Blocking scheme............................................................................................................................716
16.2.3.4 Intertrip scheme............................................................................................................................ 716
16.3 Current reversal and Weak-end infeed logic for distance protection 3-phase
ZCRWPSCH (85)..................................................................................................................................... 717
16.3.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................... 717
16.3.2 Application......................................................................................................................................... 717
16.3.2.1 Current reversal logic................................................................................................................... 717
16.3.2.2 Weak-end infeed logic..................................................................................................................718
16.3.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 718
16.3.3.1 Current reversal logic................................................................................................................... 719
16.3.3.2 Weak-end infeed logic..................................................................................................................719
16.4 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication
ZC1WPSCH (85)..................................................................................................................................... 719
16.4.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................719
16.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 720
16.4.3 Setting guidelines.............................................................................................................................721
16.5 Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH.................................................................................................. 722
16.5.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................722
16.5.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................722
16.5.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 722
16.6 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH (85)...................723
16.6.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................723
16.6.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................723
16.6.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 724
16.7 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection
ECRWPSCH (85).....................................................................................................................................725
16.7.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................725
16.7.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................725
16.7.2.1 Fault current reversal logic......................................................................................................... 725
16.7.2.2 Weak-end infeed logic..................................................................................................................726
16.7.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 726
16.7.3.1 Current reversal.............................................................................................................................726

18 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
 Table of contents

16.7.3.2 Weak-end infeed............................................................................................................................727

16.8 Direct transfer trip logic......................................................................................................................728
16.8.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 728
16.8.2 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 729
16.8.3 Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC (37_55)..................................... 729
16.8.3.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 729
16.8.3.2 Application..................................................................................................................................... 730
16.8.3.3 Setting guidelines.........................................................................................................................730
16.8.4 Compensated over and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC (59_27)................................ 730
16.8.4.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................731
16.8.4.2 Application......................................................................................................................................731
16.8.4.3 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................... 733
16.8.5 Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC (51)................................................................ 734
16.8.5.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 734
16.8.5.2 Application..................................................................................................................................... 734
16.8.5.3 Setting guidelines.........................................................................................................................734
16.8.6 Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC (94)............................................................................................ 734
16.8.6.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 734
16.8.6.2 Application..................................................................................................................................... 735
16.8.6.3 Setting guidelines.........................................................................................................................735
16.8.7 Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV (47).................................................. 735
16.8.7.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 735
16.8.7.2 Application..................................................................................................................................... 735
16.8.7.3 Setting guidelines.........................................................................................................................736
16.8.8 Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV (59N)........................................................736
16.8.8.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 736
16.8.8.2 Application..................................................................................................................................... 736
16.8.8.3 Setting guidelines.........................................................................................................................736
16.8.9 Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC (46).................................................. 737
16.8.9.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................737
16.8.9.2 Application..................................................................................................................................... 737
16.8.9.3 Setting guideline........................................................................................................................... 737
16.8.10 Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC (51N)........................................................ 738
16.8.10.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 738
16.8.10.2 Application..................................................................................................................................... 738
16.8.10.3 Setting guidelines.........................................................................................................................738
16.8.11 Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC (51).................................................................................... 738
16.8.11.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 739
16.8.11.2 Application..................................................................................................................................... 739
16.8.11.3 Setting guidelines.........................................................................................................................739
16.8.12 Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC (37)..................................................................................739
16.8.12.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 739
16.8.12.2 Application..................................................................................................................................... 739

Line differential protection RED670 19

Application manual
Table of contents

16.8.12.3 Setting guidelines........................................................................................................................ 740

Section 17 Logic...................................................................................................................... 741

17.1 Tripping logic SMPPTRC (94)..............................................................................................................741
17.1.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................741
17.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................741
17.1.2.1 Three-pole tripping...................................................................................................................... 742
17.1.2.2 Single- and/or three-pole tripping............................................................................................742
17.1.2.3 Single-, two- or three-pole tripping.......................................................................................... 744
17.1.2.4 Lock-out..........................................................................................................................................744
17.1.2.5 Example of directional data....................................................................................................... 744
17.1.2.6 Blocking of the function block................................................................................................... 746
17.1.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................746
17.2 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC................................................................................................................ 746
17.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 746
17.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 746
17.2.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 747
17.3 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH....................................................................................................... 747
17.3.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................747
17.3.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................747
17.3.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 747
17.4 Logic for group alarm WRNCALH...................................................................................................... 747
17.4.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................747
17.4.1.1 Application..................................................................................................................................... 748
17.4.1.2 Setting guidelines........................................................................................................................ 748
17.5 Logic for group indication INDCALH................................................................................................748
17.5.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 748
17.5.1.1 Application..................................................................................................................................... 748
17.5.1.2 Setting guidelines........................................................................................................................ 748
17.6 Configurable logic blocks................................................................................................................... 748
17.6.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 748
17.6.2 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................749
17.6.2.1 Configuration................................................................................................................................ 749
17.7 Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN............................................................................................... 750
17.7.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 750
17.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 750
17.8 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I..............................................................................................751
17.8.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................... 751
17.8.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................752
17.9 Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC................. 753
17.9.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................753
17.9.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................753
17.10 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16............................................................................................. 754

20 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
 Table of contents

17.10.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 754

17.10.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 754
17.11 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation ITBGAPC........................... 755
17.11.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................755
17.11.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 755
17.12 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision TEIGAPC......... 756
17.12.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 756
17.12.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 756
17.12.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 757
17.13 Comparator for integer inputs - INTCOMP..................................................................................... 757
17.13.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................757
17.13.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................757
17.13.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 757
17.13.4 Setting example............................................................................................................................... 758
17.14 Comparator for real inputs - REALCOMP........................................................................................ 758
17.14.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 758
17.14.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 759
17.14.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 759
17.14.4 Setting example............................................................................................................................... 759

Section 18 Monitoring............................................................................................................ 761

18.1 Measurement.........................................................................................................................................761
18.1.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................761
18.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................761
18.1.3 Zero clamping................................................................................................................................... 763
18.1.4 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 763
18.1.4.1 Setting examples.......................................................................................................................... 766
18.2 Gas medium supervision SSIMG (63)................................................................................................ 772
18.2.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................772
18.2.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................772
18.2.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 772
18.3 Liquid medium supervision SSIML (71).............................................................................................773
18.3.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................773
18.3.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................773
18.3.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 773
18.4 Breaker monitoring SSCBR................................................................................................................. 774
18.4.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................774
18.4.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................774
18.4.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 776
18.4.3.1 Setting procedure on the IED..................................................................................................... 777
18.5 Event function EVENT..........................................................................................................................778
18.5.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................778
18.5.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................778

Line differential protection RED670 21

Application manual
Table of contents

18.5.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 778

18.6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE............................................................................................................ 779
18.6.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................779
18.6.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................779
18.6.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................780
18.6.3.1 Recording times............................................................................................................................ 782
18.6.3.2 Binary input signals...................................................................................................................... 783
18.6.3.3 Analog input signals.....................................................................................................................783
18.6.3.4 Sub-function parameters............................................................................................................784
18.6.3.5 Consideration................................................................................................................................785
18.7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP....................................................................................... 785
18.7.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 785
18.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 785
18.7.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................786
18.8 Fault locator LMBRFLO....................................................................................................................... 786
18.8.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 786
18.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 786
18.8.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 787
18.8.3.1 Connection of analog currents.................................................................................................. 788
18.9 Limit counter L4UFCNT.......................................................................................................................788
18.9.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 789
18.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 789
18.9.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................789
18.10 Running hour-meter TEILGAPC......................................................................................................... 789
18.10.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 789
18.10.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 789
18.10.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................790
18.11 Current harmonic monitoring CHMMHAN...................................................................................... 790
18.11.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 790
18.11.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 790
18.11.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 791
18.11.3.1 Setting procedure on the IED..................................................................................................... 791
18.12 Voltage harmonic monitoring VHMMHAN.......................................................................................792
18.12.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................792
18.12.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 792
18.12.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 793
18.12.3.1 Setting procedure on the IED.....................................................................................................793
18.13 Through fault monitoring PTRSTHR (51TF).................................................................................... 794
18.13.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 794
18.13.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 794
18.13.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 795
18.13.3.1 Setting procedure on the IED.....................................................................................................795
18.13.3.2 Consideration of zero sequence currents............................................................................... 796

22 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
 Table of contents

18.13.3.3 On-line correction with on-load tap changer position..........................................................796

18.13.3.4 Through fault detection.............................................................................................................. 797
18.13.3.5 Through fault I2t alarms.............................................................................................................. 798
18.13.3.6 Initial values for cumulative I2t and number of through faults........................................... 798
18.13.4 Setting examples............................................................................................................................. 799
18.13.4.1 Typical main CT connections for transformer........................................................................799
18.13.4.2 Application examples for power transformers...................................................................... 801
18.13.4.3 Application example for OHL..................................................................................................... 810
18.14 Current harmonic monitoring CHMMHAI(ITHD)............................................................................ 810
18.14.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 810
18.14.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 810
18.14.3 Setting guidelines.............................................................................................................................811
18.14.3.1 Setting procedure on the IED..................................................................................................... 812
18.15 Voltage harmonic monitoring VHMMHAI(VTHD)........................................................................... 813
18.15.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................813
18.15.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................813
18.15.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 813
18.15.3.1 Setting procedure on the IED.....................................................................................................814

Section 19 Metering................................................................................................................ 815

19.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT...............................................................................................................815
19.1.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................815
19.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................815
19.1.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 815
19.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR.............................................816
19.2.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................................816
19.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 816
19.2.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 817

Section 20 Ethernet-based communication........................................................................ 819

20.1 Access point.......................................................................................................................................... 819
20.1.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 819
20.1.2 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 819
20.2 Redundant communication................................................................................................................820
20.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 820
20.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 820
20.2.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 822
20.3 Merging unit.......................................................................................................................................... 822
20.3.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 822
20.3.2 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 823
20.4 Routes.....................................................................................................................................................823
20.4.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 823
20.4.2 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 823

Line differential protection RED670 23

Application manual
Table of contents

Section 21 Station communication...................................................................................... 825

21.1 Communication protocols..................................................................................................................825
21.2 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.......................................................................................... 825
21.2.1 Application IEC 61850-8-1.............................................................................................................. 825
21.2.2 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 827
21.2.3 Horizontal communication via GOOSE........................................................................................ 827
21.2.3.1 Sending data..................................................................................................................................827
21.2.3.2 Receiving data............................................................................................................................... 828
21.3 IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol........................................................................... 828
21.3.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................... 828
21.3.2 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................830
21.3.2.1 Specific settings related to the IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication........................... 831
21.3.2.2 Loss of communication when used with LDCM......................................................................831
21.3.2.3 Setting examples for IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE and time synchronization........................... 835
21.4 LON communication protocol...........................................................................................................840
21.4.1 Application........................................................................................................................................840
21.4.2 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND............................................................................................ 841
21.4.2.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 841
21.4.2.2 Application.....................................................................................................................................842
21.4.2.3 Setting guidelines........................................................................................................................ 842
21.5 SPA communication protocol............................................................................................................ 842
21.5.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 842
21.5.2 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................843
21.6 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol..................................................................................... 844
21.6.1 Application........................................................................................................................................844
21.6.1.1 Functionality................................................................................................................................. 844
21.6.1.2 Design.............................................................................................................................................844
21.6.2 Settings..............................................................................................................................................847
21.6.2.1 Settings for RS485 and optical serial communication......................................................... 847
21.6.2.2 Settings from PCM600................................................................................................................848
21.6.3 Function and information types...................................................................................................850
21.7 DNP3 Communication protocol.........................................................................................................851
21.7.1 Application.........................................................................................................................................851

Section 22 Remote communication......................................................................................853

22.1 Binary signal transfer.......................................................................................................................... 853
22.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 853
22.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 853
22.1.2.1 Communication hardware solutions........................................................................................854
22.1.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................855

Section 23 Security................................................................................................................. 861

23.1 Authority status ATHSTAT..................................................................................................................861

24 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
 Table of contents

23.1.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 861

23.2 Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG...................................................................... 861
23.2.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 861
23.3 Change lock CHNGLCK........................................................................................................................862
23.3.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 862
23.4 Denial of service SCHLCCH/RCHLCCH ........................................................................................... 863
23.4.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 863
23.4.2 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................863

Section 24 Basic IED functions..............................................................................................865

24.1 IED identifiers TERMINALID............................................................................................................... 865
24.1.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 865
24.2 Product information PRODINF.......................................................................................................... 865
24.2.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 865
24.2.2 Factory defined settings................................................................................................................865
24.3 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP................................................................................... 866
24.3.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 866
24.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 866
24.3.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................867
24.4 Parameter setting groups.................................................................................................................. 867
24.4.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 867
24.4.2 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................867
24.5 Rated system frequency PRIMVAL.................................................................................................... 867
24.5.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 868
24.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 868
24.5.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................868
24.6 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM................................................................................................. 868
24.6.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 868
24.6.2 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................868
24.7 Global base values GBASVAL............................................................................................................. 869
24.7.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................... 869
24.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 869
24.7.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................869
24.8 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI............................................................................................... 869
24.8.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 869
24.8.2 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................870
24.9 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO ..........................................................................................870
24.9.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 870
24.9.2 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................870
24.10 Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI.................................................................................................... 870
24.10.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 870
24.10.2 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................870
24.11 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI...............................................................................................870

Line differential protection RED670 25

Application manual
Table of contents

24.11.1 Application.........................................................................................................................................871
24.11.2 Frequency values.............................................................................................................................. 871
24.11.3 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 872
24.12 Test mode functionality TESTMODE................................................................................................ 876
24.12.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 876
24.12.1.1 IEC 61850 protocol test mode....................................................................................................877
24.12.2 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................878
24.13 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN........................................................................................... 878
24.13.1 Application........................................................................................................................................ 878
24.13.2 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................879
24.13.2.1 System time.................................................................................................................................. 880
24.13.2.2 Synchronization............................................................................................................................880
24.13.2.3 Process bus IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE synchronization.............................................................882
24.13.2.4 Time synchronization for differential protection and IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
sampled data.................................................................................................................................883

Section 25 Requirements....................................................................................................... 885

25.1 Current transformer requirements.................................................................................................. 885
25.1.1 Current transformer basic classification and requirements.................................................. 885
25.1.2 Conditions.........................................................................................................................................886
25.1.3 Fault current......................................................................................................................................887
25.1.4 Secondary wire resistance and additional load.........................................................................887
25.1.5 General current transformer requirements............................................................................... 888
25.1.6 Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements..................................................................... 888
25.1.6.1 Line differential protection........................................................................................................ 888
25.1.6.2 Distance protection..................................................................................................................... 890
25.1.6.3 Breaker failure protection........................................................................................................... 891
25.1.6.4 Restricted ground fault protection (low impedance differential)......................................892
25.1.7 Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other standards.........................894
25.1.7.1 Current transformers according to IEC 61869-2, class P, PR...............................................894
25.1.7.2 Current transformers according to IEC 61869-2, class PX, PXR (and old IEC
60044-6, class TPS and old British Standard, class X)..........................................................894
25.1.7.3 Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE...................................................................... 895
25.2 Voltage transformer requirements.................................................................................................. 895
25.3 SNTP server requirements................................................................................................................. 896
25.4 PTP requirements................................................................................................................................ 896
25.5 Sample specification of communication requirements for the protection and control
terminals in digital telecommunication networks........................................................................ 896
25.6 IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE Merging unit requirements .......................................................................897

Section 26 Glossary................................................................................................................ 899

26 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 1
Introduction

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manual GUID-AB423A30-13C2-46AF-B7FE-A73BB425EB5F v19

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted per
function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection
function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance for calculating settings.

1.2 Intended audience GUID-C9B8127F-5748-4BEA-9E4F-CC762FE28A3A v11

This manual addresses the protection and control engineer responsible for planning, pre-
engineering and engineering.

The protection and control engineer must be experienced in electrical power engineering and have
knowledge of related technology, such as protection schemes and communication principles.

Line differential protection RED670 27

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Introduction

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set GUID-3AA69EA6-F1D8-47C6-A8E6-562F29C67172 v16

Deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase

Decommissioning
Commissioning

Maintenance
Engineering

Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual

Commissioning manual
Operation manual

Application manual

Technical manual

Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd
IEC07000220 V4 EN-US

Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the various tools
available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides instructions on how to set up a
PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also recommends a sequence
for the engineering of protection and control functions, as well as communication engineering for
IEC 61850.

The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual provides
procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are organized in the
chronological order in which the IED should be installed.

The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The manual can
also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance during the testing
phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking of external circuitry and energizing the
IED, parameter setting and configuration as well as verifying settings by secondary injection. The
manual describes the process of testing an IED in a substation which is not in service. The
chapters are organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be commissioned. The
relevant procedures may be followed also during the service and maintenance activities.

28 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 1
Introduction

The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring, controlling and setting of the
IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to view calculated and
measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted per
function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection
function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance for calculating settings.

The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function blocks, logic
diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per function.
The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and
commissioning phase, and during normal service.

The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols supported by the
IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific implementations.

The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific to the IED.
The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding communication protocol
manual.

The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber security when
communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role based access control, and
product engineering for cyber security related events are described and sorted by function. The
guideline can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and
commissioning phase, and during normal service.

1.3.2 Document revision history GUID-C8027F8A-D3CB-41C1-B078-F9E59BB73A6C v8

Document revision/date History

–/May 2017 First release
A/October 2017 Information updated
B/March 2018 2.2 Maintenance release 1
C/June 2018 Added new functions and resolved bugs
D/November 2018 Added harmonic, delta, and PSTPDIF functions

1.3.3 Related documents GUID-94E8A5CA-BE1B-45AF-81E7-5A41D34EE112 v7

Documents related to RED670 Document numbers

Application manual 1MRK 505 376-UUS
Commissioning manual 1MRK 505 378-UUS
Product guide 1MRK 505 379-BEN
Technical manual 1MRK 505 377-UUS
Type test certificate 1MRK 505 379-TUS

Line differential protection RED670 29

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Introduction

670 series manuals Document numbers

Operation manual 1MRK 500 127-UUS
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 398-UUS
Installation manual 1MRK 514 026-UUS
Communication protocol manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 391-UUS
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 2 1MRK 511 393-UEN
Point list manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 397-UUS
Accessories guide 1MRK 514 012-BUS
Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN

1.4 Document symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols GUID-2945B229-DAB0-4F15-8A0E-B9CF0C2C7B15 v13

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in
electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in personal
injury.

The caution hot surface icon indicates important information or warning about the
temperature of product surfaces.

Class 1 Laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes and do not view
directly with optical instruments.

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the

concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard which
could result in corruption of software or damage to equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.

30 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 1
Introduction

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project or how to
use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand that under
certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result in degraded process
performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important that the user fully complies with all
warning and cautionary notices.

1.4.2 Document conventions GUID-96DFAB1A-98FE-4B26-8E90-F7CEB14B1AB6 v8

• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary also
contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push button
icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press .
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.
• the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the signal name
may be customized using the PCM600 software.
• the character * after an input signal name indicates that the signal must be connected
to another function block in the application configuration to achieve a valid application
configuration.
• Dimensions are provided both in inches and millimeters. If it is not specifically mentioned
then the dimension is in millimeters.

1.5 IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping GUID-C5133366-7260-4C47-A975-7DBAB3A33A96 v7

Function block names are used in ACT and PST to identify functions. Respective function block
names of Edition 1 logical nodes and Edition 2 logical nodes are shown in the table below.

Table 1: IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes
AEGPVOC AEGGAPC AEGPVOC
AGSAL AGSAL AGSAL
SECLLN0
ALMCALH ALMCALH ALMCALH
ALTIM - ALTIM
ALTMS - ALTMS
ALTRK - ALTRK
BCZPDIF BCZPDIF BCZPDIF
BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF
Table continues on next page

Line differential protection RED670 31

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF
BDCGAPC SWSGGIO BBCSWI
BDCGAPC
BDZSGAPC BBS6LLN0 LLN0
BDZSGAPC BDZSGAPC
BFPTRC_F01 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F02 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F03 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F04 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F05 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F06 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F07 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F08 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F09 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F10 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F11 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F12 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F13 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F14 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F15 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F16 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F17 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F18 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F19 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F20 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F21 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F22 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F23 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F24 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BICPTRC_01 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_02 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_03 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_04 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_05 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BRCPTOC BRCPTOC BRCPTOC
BRPTOC BRPTOC BRPTOC
BTIGAPC B16IFCVI BTIGAPC
BUSPTRC_B1 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BBSPLLN0
BUSPTRC_B2 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
Table continues on next page

32 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BUSPTRC_B3 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B4 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B5 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B6 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B7 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B8 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B9 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B10 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B11 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B12 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B13 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B14 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B15 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B16 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B17 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B18 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B19 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B20 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B21 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B22 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B23 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B24 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUTPTRC_B1 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BBTPLLN0
BUTPTRC_B2 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B3 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B4 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B5 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B6 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B7 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B8 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BZISGGIO BZISGGIO BZISGAPC
BZITGGIO BZITGGIO BZITGAPC
BZNPDIF_Z1 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z2 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z3 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z4 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z5 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z6 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
Table continues on next page

Line differential protection RED670 33

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BZNSPDIF_A BZNSPDIF BZASGAPC
BZASPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNSPDIF_B BZNSPDIF BZBSGAPC
BZBSPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNTPDIF_A BZNTPDIF BZATGAPC
BZATPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
BZNTPDIF_B BZNTPDIF BZBTGAPC
BZBTPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
CBPGAPC CBPLLN0 CBPMMXU
CBPMMXU CBPPTRC
CBPPTRC HOLPTOV
HOLPTOV HPH1PTOV
HPH1PTOV PH3PTOC
PH3PTUC PH3PTUC
PH3PTOC RP3PDOP
RP3PDOP
CCPDSC CCRPLD CCPDSC
CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRBRF
CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF
CCSRBRF CCSRBRF CCSRBRF
CCSSPVC CCSRDIF CCSSPVC
CMMXU CMMXU CMMXU
CMSQI CMSQI CMSQI
COUVGAPC COUVLLN0 COUVPTOV
COUVPTOV COUVPTUV
COUVPTUV
CVGAPC GF2LLN0 GF2MMXN
GF2MMXN GF2PHAR
GF2PHAR GF2PTOV
GF2PTOV GF2PTUC
GF2PTUC GF2PTUV
GF2PTUV GF2PVOC
GF2PVOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN
D2PTOC D2LLN0 D2PTOC
D2PTOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC
DRPRDRE DRPRDRE DRPRDRE
ECPSCH ECPSCH ECPSCH
ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH
Table continues on next page

34 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

EF2PTOC EF2LLN0 EF2PTRC
EF2PTRC EF2RDIR
EF2RDIR GEN2PHAR
GEN2PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EF4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EFPIOC EFPIOC EFPIOC
EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC
ETPMMTR ETPMMTR ETPMMTR
FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS
FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS
FRPSPDIS FPSRPDIS FPSRPDIS
FTAQFVR FTAQFVR FTAQFVR
FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC
SDDSPVC
GENPDIF GENPDIF GENGAPC
GENPDIF
GENPHAR
GENPTRC
GOPPDOP GOPPDOP GOPPDOP
PH1PTRC
GRPTTR GRPTTR GRPTTR
GSPTTR GSPTTR GSPTTR
GUPPDUP GUPPDUP GUPPDUP
PH1PTRC
HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF
INDCALCH INDCALH INDCALH
ITBGAPC IB16FCVB ITBGAPC
L3CPDIF L3CPDIF L3CGAPC
L3CPDIF
L3CPHAR
L3CPTRC
L4CPDIF L4CLLN0 LLN0
L4CPDIF L4CGAPC
L4CPTRC L4CPDIF
L4CPSCH
L4CPTRC
L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L4UFCNT
L6CPDIF L6CPDIF L6CGAPC
L6CPDIF
L6CPHAR
L6CPTRC
LAPPGAPC LAPPLLN0 LAPPPDUP
LAPPPDUP LAPPPUPF
LAPPPUPF
Table continues on next page

Line differential protection RED670 35

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC
LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC
LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV
LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC
LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC
LCPTTR LCPTTR LCPTTR
LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC
LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV
LD0LLN0 LLN0 -
LDLPSCH LDLPDIF LDLPSCH
LDRGFC STSGGIO LDRGFC
LEXPDIS LEXPDIS LEXPDIS
LEXPTRC
LFPTTR LFPTTR LFPTTR
LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LMBRFLO
LOLSPTR LOLSPTR LOLSPTR
LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LOVPTUV
LPHD LPHD
LPTTR LPTTR LPTTR
LT3CPDIF LT3CPDIF LT3CGAPC
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPHAR
LT3CPTRC
LT6CPDIF LT6CPDIF LT6CGAPC
LT6CPDIF
LT6CPHAR
LT6CPTRC
MVGAPC MVGGIO MVGAPC
NS2PTOC NS2LLN0 NS2PTOC
NS2PTOC NS2PTRC
NS2PTRC
NS4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR PH1PTOC
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
O2RWPTOV GEN2LLN0 O2RWPTOV
O2RWPTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
OC4PTOC OC4LLN0 GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH3PTOC
PH3PTOC PH3PTRC
PH3PTRC
OEXPVPH OEXPVPH OEXPVPH
OOSPPAM OOSPPAM OOSPPAM
OOSPTRC
Table continues on next page

36 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

OV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 OV2PTOV
OV2PTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PAPGAPC PAPGAPC PAPGAPC
PCFCNT PCGGIO PCFCNT
PH4SPTOC GEN4PHAR GEN4PHAR
OCNDLLN0 PH1BPTOC
PH1BPTOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PHPIOC PHPIOC PHPIOC
PSLPSCH ZMRPSL PSLPSCH
PSPPPAM PSPPPAM PSPPPAM
PSPPTRC
QCBAY QCBAY BAY/LLN0
QCRSV QCRSV QCRSV
RCHLCCH RCHLCCH RCHLCCH
REFPDIF REFPDIF REFPDIF
ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPTRC
ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV
ROV2PTOV
SAPFRC SAPFRC SAPFRC
SAPTOF SAPTOF SAPTOF
SAPTUF SAPTUF SAPTUF
SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC
SCHLCCH SCHLCCH SCHLCCH
SCILO SCILO SCILO
SCSWI SCSWI SCSWI
SDEPSDE SDEPSDE SDEPSDE
SDEPTOC
SDEPTOV
SDEPTRC
SESRSYN RSY1LLN0 AUT1RSYN
AUT1RSYN MAN1RSYN
MAN1RSYN SYNRSYN
SYNRSYN
SLGAPC SLGGIO SLGAPC
SMBRREC SMBRREC SMBRREC
SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC
SP16GAPC SP16GGIO SP16GAPC
SPC8GAPC SPC8GGIO SPC8GAPC
SPGAPC SPGGIO SPGAPC
SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR
SSIMG SSIMG SSIMG
Table continues on next page

Line differential protection RED670 37

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

SSIML SSIML SSIML
PTRSTHR PTRSTHR PTRSTHR
STBPTOC STBPTOC BBPMSS
STBPTOC
STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ
STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ
SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR
SXSWI SXSWI SXSWI
T2WPDIF T2WPDIF T2WGAPC
T2WPDIF
T2WPHAR
T2WPTRC
T3WPDIF T3WPDIF T3WGAPC
T3WPDIF
T3WPHAR
T3WPTRC
TCLYLTC TCLYLTC TCLYLTC
TCSLTC
TCMYLTC TCMYLTC TCMYLTC
TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEIGAPC
TEIGGIO
TEILGAPC TEILGGIO TEILGAPC
TMAGAPC TMAGGIO TMAGAPC
TPPIOC TPPIOC TPPIOC
TR1ATCC TR1ATCC TR1ATCC
TR8ATCC TR8ATCC TR8ATCC
TRPTTR TRPTTR TRPTTR
U2RWPTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC U2RWPTUV
U2RWPTUV
UV2PTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC UV2PTUV
UV2PTUV
VDCPTOV VDCPTOV VDCPTOV
VDSPVC VDRFUF VDSPVC
VMMXU VMMXU VMMXU
VMSQI VMSQI VMSQI
VNMMXU VNMMXU VNMMXU
VRPVOC VRLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC PH1PTUV
PH1PTUV VRPVOC
VRPVOC
VSGAPC VSGGIO VSGAPC
WRNCALH WRNCALH WRNCALH
ZC1PPSCH ZPCPSCH ZPCPSCH
Table continues on next page

38 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

ZC1WPSCH ZPCWPSCH ZPCWPSCH
ZCLCPSCH ZCLCPLAL ZCLCPSCH
ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH
ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH
ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF
ZGVPDIS ZGVLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ZGVPDIS
ZGVPDIS ZGVPTUV
ZGVPTUV
ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS
ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS
ZMFCPDIS ZMFCLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPTRC
ZMFPTRC ZMMMXU
ZMMMXU
ZMFPDIS ZMFLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU ZMMMXU
ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS
ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS
ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS
ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS
ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS
ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS
ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS
ZMRPSB ZMRPSB ZMRPSB
ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC

Line differential protection RED670 39

Application manual
40
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 2
Application

Section 2 Application

2.1 General IED application

M13635-3 v7
The Intelligent Electronic Device (IED) is used for the protection, control and monitoring of
overhead lines and cables in all types of networks. The IED can be used from distribution up to the
highest voltage levels. It is suitable for the protection of heavily loaded lines and multi-terminal
lines where the requirement for tripping is one-, two-, and/or three-pole. The IED is also suitable
for protection of cable feeders to generator block transformers.

The phase segregated current differential protection provides an excellent sensitivity for high
resistive faults and gives a secure phase selection. The availability of six stabilized current inputs
per phase allows use on multi-breaker arrangements in three terminal applications or up to five
terminal applications with single breaker arrangements. The communication between the IEDs
involved in the differential scheme is based on the IEEE C37.94 standard and can be duplicated for
important installations when required for redundancy reasons. Charging current compensation
allows high sensitivity also on long overhead lines and cables.

A full scheme distance protection is included to provide independent protection in parallel with
the differential scheme in case of a communication channel failure for the differential scheme. The
distance protection then provide protection for the entire line including the remote end back up
capability either in case of a communications failure or via use of an independent communication
channel to provide a fully redundant scheme of protection (that is a second main protection
scheme). Eight channels for intertrip and other binary signals are available in the communication
between the IEDs.

A high impedance differential protection can be used to protect T-feeders or line reactors.

The auto-reclose for single-, two- and/or three pole reclosing includes priority circuits for multi-
breaker arrangements. It co-operates with the synchronism check function with high-speed or
delayed reclosing.

High set instantaneous phase and ground overcurrent, four step directional or non-directional
delayed phase and ground overcurrent, thermal overload and two step under- and overvoltage
functions are examples of the available functions allowing the user to fulfill any application
requirement.

The IED can also be provided with a full control and interlocking functionality including co-
operation with the synchronism check function to allow integration of the main or back-up
control.

Disturbance recording and fault locator are available to allow independent post-fault analysis after
primary disturbances. The Disturbance recorder will also show remote station currents, as
received to this IED, time compensated with measure communication time.

Out of Step function is available to separate power system sections close to electrical centre at
occurring out of step.

The IED can be used in applications with IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE process bus with up to eight
merging units (MU) depending on the other functionality included in the IED. Each MU has eight

Line differential protection RED670 41

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Application

analog channels, four currents and four voltages. Conventional and Merging Unit channels can be
mixed freely in the application.

If IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication is interrupted, the data received from the

merging units (MU) after the time of the interruption will be incorrect. The data
stored in the IED and displayed on the local HMI will be corrupt. For this reason, it is
important to connect the signal from the respective MU units (SMPLLOST) to the
disturbance recorder.

Forcing of binary inputs and outputs is a convenient way to test wiring in substations as well as
testing configuration logic in the IEDs. Basically it means that all binary inputs and outputs on the
IED I/O modules (BOM, BIM, IOM & SOM) can be forced to arbitrary values.

Central Account Management is an authentication infrastructure that offers a secure solution for
enforcing access control to IEDs and other systems within a substation. This incorporates
management of user accounts, roles and certificates and the distribution of such, a procedure
completely transparent to the user.

Flexible Product Naming allows the customer to use an IED-vendor independent IEC 61850 model
of the IED. This customer model will be used as the IEC 61850 data model, but all other aspects of
the IED will remain unchanged (e.g., names on the local HMI and names in the tools). This offers
significant flexibility to adapt the IED to the customers' system and standard solution.

The logic is prepared with a graphical tool. The advanced logic capability allows special
applications such as automatic opening of disconnectors in multi-breaker arrangements, closing
of breaker rings, load transfer logics etc. The graphical configuration tool ensures simple and fast
testing and commissioning.

A loop testing function allows complete testing including remote end IED when local IED is set in
test mode.
M11788-3 v10
Communication via optical connections ensures immunity against disturbances.
GUID-F5776DD1-BD04-4872-BB89-A0412B4B5CC3 v1

The following tables list all the functions available in the IED. Those functions that
are not exposed to the user or do not need to be configured are not described in
this manual.

2.2 Main protection functions GUID-66BAAD98-851D-4AAC-B386-B38B57718BD2 v14

Table 2: Example of quantities

2 = number of basic instances

0-3 = option quantities
3-A03 = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)

42 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential

function name
RED670
(Customized)
Differential protection
HZPDIF 87 High impedance differential protection, single phase 0-3
REFPDIF 87N Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance 0–2
L3CPDIF 87L Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line ends 0-1
L6CPDIF 87L Line differential protection for 6 CT sets, 3-5 line ends 0-1
LT3CPDIF 87LT Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line ends, in- 0-1
zone transformer
LT6CPDIF 87LT Line differential protection for 6 CT sets, 3-5 line ends, in- 0-1
zone transformer
L4CPDIF 87L High speed line differential protection for 4 CT sets, 2-3 line 0-1
ends
LDLPSCH 87L Line differential protection logic 0-1
LDRGFC 11REL Additional security logic for differential protection 0-1
Impedance protection
ZMQPDIS, 21 Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic 0-5
ZMQAPDIS
ZDRDIR 21D Directional impedance quadrilateral 0-2
ZMCPDIS, 21 Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for 0-5
ZMCAPDIS series compensated lines
ZDSRDIR 21D Directional impedance quadrilateral, including series 0-2
compensation
FDPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle 0-2
ZMHPDIS 21 Full-scheme distance protection, mho characteristic 0-5
ZMMPDIS, 21 Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for ground 0-5
ZMMAPDIS faults
ZDMRDIR 21D Directional impedance element for mho characteristic 0-2
ZDARDIR Additional distance protection directional function for 0-2
ground faults
ZSMGAPC Mho impedance supervision logic 0-1
FMPSPDIS 21 Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment 0-2
ZMRPDIS, 21 Distance measuring zone, quad characteristic separate Ph-Ph 0-5
ZMRAPDIS and Ph-E settings
FRPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable 0-2
angle
ZMFPDIS 21 High speed distance protection, quad and mho characteristic 0-1
ZMFCPDIS 21 High speed distance protection for series comp. lines, quad 0-1
and mho characteristic
PPLPHIZ Phase preference logic 0-1
PPL2PHIZ Phase preference logic 0-1
ZMRPSB 68 Power swing detection 0-1
Table continues on next page

Line differential protection RED670 43

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential

function name
RED670
(Customized)
PSLPSCH Power swing logic 0-1
PSPPPAM 78 Poleslip/out-of-step protection 0-1
OOSPPAM 78 Out-of-step protection 0-1
ZCVPSOF Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based 0-1

2.3 Back-up protection functions GUID-A8D0852F-807F-4442-8730-E44808E194F0 v14

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description

function name
RED670
(Customized)
Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 0-3
OC4PTOC 51_671) Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps 0-3

EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection 0-1

EF4PTOC 51N Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps 0-3
67N2)
NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent 0-2
protection
SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power 0-1
protection
LCPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celsius 0-2
LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Fahrenheit 0-2
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 0-2
STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection 0-2
CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance protection 0-2
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower protection 0-2
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower protection 0-2
BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check 1
VRPVOC 51V Voltage restrained overcurrent protection 0-3

Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 0-2
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 0-2
ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual overvoltage protection 0-2
OEXPVPH 24 Overexcitation protection 0-1
Table continues on next page

44 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description

function name
RED670
(Customized)
VDCPTOV 60 Voltage differential protection 0-2
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 1
PAPGAPC 27 Radial feeder protection 0-1

Frequency protection
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency protection 0-6
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency protection 0-6
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change of frequency protection 0-6

Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC General current and voltage protection 0-4

General calculation
SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0-6

1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage

2.4 Control and monitoring functions GUID-E3777F16-0B76-4157-A3BF-0B6B978863DE v17

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line

function name Differential
RED670
(Customized)
Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing 0-2
check and synchronizing
SMBRREC 79 Autorecloser 0-4
APC10 3 Control functionality for a 0-1
single bay, max 10 objects
(1CB), including
interlocking (see Table 4)
APC15 3 Control functionality for a 0-1
single bay, max 15 objects
(2CB), including
interlocking (see Table 5)
QCBAY Bay control 1
LOCREM Handling of LR-switch 1
positions
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1
SXCBR Circuit breaker 6
Table continues on next page

Line differential protection RED670 45

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line

function name Differential
RED670
(Customized)
SLGAPC Logic rotating switch for 15
function selection and
LHMI presentation
VSGAPC Selector mini switch 30
DPGAPC Generic communication 32
function for Double Point
indication
SPC8GAPC Single point generic 5
control function 8 signals
AUTOBITS Automation bits, 3
command function for
DNP3.0
SINGLECMD Single command, 16 8
signals
I103CMD Function commands for 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103GENCMD Function commands 50
generic for IEC
60870-5-103
I103POSCMD IED commands with 50
position and select for
IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMDV IED direct commands 50
with position for IEC
60870-5-103
I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 1
60870-5-103
I103USRCMD Function commands user 4
defined for IEC
60870-5-103
Secondary
system
supervision
CCSSPVC 87 Current circuit 0-2
supervision
FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 0-3
VDSPVC 60 Fuse failure supervision 0-2
based on voltage
difference
DELVSPVC 7V_78 Voltage delta supervision, 4
V 2 phase
DELISPVC 71 Current delta supervision, 4
2 phase
DELSPVC 78 Real delta supervision, 4
real
Logic
SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic 12
Table continues on next page

46 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line

function name Differential
RED670
(Customized)
SMAGAPC General start matrix block 12
TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12
ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5
WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5
INDCALH Logic for group indication 5
AND, GATE, INV, Basic configurable logic 40-420
LLD, OR, blocks (see Table 3)
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET, XOR
ANDQT, Configurable logic blocks 0-1
INDCOMBSPQT, Q/T (see Table 6)
INDEXTSPQT,
INVALIDQT,
INVERTERQT,
ORQT,
PULSETIMERQT,
RSMEMORYQT,
SRMEMORYQT,
TIMERSETQT,
XORQT
AND, GATE, INV, Extension logic package 0-1
LLD, OR, (see Table 7)
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SLGAPC,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET,
VSGAPC, XOR
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function 1
block
B16I Boolean to integer 18
conversion, 16 bit
BTIGAPC Boolean to integer 16
conversion with logical
node representation, 16
bit
IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 18
conversion
ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 16
conversion with Logic
Node representation
TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator 12
with limit transgression
and overflow supervision
INTCOMP Comparator for integer 30
inputs
REALCOMP Comparator for real 30
inputs

Line differential protection RED670 47

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Application

Table 3: Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks

Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 280
GATE 40
INV 420
LLD 40
OR 320
PULSETIMER 40
RSMEMORY 40
SRMEMORY 40
TIMERSET 60
XOR 40

Table 4: Number of function instances in APC10

Function name Function description Total number of instances
SCILO Interlocking 10
BB_ES 3
A1A2_BS 2
A1A2_DC 3
ABC_BC 1
BH_CONN 1
BH_LINE_A 1
BH_LINE_B 1
DB_BUS_A 1
DB_BUS_B 1
DB_LINE 1
ABC_LINE 1
AB_TRAFO 1
SCSWI Switch controller 10
SXSWI Circuit switch 9
QCRSV Apparatus control 2
RESIN1 1
RESIN2 59
POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 10
XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching 12
device via GOOSE
GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 12
switching device

48 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 2
Application

Table 5: Number of function instances in APC15

Function name Function description Total number of instances
SCILO Interlocking 15
BB_ES 3
A1A2_BS 2
A1A2_DC 3
ABC_BC 1
BH_CONN 1
BH_LINE_A 1
BH_LINE_B 1
DB_BUS_A 1
DB_BUS_B 1
DB_LINE 1
ABC_LINE 1
AB_TRAFO 1
SCSWI Switch controller 15
SXSWI Circuit switch 14
QCRSV Apparatus control 2
RESIN1 1
RESIN2 59
POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 15
XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching 20
device via GOOSE
GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 20
switching device

Table 6: Total number of instances for configurable logic blocks Q/T

Configurable logic blocks Q/T Total number of instances
ANDQT 120
INDCOMBSPQT 20
INDEXTSPQT 20
INVALIDQT 22
INVERTERQT 120
ORQT 120
PULSETIMERQT 40
RSMEMORYQT 40
SRMEMORYQT 40
TIMERSETQT 40
XORQT 40

Line differential protection RED670 49

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Application

Table 7: Total number of instances for extended logic package

Extended configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 220
GATE 49
INV 220
LLD 49
OR 220
PULSETIMER 89
RSMEMORY 40
SLGAPC 74
SRMEMORY 130
TIMERSET 113
VSGAPC 120
XOR 89

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line

function name Differential
RED670
(Customized)
Monitoring
CVMMXN Power system 6
measurement
CMMXU Current measurement 10
VMMXU Voltage measurement 6
phase-phase
CMSQI Current sequence 6
measurement
VMSQI Voltage sequence 6
measurement
VNMMXU Voltage measurement 6
phase-ground
AISVBAS General service value 1
presentation of analog
inputs
EVENT Event function 20
DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1
A4RADR,
B1RBDR-
B22RBDR
SPGAPC Generic communication 96
function for Single Point
indication
SP16GAPC Generic communication 16
function for Single Point
indication 16 inputs
Table continues on next page

50 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line

function name Differential
RED670
(Customized)
MVGAPC Generic communication 24
function for measured
values
BINSTATREP Logical signal status 3
report
RANGE_XP Measured value expander 66
block
SSIMG 63 Insulation supervision for 21
gas medium
SSIML 71 Insulation supervision for 3
liquid medium
SSCBR Circuit breaker condition 0-6
monitoring
LMBRFLO Fault locator 1
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 1
60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined 3
signals for IEC
60870-5-103
I103AR Function status auto- 1
recloser for IEC
60870-5-103
I103EF Function status earth- 1
fault for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT Function status fault 1
protection for IEC
60870-5-103
I103IED IED status for IEC 1
60870-5-103
I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC 1
60870-5-103
I103USRDEF Status for user defined 20
signals for IEC
60870-5-103
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit 30
supervision
TEILGAPC Running hour meter 6
CHMMHAN ITHD Current harmonic
monitoring, 2 phase
VHMMHAN VTHD Voltage harmonic
monitoring, 2 phase
PTRSTHR 51TF Through fault monitoring 0-2
CHMMHAI ITHD Current harmonic 0-3
monitoring, 3 phase
VHMMHAI VTHD Voltage harmonic 0-3
monitoring, 3 phase
Table continues on next page

Line differential protection RED670 51

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line

function name Differential
RED670
(Customized)
Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy 6
calculation and demand
handling

2.5 Communication GUID-5F144B53-B9A7-4173-80CF-CD4C84579CB5 v17

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Function description Line

name Differential
RED670
(Customized)
Station communication
ADE LON communication protocol 1
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON 1
IEC 61850-8-1 IEC 61850 1
GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking 59
GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a double point value 64
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an integer value 32
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value 60
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a single point value 64
MULTICMDRCV, Multiple command and transmit 60/10
MULTICMDSND
AGSAL Generic security application component 1
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1
SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1
LPHD Physical device information 1
PCMACCS IED configuration protocol 1
FSTACCS Field service tool access 1
IEC 61850-9-2 Process bus communication, 8 merging units 0-1
ACTIVLOG Activity logging 1
ALTRK Service tracking 1
PRP IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy protocol 0-1
HSR IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless redundancy 0-1
Table continues on next page

52 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Function description Line

name Differential
RED670
(Customized)
PMUCONF, Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors (see Table 8) 0-1
PMUREPORT,
PHASORREPORT1,
ANALOGREPORT1
BINARYREPORT1,
SMAI1 - SMAI12
3PHSUM
PMUSTATUS
PTP Precision time protocol 1
SCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for non-redundant Ethernet port 6
RCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for redundant Ethernet ports 3
Remote communication
LDCMRecBinStat1 Receive binary status from remote LDCM 6/3/3
LDCMRecBinStat2
LDCMRecBinStat3
Scheme communication
ZCPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic with delta based blocking 0-2
scheme signal transmit
ZC1PPSCH 85 Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance 0-2
protection
ZCRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance 0-2
protection
ZC1WPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase 0-2
segregated communication
ZCLCPSCH Local acceleration logic 0-1
ECPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent 0-1
protection
ECRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual 0-1
overcurrent protection
DTT Direct transfer trip 0-1

Table 8: Number of function instances in Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors

Function name Function description Number of instances
PMUCONF Configuration parameters for C37.118 2011 and IEEE1344 protocol 1
PMUREPORT Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118 1
PHASORREPORT1 Protocol reporting of phasor data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, phasors 1-8 1
ANALOGREPORT1 Protocol reporting of analog data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, analogs 1-8 1
BINARYREPORT1 Protocol reporting of binary data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, binary 1-8 1
SMAI1–SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs 1
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase 6
PMUSTATUS Diagnostics for C37.118 2011 and IEEE1344 protocol 1

Line differential protection RED670 53

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Application

2.6 Basic IED functions GUID-C8F0E5D2-E305-4184-9627-F6B5864216CA v13

Table 9: Basic IED functions

IEC 61850 or function Description
name
INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
BININPUT, SYNCHCAN, Time synchronization
SYNCHGPS,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS, SNTP,
SYNCHSPA
TIMEZONE Time synchronization
IRIG-B Time synchronization
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMAI1 - SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
GBASVAL Global base values for settings
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
COMSTATUS Protocol diagnostic

Table 10: Local HMI functions

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Description
name
LHMICTRL Local HMI signals
LANGUAGE Local human machine language
SCREEN Local HMI Local human machine screen behavior
Table continues on next page

54 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Description

name
FNKEYTY1–FNKEYTY5 Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600
FNKEYMD1–
FNKEYMD5
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI
OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys
GRP1_LED1– Basic part for CP HW LED indication module
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1–
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1–
GRP3_LED15

Line differential protection RED670 55

Application manual
56
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 3
Configuration

Section 3 Configuration

Line differential protection RED670 57

Application manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Configuration

3.1 Description of configuration RED670 IP14804-1 v2

3.1.1 Introduction IP14805-1 v1

3.1.2 Description of configuration A42 GUID-A3E1E81D-9278-4AC1-8AAA-AD0D56DABE23 v1

WA1
RED670 A42 – Single breaker with single or three phase tripping
WA2 12AI (6I+6U)

WA2_VT
QB1 QB2
MET UN

WA1_VT VN MMXU

3 Control
Control
Control MET UN
SSXCBR
S SCBR
SCBR VN MMXU

63 71 94 1→0 79 5(0→1) 25 SC/VC

QA1
S SIMG S SIML SMP PTRC SMB RREC SES RSYN

LINE_CT
Control
Control
Control 52PD PD 50BF 3I>BF 50 3I>> 46 Iub>
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC PDSC CC RBRF PH PIOC BRC PTOC

26 θ>
REM_CT LC PTTR

REM_VT 87L 3Id/I>

QB9 L4C PDIF

MET Usqi MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I<

QC9 V MSQI CV MMXN OC4 PTOC FUF SPVC

DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh MET I MET Isqi

DRP RDRE LMB RFLO ETP MMTR C MMXU C MSQI
LINE_VT

27 2(3U<) 27 3U< 59 2(3U>) MET UN MET U

UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV OV2 PTOV VN MMXU V MMXU

Other Functions available from the function library

87 INd/I 7I DELTAI 7V_78V DELTAU 7 DELTA 51N_67N 4(IN>) 50N IN>> 26 θ> 46I2 4(I2>)
CCS SPVC DELI SPVC DELV SPVC DEL SPVC EF4 PTOC EF PIOC LF PTTR NS4 PTOC

Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f> 81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

Q CBAY ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF SA PTUF STB PTOC VDC PTOV

Optional Functions

ITHD ITHD 2(I>/U<) 85 85 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id> 24 U/f>

CHM MHAI CV GAPC EC PSCH ECRW PSCH GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF OEX PVPH

78 Ucos Zpsl 78 Ucos 51TF 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

OOS PPAM PMU REP PSL PSCH PSP PPAM PTR STHR Q CRSV S CILO S CSWI

67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> VTHD UTHD 51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85

SDEPSDE S XSWI VD SPVC VHM MHAI VR PVOC ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH ZCLC PSCH

85 85 21 Z< 68 Zpsb
ZC PSCH ZCRW PSCH ZCV PSOF ZMF PDIS ZM RPSB

IEC16000199-2-en.vsd

IEC16000199 V2 EN-US

Figure 2: Configuration diagram for configuration A42

58 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 3
Configuration

3.1.3 Description of configuration B33 GUID-1231CFD6-8CEF-464E-8124-E9F7EFD0FF62 v1

WA1
RED670 B33 – Multi breaker with single or three phase tripping
12AI (6I+6U)
QB1 WA1_VT

WA1_CT Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD MET UN
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC VN MMXU

Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD 3 Control
Control
Control
WA1_QA1
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC SSXCBR
S SCBR
SCBR
REM_CT
71 63
S SIML S SIMG
WA1_QB6
LINE1_QB9 87L 87L 3Id/I>

LINE1_VT LDL PSCH LT3C PDIF Σ

MET Usqi MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I<

QB61 V MSQI CV MMXN OC4 PTOC FUF SPVC

DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh

DRP RDRE LMB RFLO ETP MMTR

TIE_QA1 MET Isqi MET I 46 Iub> 50 3I>> 26 3I>STB

θ>
C MSQI C MMXU BRC PTOC PH PIOC LC PTTR

TIE_CT
MET U MET UN 27 3U< 27 3U< 59 3U>
LOV PTUV
LINE2_VT V MMXU VN MMXU UV2 PTUV OV2 PTOV

MET UN
QB62
WA2_VT VN MMXU

MET UN 94
94 1→0
1→0 79
79 0→1
5(0→1) 25 SC
25 SC/VC
LINE2_QB9 SMP
VN MMXU SMPPTRC
PTRC SMB
SMBRREC
RREC SES
SESRSYN
RSYN

Other Functions available from the function library

87 INd/I 7I DELTAI 7V_78V DELTAU 7 DELTA 51N_67N 4(IN>) 50N IN>>
CCS SPVC DELI SPVC DELV SPVC DEL SPVC EF4 PTOC EF PIOC

WA2_QB6 26 Θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 3 Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f>

LF PTTR NS4 PTOC Q CBAY ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF

81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

SA PTUF STB PTOC VDC PTOV
WA2_QA1 Optional Functions
ITHD ITHD 2(I>/U<) 85 85 32 P> 37 P<
CHM MHAI CV GAPC EC PSCH ECRW PSCH GOP PDOP GUP PDUP

87 Id> 87L 3Id/I> 87L 3Id/I> 87L 3Id/I> 24 U/f> 78 Ucos

QB2 HZ PDIF L3C PDIF L6C PDIF LT6C PDIF OEX PVPH OOS PPAM

WA2 Zpsl 78 Ucos 51TF 3 Control 3 Control

PMU REP PSL PSCH PSP PPAM PTR STHR Q CRSV S CILO

3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<) VTHD UTHD

S CSWI SDE PSDE S XSWI VD SPVC VR PVOC VHM MHAI

85 85 85 85
ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH ZCLC PSCH ZC PSCH ZCRW PSCH ZCV PSOF

21 Z< 68 Zpsb
ZMF PDIS ZM RPSB

IEC16000250-2-en.vsd

IEC16000250 V2 EN-US

Figure 3: Configuration diagram for configuration B33

Line differential protection RED670 59

Application manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Configuration

3.1.4 Description of configuration B42 GUID-D1058782-6EAD-4E94-8513-1D3647E67250 v1

WA1
RED670 B42 – Multi breaker with single or three phase tripping
12AI (6I+6U)
QB1 WA1_VT

WA1_CT Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD MET UN
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC VN MMXU

Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD

WA1_QA1 REM_CT1 SSSSCBR

SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC 3 Control
Control
Control
SSXCBR
S SCBR
SCBR

REM_CT2 71 63
S SIML S SIMG
WA1_QB6 REM_VT

LINE1_QB9 87L 3Id/I>

LINE1_VT L4C PDIF Σ

MET Usqi MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I<

QB61 V MSQI CV MMXN OC4 PTOC FUF SPVC

DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh

DRP RDRE LMB RFLO ETP MMTR

TIE_QA1 MET Isqi MET I 46 Iub> 50 3I>> 26 3I>STB

θ>
C MSQI C MMXU BRC PTOC PH PIOC LC PTTR

TIE_CT
MET U MET UN 27 3U< 27 3U< 59 3U>

LINE2_VT V MMXU VN MMXU UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV OV2 PTOV

MET UN
QB62 WA2_VT VN MMXU

MET UN 94
94 1→0
1→0 79
79 0→1
5(0→1) 25 SC
25 SC/VC
LINE2_QB9 SMP
VN MMXU SMPPTRC
PTRC SMB
SMBRREC
RREC SES
SESRSYN
RSYN

Other Functions available from the function library

87 INd/I 7I DELTAI 7V_78V DELTAU 7 DELTA 51N_67N 4(IN>) 50N IN>>
CCS SPVC DELI SPVC DELV SPVC DEL SPVC EF4 PTOC EF PIOC

WA2_QB6 26 Θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 3 Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f>

LF PTTR NS4 PTOC Q CBAY ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF

81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

SA PTUF STB PTOC VDC PTOV
WA2_QA1
Optional Functions
ITHD ITHD 2(I>/U<) 85 85 32 P> 37 P<
CHM MHAI CV GAPC EC PSCH ECRW PSCH GOP PDOP GUP PDUP

QB2 87 Id> 24 U/f> 78 Ucos Zpsl 78 Ucos

HZ PDIF OEX PVPH OOS PPAM PMU REP PSL PSCH PSP PPAM
WA2
51TF 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control
PTR STHR Q CRSV S CILO S CSWI SDE PSDE S XSWI

60 Ud> VTHD UTHD 51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85

VD SPVC VHM MHAI VR PVOC ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH ZCLC PSCH

85 85 21 Z< 68 Zpsb
ZC PSCH ZCRW PSCH ZCV PSOF ZMF PDIS ZM RPSB

IEC16000251-2-en.vsdx

IEC16000251 V2 EN-US

Figure 4: Configuration diagram for configuration B42

60 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 3
Configuration

3.1.5 Description of configuration C42 GUID-C82DE474-FDC4-49CF-AF12-445716D9C6B6 v1

WA1
RED670 C42 – Single breaker with single or three phase tripping
and back-up distance protection 12AI (6I+6U)
WA2

DFR/SER DR 21FL FL
DRP RDRE LMB RFLO

WA2_VT
QB1 QB2
MET UN

WA1_VT VN MMXU

3 Control
Control
Control MET UN
SSXCBR
S SCBR
SCBR VN MMXU

63 71 94 1→0 79 5(0→1) 25 SC/VC

QA1
S SIMG S SIML SMP PTRC SMB RREC SES RSYN

LINE_CT
Control
Control
Control 52PD PD 50BF 3I>BF 50 3I>> 46 Iub>
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC PDSC CC RBRF PH PIOC BRC PTOC

REM_CT 26 θ>
LC PTTR

REM_VT 87L 3Id/I>

QB9 L4C PDIF

MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I< 21 Z<

QC9 CV MMXN OC4 PTOC FUF SPVC ZMF PDIS

MET W/Varh MET I MET Isqi

ETP MMTR C MMXU C MSQI

85 85 50N IN>> 51N_67N 4(IN>)

LINE_VT EC PSCH ECRW PSCH EF PIOC EF4 PTOC

59 2(3U>) 27 2(3U<) 27 3U<

OV2 PTOV UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV

85 85 68 Zpsb
ZCRW PSCH ZC PSCH ZM RPSB ZCV PSOF

MET Usqi MET UN MET U

V MSQI VN MMXU V MMXU

Other Functions available from the function library

87 INd/I 7I DELTAI 7V_78V DELTAU 7 DELTA 26 θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 78 Ucos Zpsl
CCS SPVC DELI SPVC DELV SPVC DEL SPVC LF PTTR NS4 PTOC OOS PPAM PSL PSCH

Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f> 81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

Q CBAY ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF SA PTUF STB PTOC VDC PTOV ZCLC PSCH

Optional Functions
ITHD ITHD 2(I>/U<) 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id> 24 U/f> 78 Ucos
CHM MHAI CV GAPC GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF OEX PVPH PMU REP PSP PPAM

51TF 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> VTHD UTHD
PTR STHR Q CRSV S CILO S CSWI SDEPSDE S XSWI VD SPVC VHM MHAI

51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85
VR PVOC ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH

IEC16000252-2-en.vsd

IEC16000252 V2 EN-US

Figure 5: Configuration diagram for configuration C42

Line differential protection RED670 61

Application manual
62
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 4
Analog inputs

Section 4 Analog inputs

4.1 Introduction SEMOD55003-5 v11

Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct measurement
results and correct protection operations. For power measuring, all directional and differential
functions, the directions of the input currents must be defined in order to reflect the way the
current transformers are installed/connected in the field ( primary and secondary connections ).
Measuring and protection algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities. Setting values are
in primary quantities as well and it is important to set the data about the connected current and
voltage transformers properly.

An AISVBAS reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This
analog channel's phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and remaining analog channel's
phase angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED, the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing and service
values reading.

The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary equipment, that are
sampled by Merging units (MU) connected to a process bus, via the IEC 61850-9-2
LE protocol.

The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer input module

(TRM) type.

4.2 Setting guidelines SEMOD55068-1 v1

SEMOD130348-4 v5

The available setting parameters related to analog inputs are depending on the
actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

If a second TRM is used, at least one TRM channel must be configured to get the
service values. However, the MU physical channel must be configured to get service
values from that channel.

Line differential protection RED670 63

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Analog inputs

4.2.1 Setting of the phase reference channel SEMOD55055-5 v3

All phase angles are calculated in relation to a defined reference. An appropriate analog input
channel is selected and used as phase reference. The parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the analog
channel that is used as phase angle reference.

4.2.1.1 Example SEMOD55055-11 v5

Usually the A phase-to-ground voltage connected to the first VT channel number of the
transformer input module (TRM) is selected as the phase reference. The first VT channel number
depends on the type of transformer input module.

For a TRM with 6 current and 6 voltage inputs the first VT channel is 7. The setting
PhaseAngleRef=7 shall be used if the phase reference voltage is connected to that channel.

4.2.2 Setting of current channels SEMOD55055-16 v6

The direction of a current to the IED is depending on the connection of the CT. Unless indicated
otherwise, the main CTs are supposed to be Wye (star) connected and can be connected with the
grounding point to the object or from the object. This information must be set in the IED. The
convention of the directionality is defined as follows: A positive value of current, power, and so on
means that the quantity has the direction into the object and a negative value means direction out
from the object. For directional functions the direction into the object is defined as Forward and
the direction out from the object is defined as Reverse. See Figure 6

A positive value of current, power, and so on (forward) means that the quantity flows towards the
object. A negative value of current, power, and so on (reverse) means that the quantity flows away
from the object. See Figure 6.

Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse

Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object

Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"

en05000456-2.vsd
ANSI05000456 V2 EN-US

Figure 6: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

With correct setting of the primary CT direction, CT_WyePoint set to FromObject or ToObject, a
positive quantities always flowing towards the protected object and a direction defined as
Forward always is looking towards the protected object. The following examples show the
principle.

64 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 4
Analog inputs

4.2.2.1 Example 1 SEMOD55055-23 v6

Two IEDs used for protection of two objects.

Line

Ip
Transformer Ip Ip
Line
Reverse Forward

Definition of direction
for directional functions
Is
Transformer Is
protection Line protection

IED IED

Setting of current input: Setting of current input: Setting of current input:

Set parameter Set parameter Set parameter
CT_WyePoint with CT_WyePoint with CT_WyePoint with
Transformer as Transformer as Line as
reference object. reference object. reference object.
Correct setting is Correct setting is Correct setting is
"ToObject" "ToObject" "FromObject"

ANSI05000753.vsd
ANSI05000753 V2 EN-US

Figure 7: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

Figure 7 shows the normal case where the objects have their own CTs. The settings for CT
direction shall be done according to the figure. To protect the line, direction of the directional
functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward. This means that the protection is looking
towards the line.

4.2.2.2 Example 2 SEMOD55055-29 v7

Two IEDs used for protection of two objects and sharing a CT.

Figure 8: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

This example is similar to example 1, but here the transformer is feeding just one line and the line
protection uses the same CT as the transformer protection does. The CT direction is set with
different reference objects for the two IEDs though it is the same current from the same CT that is
feeding the two IEDs. With these settings, the directional functions of the line protection shall be
set to Forward to look towards the line.

4.2.2.3 Example 3 SEMOD55055-35 v7

One IED used to protect two objects.

Line differential protection RED670 65

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Analog inputs

Transformer
Line

Forward Reverse

Definition of direction for

directional
Transformer and line functions
Line protection

Setting of current input: Setting of current input:

Set parameter Set parameter
CT_WyePoint with CT_WyePoint with
Transformer as Transformer as
reference object. reference object.
Correct setting is Correct setting is
"ToObject" "ToObject"

en05000461_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000461 V1 EN-US

Figure 9: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

In this example, one IED includes both transformer and line protections and the line protection
uses the same CT as the transformer protection does. For both current input channels, the CT
direction is set with the transformer as reference object. This means that the direction Forward
for the line protection is towards the transformer. To look towards the line, the direction of the
directional functions of the line protection must be set to Reverse. The direction Forward/Reverse
is related to the reference object that is the transformer in this case.

When a function is set to Reverse and shall protect an object in reverse direction, it shall be noted
that some directional functions are not symmetrical regarding the reach in forward and reverse
direction. It is in first hand the reach of the directional criteria that can differ. Normally it is not any
limitation but it is advisable to have it in mind and check if it is acceptable for the application in
question.

If the IED has sufficient number of analog current inputs, an alternative solution is shown in Figure
10. The same currents are fed to two separate groups of inputs and the line and transformer
protection functions are configured to the different inputs. The CT direction for the current
channels to the line protection is set with the line as reference object and the directional functions
of the line protection shall be set to Forward to protect the line.

66 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 4
Analog inputs

Transformer

Line

Reverse Forward

Definition of direction for

directional
Transformer and line functions
Line protection

Setting of current input

for line functions:
Set parameter
CT_WyePoint with
Line as
Setting of current input Setting of current input reference object.
for transformer functions: for transformer functions: Correct setting is
Set parameter Set parameter "FromObject"
CT_WyePoint with CT_WyePoint with
Transformer as Transformer as
reference object. reference object.
Correct setting is Correct setting is
"ToObject" "ToObject"
en05000462_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000462 V1 EN-US

Figure 10: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

Line differential protection RED670 67

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Analog inputs

Busbar

2
Busbar
Protection

2 1

en06000196_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000196 V1 EN-US

Figure 11: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

For busbar protection, it is possible to set the CT_WyePoint parameters in two ways.

The first solution will be to use busbar as a reference object. In that case for all CT inputs marked
with 1 in Figure 11, set CT_WyePoint = ToObject, and for all CT inputs marked with 2 in Figure 11,
set CT_WyePoint = FromObject.

The second solution will be to use all connected bays as reference objects. In that case for all CT
inputs marked with 1 in Figure 11, set CT_WyePoint = FromObject, and for all CT inputs marked
with 2 in Figure 11, set CT_WyePoint = ToObject.

Regardless which one of the above two options is selected, busbar differential protection will
behave correctly.

The main CT ratios must also be set. This is done by setting the two parameters CTsec and CTprim
for each current channel. For a 1000/5 A CT, the following settings shall be used:

68 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 4
Analog inputs

• CTprim = 1000 (value in A)

• CTsec =5 (value in A).

4.2.2.4 Examples on how to connect, configure and set CT inputs for most
commonly used CT connections SEMOD55055-296 v7

Figure 12 defines the marking of current transformer terminals commonly used around the world:

In the SMAI function block, you have to set if the SMAI block is measuring current or
voltage. This is done with the parameter: AnalogInputType: Current/Voltage. The
ConnectionType: phase -phase/phase-ground and GlobalBaseSel.

P1 P2
IPri

ISec (H1) (H2)

S1 (X1) S2 (X2)
x S2 (X2) x S1 (X1)

P2 P1
(H2) (H1)

a) b) c)

en06000641.vsd
IEC06000641 V1 EN-US

Figure 12: Commonly used markings of CT terminals

Where:
a) is symbol and terminal marking used in this document. Terminals marked with a square
indicates the primary and secondary winding terminals with the same (that is, positive)
polarity
b) and are equivalent symbols and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for CTs. Note
c) that for these two cases the CT polarity marking is correct!

It shall be noted that depending on national standard and utility practices, the rated secondary
current of a CT has typically one of the following values:

• 1A
• 5A

However, in some cases, the following rated secondary currents are used as well:

• 2A
• 10A

The IED fully supports all of these rated secondary values.

Line differential protection RED670 69

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Analog inputs

It is recommended to:

• use 1A rated CT input into the IED in order to connect CTs with 1A and 2A
secondary rating
• use 5A rated CT input into the IED in order to connect CTs with 5A and 10A
secondary rating

4.2.2.5 Example on how to connect a wye connected three-phase CT set to the IED SEMOD55055-352 v11

Figure 13 gives an example about the wiring of a wye connected two-phase CT set to the IED. It
gives an overview of the actions which are needed to make this measurement available to the
built-in protection and control functions within the IED as well.

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for the
delivered IED.

A B C
IED
1 2 4
I_C
I_B
I_A

3
SMAI_20
I_A
CT 600/5
I_B
Wye Connected
I_C

Protected Object

ANSI13000002-3-en.vsd
ANSI13000002 V3 EN-US

Figure 13: Wye connected three-phase CT set with wye point towards the protected object

70 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 4
Analog inputs

Where:
1) The drawing shows how to connect three individual phase currents from a wye connected three-phase
CT set to the three CT inputs of the IED.
2) The current inputs are located in the TRM. It shall be noted that for all these current inputs the following
setting values shall be entered for the example shown in Figure 13.

• CTprim=600A
• CTsec=5A
• CTStarPoint=ToObject

Ratio of the first two parameters is only used inside the IED. The third parameter
(CTStarPoint=ToObject) as set in this example causes no change on the measured currents. In other
words, currents are already measured towards the protected object.
3) These three connections are the links between the three current inputs and the three input channels of
the preprocessing function block 4). Depending on the type of functions, which need this current
information, more than one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to the same three
physical CT inputs.
4) The preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all three input channels

• harmonic content for all three input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for
the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within the IED,
which are connected to this preprocessing function block. For this application most of the
preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs
installed in power plants), then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set accordingly.
Section SMAI in this manual provides information on adaptive frequency tracking for the signal matrix
for analogue inputs (SMAI).
5) AI3P in the SMAI function block is a grouped signal which contains all the data about the phases A, B, C
and neutral quantity; in particular the data about fundamental frequency phasors, harmonic content and
positive sequence, negative and zero sequence quantities are available.
AI1, AI2, AI3, AI4 are the output signals from the SMAI function block which contain the fundamental
frequency phasors and the harmonic content of the corresponding input channels of the preprocessing
function block.
AIN is the signal which contains the fundamental frequency phasors and the harmonic content of the
neutral quantity. In this example, GRP2N is not connected so this data is calculated by the preprocessing
function block on the basis of the inputs GRP_A, GRP_B and GRP_C. If GRP2N is connected, the data
reflects the measured value of GRP2N.

Another alternative is to have the wye point of the three-phase CT set as shown in figure 14:

Line differential protection RED670 71

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Analog inputs

A B C
IED

IC
IB
IA

3 4
1

SMAI_20_2
IC BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
IB ^GRP2_A 5 AI2
^GRP2_B AI3
^GRP2_C AI4
CT 800/1 IA ^GRP2N AIN
Wye Connected

Protected Object

ANSI11000026-5-en-.vsd

ANSI11000026 V5 EN-US

Figure 14: Wye connected three-phase CT set with its wye point away from the protected object
In the example, everything is done in a similar way as in the above described example (Figure 13).
The only difference is the setting of the parameter CTStarPoint of the used current inputs on the
TRM (item 2 in Figure 14 and 13):

• CTprim=600A
• CTsec=5A
• CTWyePoint=FromObject

The ratio of the first two parameters is only used inside the IED. The third parameter as set in this
example will negate the measured currents in order to ensure that the currents are measured
towards the protected object within the IED.

A third alternative is to have the residual/neutral current from the three-phase CT set connected
to the IED as shown in Figure 14.

72 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 4
Analog inputs

A B C
IED
6
IA

IB

IC
3

IN 1 4 SMAI2
1 BLOCK AI3P
2 AI 01 (I) ^GRP2_A AI1

IC ^GRP2_B AI2
3
^GRP2_C AI3
4 AI 02 (I)
^GRP2N AI4
IB 5 TYPE AIN
6 AI 03 (I)
CT 800/1
IA 7
Wye Connected
8 AI 04 (I)
5
9
2 10 AI 05 (I)
11
12 AI 06 (I)

Protected Object

ANSI06000644-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000644 V2 EN-US

Figure 15: Wye connected three-phase CT set with its wye point away from the protected object and the
residual/neutral current connected to the IED

Where:
1) Shows how to connect three individual phase currents from a wye connected three-phase CT set to the
three CT inputs of the IED.
2) Shows how to connect residual/neutral current from the three-phase CT set to the fourth input in the
IED. It shall be noted that if this connection is not made, the IED will still calculate this current internally
by vectorial summation of the three individual phase currents.
3) Is the TRM where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current inputs the
following setting values shall be entered.

• CTprim=800A
• CTsec=1A
• CTStarPoint=FromObject
• ConnectionType=Ph-N

The ratio of the first two parameters is only used inside the IED. The third parameter as set in this
example will have no influence on measured currents (that is, currents are already measured towards the
protected object).
4) Are three connections made in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT) and Application configuration tool (ACT),
which connects these three current inputs to the first three input channels on the preprocessing
function block 6). Depending on the type of functions, which need this current information, more than
one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three CT inputs.
Table continues on next page

Line differential protection RED670 73

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Analog inputs

5) Is a connection made in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT) and Application configuration tool (ACT), which
connects the residual/neutral current input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function
block 6). Note that this connection in SMT shall not be done if the residual/neutral current is not
connected to the IED.
6) Is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all input channels

• harmonic content for all input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors of the
first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within the IED,
which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For this application,
most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs
installed in the generating stations), then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set accordingly.

4.2.2.6 Example how to connect delta connected three-phase CT set to the IED SEMOD55055-392 v7

Figure 16 gives an example how to connect a delta connected three-phase CT set to the IED. It
gives an overview of the required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available
to the built-in protection and control functions in the IED as well.

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for the
delivered IED.

74 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 4
Analog inputs

A B C IED
2

1 4

IC
IB
IA

SMAI_20
3
IA-IB
DAB Connected

IB-IC
CT 600/5
in Delta

IC-IA

ANSI11000027-2-en.vsd

Protected Object

ANSI11000027 V2 EN-US

Figure 16: Delta DAB connected three-phase CT set

Where:
1) shows how to connect three individual phase currents from a delta connected three-phase CT set to
three CT inputs of the IED.
2) is the TRM where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current inputs the
following setting values shall be entered.
CTprim=600A
CTsec=5A

• CTWyePoint=ToObject
• ConnectionType=Ph-Ph

3) are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), Application configuration tool (ACT), which
connect these three current inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 4).
Depending on the type of functions which need this current information, more then one preprocessing
block might be connected in parallel to these three CT inputs.
4) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all three input channels

• harmonic content for all three input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for
the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within the IED,
which are connected to this preprocessing function block. For this application most of the
preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs
installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set accordingly.

Line differential protection RED670 75

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Analog inputs

Another alternative is to have the delta connected CT set as shown in figure 17:

A B C IED

2 4

IC
IB
IA

3 SMAI_20

IA-IC
DCA Connected

IB-IA
CT 800/1
in Delta

IC-IB

ANSI11000028-2-en.vsd

Protected Object

ANSI11000028 V2 EN-US

Figure 17: Delta DAC connected three-phase CT set

In this case, everything is done in a similar way as in the above described example, except that for
all used current inputs on the TRM the following setting parameters shall be entered:

CTprim=800A

CTsec=1A

• CTWyePoint=ToObject
• ConnectionType=Ph-Ph

It is important to notice the references in SMAI. As inputs at Ph-Ph are expected to be A-B, B-
Crespectively C-A we need to tilt 180º by setting ToObject.

4.2.2.7 Example how to connect single-phase CT to the IED SEMOD55055-431 v8

Figure 18 gives an example how to connect the single-phase CT to the IED. It gives an overview of
the required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the built-in
protection and control functions within the IED as well.

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for the
delivered IED.

76 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 4
Analog inputs

IED
Protected Object

A B C

SMAI_20_2
1 BLOCK AI3P
(+) REVROT AI1
^GRP2_A AI2
INS
CT 1000/1

^GRP2_B AI3
a) (+) ^GRP2_C AI4
(-)
^GRP2_N AIN
(+)
b) (-)
INS
3
(-)
ANSI11000029-3-en.vsd
INP

ANSI11000029 V3 EN-US

Figure 18: Connections for single-phase CT input

Where:
1) shows how to connect single-phase CT input in the IED.
2) is TRM where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current inputs the
following setting values shall be entered.
For connection (a) shown in Fgure 18:
CTprim= 1000 A
CTsec= 1A
CTWyePoint=ToObject

For connection (b) shown in Figure 18:

CTprim= 1000 A
CTsec= 1A
CTWyePoint=FromObject
3) shows the connection made in SMT tool, which connect this CT input to the fourth input channel of
the preprocessing function block 4).
4) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate
values. The calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs
installed in the power plants) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set accordingly.

4.2.3 Relationships between setting parameter Base Current, CT rated

primary current and minimum pickup of a protection IED GUID-8EB19363-9178-4F04-A6AC-AF0C2F99C5AB v1

Note that for all line protection applications (e.g. distance protection or line differential
protection) the parameter Base Current (i.e. IBase setting in the IED) used by the relevant
protection function, shall always be set equal to the largest rated CT primary current among all
CTs involved in the protection scheme. The rated CT primary current value is set as parameter
CTPrim under the IED TRM settings.

For all other protection applications (e.g. generator, shunt reactor, shunt capacitor and
transformer protection) it is typically desirable to set IBase parameter equal to the rated current

Line differential protection RED670 77

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Analog inputs

of the protected object. However this is only recommended to do if the rated current of the
protected object is within the range of 40% to 120% of the selected CT rated primary current. If
for any reason (e.g. high maximum short circuit current) the rated current of the protected object
is less than 40% of the rated CT primary current, it is strongly recommended to set the parameter
IBase in the IED to be equal to the largest rated CT primary current among all CTs involved in the
protection scheme and installed on the same voltage level. This will effectively make the
protection scheme less sensitive; however, such measures are necessary in order to avoid possible
problems with loss of the measurement accuracy in the IED.

Regardless of the applied relationship between the IBase parameter and the rated CT primary
current, the corresponding minimum pickup of the function on the CT secondary side must always
be verified. It is strongly recommended that the minimum pickup of any instantaneous protection
function (e.g. differential, restricted earth fault, distance, instantaneous overcurrent, etc.) shall
under no circumstances be less than 4% of the used IED CT input rating (i.e. 1A or 5A). This
corresponds to 40mA secondary for IED 1A rated inputs and to 200mA secondary for IED 5A rated
inputs used by the function. This shall be individually verified for all current inputs involved in the
protection scheme.

Note that exceptions from the above 4% rule may be acceptable for very special applications (e.g.
when Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC is involved in the protection scheme).

4.2.4 Setting of voltage channels SEMOD55055-44 v4

As the IED uses primary system quantities, the main VT ratios must be known to the IED. This is
done by setting the two parameters VTsec and VTprim for each voltage channel. The phase-to-
phase value can be used even if each channel is connected to a phase-to-ground voltage from the
VT.

4.2.4.1 Example SEMOD55055-47 v3

Consider a VT with the following data:

132kV 120V
3 3
EQUATION1937 V1 EN-US (Equation 1)

The following setting should be used: VTprim=132 (value in kV) VTsec=120 (value in V)

4.2.4.2 Examples how to connect, configure and set VT inputs for most commonly
used VT connections SEMOD55055-60 v6

Figure 19 defines the marking of voltage transformer terminals commonly used around the world.

78 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 4
Analog inputs

+ + A a A da A a
(H1) (X1) (H1) (X1) (H1) (X1)
VPri VSec

N n N dn B b
(H2) (X2) (H2) (X2) (H2) (X2)
a) b) c) d)

ANSI11000175_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000175 V1 EN-US

Figure 19: Commonly used markings of VT terminals

Where:
a) is the symbol and terminal marking used in this document. Terminals marked with a square indicate the
primary and secondary winding terminals with the same (positive) polarity
b) is the equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for phase-to-ground
connected VTs
c) is the equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for open delta connected
VTs
d) is the equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for phase-to-phase
connected VTs

It shall be noted that depending on national standard and utility practices the rated secondary
voltage of a VT has typically one of the following values:

• 100 V
• 110 V
• 115 V
• 120 V
• 230 V

The IED fully supports all of these values and most of them will be shown in the following
examples.

4.2.4.3 Examples on how to connect a three phase-to-ground connected VT to the

IED SEMOD55055-87 v9

Figure 20 gives an example on how to connect the three phase-to-ground connected VT to the IED.
It gives an overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to
the built-in protection and control functions within the IED.

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for the
delivered IED.

Line differential protection RED670 79

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Analog inputs

A
B IED
C 2
5
3
66 kV
1 13
3
110V 14 AI 07 (I) SMAI2

3 15 BLOCK AI3P

16 AI 08 (V) ^GRP2_A AI1

17 ^GRP2_B AI2
18 AI 09 (V) ^GRP2_C AI3
66 kV 19 #Not used ^GRP2N AI4

3 20 AI 10 (V) TYPE AIN

110V 21
3 22 AI 11 (V)
4
23
24 AI 12 (V)

66 kV
3
110V
3

ANSI06000599-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000599 V2 EN-US

Figure 20: A Three phase-to-ground connected VT

L1

L2 IED

2
3
132 kV
2 1
110V
2
SMAI2
BLOCK AI2P
^GRP2L1 AI1
^GRP2L2 5 AI2
132 kV ^GRP2L1L2 AI3
^GRP2N AI4
2 AIN
110V
2 4

IEC16000140-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000140 V1 EN-US

Figure 21: A two phase-to-earth connected VT

80 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 4
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect three secondary phase-to-ground voltages to three VT inputs on the IED
2) is the TRM where these three voltage inputs are located. For these three voltage inputs, the following
setting values shall be entered:
VTprim =132 kV
VTsec = 110 V
Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio of the
entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual VT.

66
66 3
=
110 110
3
EQUATION1903 V1 EN-US (Equation 2)

3) are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), which connect these three voltage inputs to
first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 5). Depending on the type of functions
which need this voltage information, more then one preprocessing block might be connected in
parallel to these three VT inputs.
4) shows that in this example the fourth (that is, residual) input channel of the preprocessing block is
not connected in SMT tool. Thus the preprocessing block will automatically calculate 3Vo inside by
vectorial sum from the three phase to ground voltages connected to the first three input channels of
the same preprocessing block. Alternatively, the fourth input channel can be connected to open delta
VT input, as shown in Figure 23.
5) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all input channels

• harmonic content for all input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for
the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within the
IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For this
application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values. However the
following settings shall be set as shown here:
VBase=66 kV (that is, rated Ph-Ph voltage)
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs
installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set
accordingly.

4.2.4.4 Example on how to connect a phase-to-phase connected VT to the IED SEMOD55055-134 v7

Figure 22 gives an example how to connect a phase-to-phase connected VT to the IED. It gives an
overview of the required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the
built-in protection and control functions within the IED. It shall be noted that this VT connection is
only used on lower voltage levels (that is, rated primary voltage below 40 kV).

Line differential protection RED670 81

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Analog inputs

B
C
13.8kV 13.8kV IED
120V 120V

2
5
3
1 13
14 AI 07(I)
SMAI2
15 BLOCK AI3P
16 AI 08(V) ^GRP2_A (A-B) AI1

17 ^GRP2_B (B-C) AI2

AI 09(V) ^GRP2_C (C-A) AI3
18
#Not Used ^GRP2N AI4
19
TYPE AIN
20 AI 10(V)
21
22 AI 11(V) 4
23
24 AI 12(V)

ANSI06000600-3-en.vsd

ANSI06000600 V3 EN-US

Figure 22: A Two phase-to-phase connected VT

Where:
1) shows how to connect the secondary side of a phase-to-phase VT to the VT inputs on the IED
2) is the TRM where these three voltage inputs are located. It shall be noted that for these three voltage
inputs the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim=13.8 kV
VTsec=120 V
Please note that inside the IED only ratio of these two parameters is used.
Table continues on next page

82 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 4
Analog inputs

3) are three connections made in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT), Application configuration tool (ACT), which
connects these three voltage inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 5).
Depending on the type of functions, which need this voltage information, more than one preprocessing
block might be connected in parallel to these three VT inputs
4) shows that in this example the fourth (that is, residual) input channel of the preprocessing block is not
connected in SMT. Note. If the parameters VA, VB, VC, VN should be used the open delta must be
connected here.
5) Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

• harmonic content for all four input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for
the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within the IED,
which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For this application
most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values. However the following settings
shall be set as shown here:
ConnectionType=Ph-Ph
VBase=13.8 kV
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs
installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set accordingly.

4.2.4.5 Example on how to connect an open delta VT to the IED for high impedance
grounded or ungrounded networks SEMOD55055-163 v9

Figure 23 gives an example about the wiring of an open delta VT to the IED for high impedance
grounded or ungrounded power systems. It shall be noted that this type of VT connection
presents a secondary voltage proportional to 3V0 to the IED.

In case of a solid ground fault close to the VT location the primary value of 3Vo will be equal to:

3Vo = 3 × VPh - Ph = 3 × VPh - Gnd

EQUATION1922-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 3)

The primary rated voltage of an open Delta VT is always equal to VPh-Gnd. Three series connected
VT secondary windings gives a secondary voltage equal to three times the individual VT secondary
winding rating. Thus the secondary windings of open delta VTs quite often have a secondary rated
voltage equal to one third of the rated phase-to-phase VT secondary voltage (110/3V in this
particular example).

Figure 23 gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement
available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED as well.

Line differential protection RED670 83

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Analog inputs

B IED

C
2

6.6kV
13
3 AI 07 (I) 5
110V 14
3 15
16 AI 08 (V)
17 SMAI2
18 AI 09 (V) BLOCK AI3P
6.6kV 19 3 ^GRP2_A AI1
1 # Not Used
20 AI 10 (V)
3 # Not Used ^GRP2_B AI2
110V 21 # Not Used ^GRP2_C AI3
3 AI 11 (V)
+3Vo 22 ^GRP2N AI4
23 TYPE AIN
24 AI 12 (V)
4
6.6kV
3
110V
3

ANSI06000601-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000601 V2 EN-US

Figure 23: Open delta connected VT in high impedance grounded power system

84 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 4
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect the secondary side of the open delta VT to one VT input on the IED.

+3Vo shall be connected to the IED

2) is the TRM where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage input the
following setting values shall be entered:

VTprim = 3 × 6.6 = 11.43kV

EQUATION1923 V1 EN-US (Equation 4)

110
VT sec = 3 × = 110V
3
EQUATION1924 V1 EN-US (Equation 5)

Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio of the
entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual open delta VT.

6.6
3 × 6.6 3
=
110 110
3
EQUATION1925 V1 EN-US (Equation 6)

3) shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not connected
in SMT tool or ACT tool.
4) shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), Application configuration tool (ACT), which
connect this voltage input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 5).
5) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog input and calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

• harmonic content for all four input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for
the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within the
IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For this
application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs
installed in the generating stations ) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set
accordingly.

4.2.4.6 Example how to connect the open delta VT to the IED for low impedance
grounded or solidly grounded power systems SEMOD55055-199 v6

Figure 24 gives an example about the connection of an open delta VT to the IED for low impedance
grounded or solidly grounded power systems. It shall be noted that this type of VT connection
presents secondary voltage proportional to 3V0 to the IED.

Line differential protection RED670 85

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Analog inputs

In case of a solid ground fault close to the VT location the primary value of 3Vo will be equal to:

VPh - Ph
3Vo = = VPh - Gnd
3
EQUATION1927-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 7)

The primary rated voltage of such VT is always equal to VPh-Gnd. Therefore, three series
connected VT secondary windings will give the secondary voltage equal only to one individual VT
secondary winding rating. Thus the secondary windings of such open delta VTs quite often has a
secondary rated voltage close to rated phase-to-phase VT secondary voltage, that is, 115V or 115/
√3V as in this particular example. Figure 24 gives an overview of the actions which are needed to
make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED.

B IED
C
2

138kV
13 5
3 14 AI07 (I)
115V
15
3
16 AI08 (V)
17 SMAI2
18 AI09 (V) BLOCK AI3P
138kV 1 19 3
# Not Used ^GRP2_A AI1
3 20 AI10 (V) # Not Used ^GRP2_B AI2
115V 21
# Not Used ^GRP2_C AI3
3 +3Vo 22 AI11 (V)
^GRP2N AI4
23
AI12 (V) TYPE AIN
24
4
138kV
3
115V
3
ANSI06000602-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000602 V2 EN-US

Figure 24: Open delta connected VT in low impedance or solidly grounded power system

86 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 4
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect the secondary side of open delta VT to one VT input in
the IED.

+3Vo shall be connected to the IED.

2) is TRM where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage
input the following setting values shall be entered:

138
VTprim = 3× = 138kV
3
EQUATION1928 V1 EN-US (Equation 8)

115
VT sec = 3× = 115V
3
EQUATION1929 V1 EN-US (Equation 9)

Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted
that the ratio of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one
individual open delta VT.

138
138 3
=
115 115
3
EQUATION1930 V1 EN-US (Equation 10)

3) shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing
block is not connected in SMT tool.
4) shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), which connect this
voltage input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 4).
5) preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs
and calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

• harmonic content for all four input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental
frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as
reference for sequence quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control
functions within the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function
block in the configuration tool. For this application most of the preprocessing
settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically
required only for IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting
parameters DFTReference shall be set accordingly.

Line differential protection RED670 87

Application manual
88
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 5
Local HMI

Section 5 Local HMI AMU0600442 v15

ANSI13000239-2-en.vsd
ANSI13000239 V2 EN-US

Figure 25: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements

• Keypad
• Display (LCD)
• LED indicators
• Communication port for PCM600

Line differential protection RED670 89

Application manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Local HMI

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

5.1 Display GUID-55739D4F-1DA5-4112-B5C7-217AAF360EA5 v13

The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome liquid crystal display (LCD) with a resolution of 320 x
240 pixels. The character size can vary.

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

IEC15000270-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000270 V1 EN-US

Figure 26: Display layout

1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

The function key button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the function
buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback signal for the
function button control action. The LED is connected to the required signal with PCM600.

90 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 5
Local HMI

IEC13000281-1-en.vsd
GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN-US

Figure 27: Function button panel

The indication LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the indication LEDs. Three
indication LED pages are available.

IEC13000240-1-en.vsd
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN-US

Figure 28: Indication LED panel

The function button and indication LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel is
shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the ESC button
clears the panel from the display. Both panels have a dynamic width that depends on the label
string length.

5.2 LEDs AMU0600427 v14

The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display: Normal, Pickup and Trip.

Line differential protection RED670 91

Application manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Local HMI

There are 15 programmable indication LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can indicate three
states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The texts related to each three-color LED are divided
into three panels.

There are 3 separate panels of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in one LED group
can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be indicated since there are three LED
groups. The LEDs are lit according to priority, with red being the highest and green the lowest
priority. For example, if on one panel there is an indication that requires the green LED to be lit,
and on another panel there is an indication that requires the red LED to be lit, the red LED takes
priority and is lit. The LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be
selected with the LHMI or PCM600.

Information panels for the indication LEDs are shown by pressing the Multipage button. Pressing
that button cycles through the three pages. A lit or un-acknowledged LED is indicated with a
highlight. Such lines can be selected by using the Up/Down arrow buttons. Pressing the Enter key
shows details about the selected LED. Pressing the ESC button exits from information pop-ups as
well as from the LED panel as such.

The Multipage button has a LED. This LED is lit whenever any LED on any panel is lit. If there are un-
acknowledged indication LEDs, then the Multipage LED blinks. To acknowledge LEDs, press the
Clear button to enter the Reset menu (refer to description of this menu for details).

There are two additional LEDs which are next to the control buttons and . These LEDs
can indicate the status of two arbitrary binary signals by configuring the OPENCLOSE_LED
function block. For instance, OPENCLOSE_LED can be connected to a circuit breaker to indicate
the breaker open/close status on the LEDs.

IEC16000076-1-en.vsd
IEC16000076 V1 EN-US

Figure 29: OPENCLOSE_LED connected to SXCBR

5.3 Keypad AMU0600428 v19

The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views or menus.
The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications, provide help and switch
between local and remote control mode.

The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as menu
shortcut or control buttons.

92 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 5
Local HMI

24

1
23
2
18

3
19

6 20

21

7 22

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

ANSI15000157-1-en.vsdx

ANSI15000157 V1 EN-US

Figure 30: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-buttons and
RJ-45 communication port

1...5 Function button

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 Key
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Not in use
18 Multipage
19 Menu
20 Clear
21 Help

Line differential protection RED670 93

Application manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Local HMI

22 Communication port
23 Programmable indication LEDs
24 IED status LEDs

5.4 Local HMI functionality

5.4.1 Protection and alarm indication GUID-09CCB9F1-9B27-4C12-B253-FBE95EA537F5 v17

Protection indicators
The protection indicator LEDs are Normal, Pickup and Trip.

Table 11: Normal LED (green)

LED state Description
Off Auxiliary supply voltage is disconnected.
On Normal operation.
Flashing Internal fault has occurred.

Table 12: PickUp LED (yellow)

LED state Description
Off Normal operation.
On A protection function has picked up and an indication message is displayed.
The pick up indication is latching and must be reset via communication, LHMI or
binary input on the LEDGEN component. To open the reset menu on the LHMI,
press .

Flashing The IED is in test mode and protection functions are blocked, or the IEC61850
protocol is blocking one or more functions.
The indication disappears when the IED is no longer in test mode and blocking is
removed. The blocking of functions through the IEC61850 protocol can be reset in
Main menu/Test/Reset IEC61850 Mod. The yellow LED changes to either On or Off
state depending on the state of operation.

Table 13: Trip LED (red)

LED state Description
Off Normal operation.
On A protection function has tripped. An indication message is displayed if the auto-
indication feature is enabled in the local HMI.
The trip indication is latching and must be reset via communication, LHMI or binary
input on the LEDGEN component. To open the reset menu on the LHMI, press .

Flasing Configuration mode.

94 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 5
Local HMI

Alarm indicators
The 15 programmable three-color LEDs are used for alarm indication. An individual alarm/status
signal, connected to any of the LED function blocks, can be assigned to one of the three LED
colors when configuring the IED.

Table 14: Alarm indications

LED state Description
Off Normal operation. All activation signals are off.
On • Follow-S sequence: The activation signal is on.
• LatchedColl-S sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication has not
been acknowledged.
• LatchedAck-F-S sequence: The indication has been acknowledged, but the activation signal
is still on.
• LatchedAck-S-F sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication has not
been acknowledged.
• LatchedReset-S sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication has not
been acknowledged.

Flashing • Follow-F sequence: The activation signal is on.

• LatchedAck-F-S sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication has not
been acknowledged.
• LatchedAck-S-F sequence: The indication has been acknowledged, but the activation signal
is still on.

5.4.2 Parameter management GUID-5EE466E3-932B-4311-9FE1-76ECD8D6E245 v9

The LHMI is used to access the relay parameters. Three types of parameters can be read and
written.

• Numerical values
• String values
• Enumerated values

Numerical values are presented either in integer or in decimal format with minimum and maximum
values. Character strings can be edited character by character. Enumerated values have a
predefined set of selectable values.

5.4.3 Front communication GUID-FD72A445-C8C1-4BFE-90E3-0AC78AE17C45 v12

The RJ-45 port in the LHMI enables front communication.

• The green uplink LED on the left is lit when the cable is successfully connected to the port.
• The yellow LED is not used; it is always off.

Line differential protection RED670 95

Application manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Local HMI

IEC13000280-1-en.vsd
GUID-94AF2358-6905-4782-B37B-ACD3DCBF7F9C V1 EN-US

Figure 31: RJ-45 communication port and green indicator LED

1 RJ-45 connector
2 Green indicator LED

The default IP address for the IED front port is 10.1.150.3 and the corresponding subnetwork mask
is 255.255.254.0. It can be set through the local HMI path Main menu/Configuration/
Communication/Ethernet configuration/FRONT port/AP_FRONT.

Ensure not to change the default IP address of the IED.

Do not connect the IED front port to a LAN. Connect only a single local PC with
PCM600 to the front port. It is only intended for temporary use, such as
commissioning and testing.

96 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

Section 6 Wide area measurement system

6.1 C37.118 Phasor Measurement Data Streaming Protocol

Configuration PMUCONF GUID-747C6AD7-E6A1-466E-92D1-68865681F92F v1

6.1.1 Identification
GUID-1E140EA0-D198-443A-B445-47CEFD2E6134 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Configuration parameters for IEEE PMUCONF - -
1344 and C37.118 protocol

6.1.2 Application GUID-33694C62-A109-4D8F-9063-CEFA5D0E78BC v4

The IED supports the following IEEE synchrophasor standards:

• IEEE 1344-1995 (Both measurements and data communication)

• IEEE Std C37.118-2005 (Both measurements and data communication)
• IEEE Std C37.118.1–2011 and C37.118.1a-2014 (Measurements)
• IEEE Std C37.118.2-2011 (Data communication)

PMUCONF contains the PMU configuration parameters for both IEEE C37.118 and IEEE 1344
protocols. This means all the required settings and parameters in order to establish and define a
number of TCP and/or UDP connections with one or more PDC clients (synchrophasor client). This
includes port numbers, TCP/UDP IP addresses, and specific settings for IEEE C37.118 as well as
IEEE 1344 protocols.

6.1.3 Operation principle GUID-2608FBC4-9036-476A-942B-13452019BC11 v2

The Figure 32 demonstrates the communication configuration diagram. As can be seen, the IED
can support communication with maximum 8 TCP clients and 6 UDP client groups, simultaneously.
Every client can communicate with only one instance of the two available PMUREPORT function
block instances at a time. It means that one client cannot communicate with both PMUREPORT:1
and PMUREPORT:2 at the same time. However, multiple clients can communicate with the same
instance of PMUREPORT function block at the same time. For TCP clients, each client can decide to
communicate with an existing instance of PMUREPORT by knowing the corresponding PMU ID for
that PMUREPORT instance. Whereas, for UDP clients, the PMUREPORT instance for each UDP
channel is defined by the user in the PMU and the client has to know the PMU ID corresponding to
that instance in order to be able to communicate. More information is available in the sections
Short guidance for the use of TCP and Short guidance for the use of UDP.

Line differential protection RED670 97

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Wide area measurement system

IED
PMU ID

1344/C37.118
PMUREPORT: 1 PMUREPORT: 2 TCP Client_1
1344/C37.118
TCP Client_2
1344/C37.118
TCP Client_3
PMU ID: X
1344/C37.118
TCP IP TCP Client_4
PMU ID: Y 1344/C37.118
TCP Port TCP Client_5
1344/C37.118 TCP Client_6
1344/C37.118 TCP Client_7
1344/C37.118 TCP Client_8

PMU ID

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 1 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_1

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 2 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_2

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 3 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_3

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 4 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_4

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 5 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_5

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 6 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_6

IEC140000117-1.en.vsd
IEC140000117 V2 EN-US

Figure 32: The communication configuration (PMUCONF) structure in the IED

6.1.3.1 Short guidance for use of TCP GUID-700B2618-3719-4C17-A1F8-3B8F5834FE95 v3

Port 7001 is used by the SPA on TCP/IP (field service tool). If the port is used for
any other protocol, for example C37.118, the SPA on TCP/IP stops working.

The IED supports 8 concurrent TCP connections using IEEE1344 and/or C37.118 protocol. The
following parameters are used to define the TCP connection between the IED and the TCP clients:

1. 1344TCPport– TCP port for control of IEEE 1344 data for TCP clients
2. C37.118TCPport – TCP port for control of IEEE C37.118 data for TCP clients

As can be seen, there are two separate parameters in the IED for selecting port numbers for TCP
connections; one for IEEE1344 protocol (1344TCPport) and another one for C37.118 protocol
(C37.118 TCPport). Client can communicate with the IED over IEEE1344 protocol using the selected
TCP port defined in 1344TCPport, and can communicate with the IED over IEEE C37.118 protocol
using the selected TCP port number in C37.118TCPport.

All the frames (the header frame, configuration frame, command frame and data frame) are
communicated over the same TCP port. The client can request (by sending a command frame) a
configuration and/or header via the TCP channel and the requested configuration and/or header
will be sent back to the client (as Configuration frame/Header frame) over the same TCP channel.

Once the TCP client connects to the IED, the client has to necessarily send a command frame to
start a communication. As shown in Figure 32, the IED can support 2 PMUREPORT instances and
the client has to specify the PMU ID Code in order to know which PMUREPORT data needs to be

98 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

sent out to that client. In this figure, X and Y are referring to the user-defined PMU ID Codes for
PMUREPORT instances 1 or 2, respectively. It is up to the TCP client to decide which PMUREPORT
function block shall communicate with that client. Upon successful reception of the first command
by the IED, the PMU ID will be extracted out of the command; if there is a PMUREPORT instance
configured in the IED with matching PMU ID, then the client connection over TCP with the IED will
be established and further communication will take place. Otherwise, the connection will be
terminated and the TCPCtrlCfgErrCnt is incremented in the PMU Diagnostics on the Local HMI
under Main menu/Diagnostics/Communication/PMU diagnostics/PMUSTATUS:1

It is possible to turn off/on the TCP data communication by sending a IEEE1344 or C37.118
command frame remotely from the client to the PMU containing RTDOFF/RTDON command.

At any given point of time maximum of 8 TCP clients can be connected to the IED for IEEE1344/
C37.118 protocol. If there is an attempt made by the 9th client, the connection to the new client will
be terminated without influencing the connection of the other clients already connected. A list of
active clients can be seen on the Local HMI in the diagnostics menu under Main menu/
Diagnostics/Communication/PMU diagnostics/PMUSTATUS:1

6.1.3.2 Short guidance for use of UDP GUID-F5BCBBF7-4EED-4E79-9E86-AF046D201BB1 v3

The IED supports maximum of 6 concurrent UDP streams. They can be individually configured to
send IEEE1344 or C37.118 data frames as unicast / multicast. Note that [x] at the end of each
parameter is referring to the UDP stream number (UDP client group) and is a number between 1
and 6. Each of the 6 UDP groups in the IED has the following settings:

1. SendDataUDP[x] – Enable / disable UDP data stream

2. ProtocolOnUDP[x] – Send IEEE1344 or C37.118 on UDP
3. PMUReportUDP[x] – Instance number of PMUREPORT function block that must send data on
this UDP stream (UDP client group[x])
4. UDPDestAddres[x] – UDP destination address for UDP client group[x] (unicast / multicast
address range)
5. UDPDestPort[x] – UDP destination port number for UDP client group[x]
6. TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] – TCP port to control of data sent over UDP client group[x], i.e. to
receive commands and send configuration frames
7. SendCfgOnUDP[x] – Send configuration frame 2 (CFG-2) on UDP for client group[x]

It is possible to turn off/on the UDP data communication either by setting the parameter
SendDataUDP[x] to Disable/Enable locally in the PMU or by sending a C37.118 or IEEE1344
command frame (RTDOFF/RTDON) remotely from the client to the PMU as defined in IEEE 1344/
C37.118 standard.

However, such a remote control to stop the streams from the client is only possible when the
parameter SendDataUDP[x] is set to SetByProtocol. The command RTDOFF/RTDON sent by the
client is stored in the IED, i.e. if the IED is rebooted for some reason, the state of the stream will
remain the same.

If the parameter SendDataUDP[x] is set toEnable the RTDOFF/RTDON commands received from
the clients are ignored in the IED.

It is recommended not to set the parameter SendDataUDP[x] to SetByProtocol in case of a

multicast. This is because if one of the clients sends the RTDOFF command, all the clients will stop
receiving the frames.

The UDP implementation in the IED is a UDP_TCP. This means that by default, only the data frames
are sent out on UDP stream and the header frame, configuration frame and command frame are

Line differential protection RED670 99

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Wide area measurement system

sent over TCP. This makes the communication more reliable especially since commands are sent
over TCP which performs request/acknowledgment exchange to ensure that no data (command in
this case) is lost.

However, by setting the parameter SendCfgOnUDP[x] to Enable, the configuration frame 2 (CFG-2)
of IEEEC37.118 data stream is cyclically sent on the corresponding UDP stream (UDP client
group[x]) once per minute. This is useful in case of multicast UDP data stream when a lot of PMU
clients are receiving the same UDP stream from the same UDP group (UDP client group[x]).

As shown in Figure 32, there are maximum 2 instances of PMUREPORT function blocks available in
the IED. Each UDP client group[x] can only connect to one of the PMUREPORT instances at the
same time. This is defined in the PMU by the parameter PMUReportUDP[x] which is used to define
the instance number of PMUREPORT function block that must send data on this UDP stream (UDP
client group[x]).

The data streams in the IED can be sent as unicast or as multicast. The user-defined IP address set
in the parameter UDPDestAddress[x] for each UDP stream defines if it is a Unicast or Multicast.
The address range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 (Class D IP addresses) is treated as multicast. Any
other IP address outside this range is treated as unicast and the UDP data will be only sent to that
specific unicast IP address. In addition to UDPDestAddress[x] parameter, UDPDestPort[x]
parameter is used to define the UDP destination port number for UDP client group[x].

In case of multicast IP, it will be the network switches and routers that take care of replicating the
packet to reach multiple receivers. Multicast mechanism uses network infrastructure efficiently by
requiring the IED to send a packet only once, even if it needs to be delivered to a large number of
receivers.

If there are more than one UDP client group defined as multicast, the user shall set different
multicast IP addresses for each UDP group.

The PMU clients receiving the UDP frames can also connect to the IED to request (command
frame) config frame 1, config frame 2, config frame 3, or header frame, and to disable/enable real
time data. This can be done by connecting to the TCP port selected in TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] for
each UDP group. This connection is done using TCP. The IED allows 4 concurrent client
connections for every TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] port (for each UDP client group[x]).

If the client tries to connect on TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] port using a PMU-ID other than what is
configured for that PMUREPORT instance (PMUReportUDP[x]), then that client is immediately
disconnected and the UDPCtrlCfgErrCnt is incremented in PMU Diagnostics on LHMI at Main
menu/Diagnostics/Communication/PMU diagnostics/PMUSTATUS:1

Even if the parameter SendDataUDP[x] is set to Disable it is still possible for the clients to connect
on the TCP port and request the configuration frames.

6.2 Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118

PMUREPORT GUID-0C45D2FA-1B95-4FCA-B23B-A28C2770B817 v1

6.2.1 Identification
GUID-0090956B-48F1-4E8B-9A40-90044C71DF20 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and PMUREPORT - -
C37.118

100 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

6.2.2 Application GUID-8DF29209-252A-4E51-9F4A-B14B669E71AB v4

The phasor measurement reporting block moves the phasor calculations into an IEEE C37.118
and/or IEEE 1344 synchrophasor frame format. The PMUREPORT block contains parameters for
PMU performance class and reporting rate, the IDCODE and Global PMU ID, format of the data
streamed through the protocol, the type of reported synchrophasors, as well as settings for
reporting analog and digital signals.

The message generated by the PMUREPORT function block is set in accordance with the IEEE
C37.118 and/or IEEE 1344 standards.

There are settings for Phasor type (positive sequence, negative sequence or zero sequence in case
of 3-phase phasor and A, B or C in case of single phase phasor), PMU's Service class (Protection or
Measurement), Phasor representation (polar or rectangular) and the data types for phasor data,
analog data and frequency data.

Synchrophasor data can be reported to up to 8 clients over TCP and/or 6 UDP group clients for
multicast or unicast transmission of phasor data from the IED. More information regarding
synchrophasor communication structure and TCP/UDP configuration is available in section
C37.118 Phasor Measurement Data Streaming Protocol Configuration.

Multiple PMU functionality can be configured in the IED, which can stream out same or different
data at different reporting rates or different performance (service) classes. There are 2 instances
of PMU functionality available in the IED. Each instance of PMU functionality includes a set of PMU
reporting function blocks tagged by the same instance number (1 or 2). As shown in the following
figures, each set of PMU reporting function blocks includes PMUREPORT, PHASORREPORT1-4,
ANALOGREPORT1-3, and BINARYREPORT1-3 function blocks. In general, each instance of PMU
functionality has 32 configurable phasor channels (PHASORREPORT1–4 blocks), 24 analog channels
(ANALOGREPORT1-3 blocks), and 28 digital channels (24 digital-report channels in
BINARYREPORT1-3 and 4 trigger-report channels in PMUREPORT function block). Special rules shall
be taken into account in PCM600 for Application Configuration and Parameter Settings of multiple
PMUREPORT blocks. These rules are explained in the the Application Manual in section PMU Report
Function Blocks Connection Rules.

Figure 33 shows both instances of the PMUREPORT function block. As seen, each PMUREPORT
instance has 4 predefined binary input signals corresponding to the Bits 03-00: Trigger Reason
defined in STAT field of the Data frame in IEEE C37.118.2 standard. These are predefined inputs for
Frequency Trigger, Rate of Change of Frequency trigger, Magnitude High and Magnitude Low
triggers.

IEC140000118-2-en.vsd
IEC140000118 V2 EN-US

Figure 33: Multiple instances of PMUREPORT function block

Figure 34 shows both instances of the PHASORREPORT function blocks. The instance number is
visible in the bottom of each function block. For each instance, there are four separate
PHASORREPORT blocks including 32 configurable phasor channels (8 phasor channels in each
PHASORREPORT block). Each phasor channel can be configured as a 3-phase (symmetrical
components positive/negative/zero) or single-phase phasor (A/B/C).

Line differential protection RED670 101

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Wide area measurement system

IEC140000119-2-en.vsd
IEC140000119 V2 EN-US

Figure 34: Multiple instances of PHASORREPORT blocks

Figure 35 shows both instances of ANALOGREPORT function blocks. The instance number is visible
in the bottom of each function block. For each instance, there are three separate ANALOGREPORT
blocks capable of reporting up to 24 Analog signals (8 Analog signals in each ANALOGREPORT
block). These can include for example transfer of active and reactive power or reporting the
milliampere input signals to the PDC clients as defined in IEEE C37.118 data frame format.

IEC140000120-2-en.vsd
IEC140000120 V2 EN-US

Figure 35: Multiple instances of ANALOGREPORT blocks

Figure 36 shows both instances of BINARYREPORT function blocks. The instance number is visible
in the bottom of each function block. For each instance, there are three separate BINARYREPORT
blocks capable of reporting up to 24 Binary signals (8 Binary signals in each BINARYREPORT block).
These binary signals can be for example dis-connector or breaker position indications or internal/
external protection alarm signals.

102 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

IEC140000121-2-en.vsd
IEC140000121 V2 EN-US

Figure 36: Multiple instances of BINARYREPORT blocks

6.2.3 Operation principle GUID-EB2B9096-2F9D-4264-B2D2-8D9DC65697E8 v3

The Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) features three main functional principles:

• To measure the power system related AC quantities (voltage, current) and to calculate the
phasor representation of these quantities.
• To synchronize the calculated phasors with the UTC by time-tagging, in order to make
synchrophasors (time is reference).
• To publish all phasor-related data by means of TCP/IP or UDP/IP, following the standard IEEE
C37.118 protocol.

The C37.118 standard imposes requirements on the devices and describes the communication
message structure and data. The PMU complies with all the standard requirements with a specific
attention to the Total Vector Error (TVE) requirement. The TVE is calculated using the following
equation:

2
( X r ( n ) - X r )2 + ( X i ( n ) - X i )
TVE =
X r2 + X i2
GUID-80D9B1EA-A770-4F50-9530-61644B4DEBBE V1 EN-US (Equation 11)

where,

Xr(n) and Xi(n) are the measured values

Xr and Xi are the theoretical values

In order to comply with TVE requirements, special calibration is done in the factory on the analog
input channels of the PMU, resulting in increased accuracy of the measurements. The IEEE C37.118
standard also imposes a variety of steady state and dynamic requirements which are fulfilled in
the IED with the help of high accuracy measurements and advanced filtering techniques.

Figure 37 shows an overview of the PMU functionality and operation. In this figure, only one
instance of PMUREPORT (PMUREPORT1) is shown. Note that connection of different signals to the
PMUREPORT, in this figure, is only an example and the actual connections and reported signals on
the IEEEC37.118/1344 can be defined by the user.

Line differential protection RED670 103

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Wide area measurement system

U/I samples

PMUREPORT1

MU PHASOR1
PHASOR2 8 TCP
U IEEEC37.118 / 1344
TRM SMAI messages NUM
I
U 6 UDC
TRM PHASOR32
I

ANALOG1
I/P MIM SMMI ANALOG2

MEAS. ANALOG24

BINARY1
BINARY2
BIM

OR
BINARY24
PROTECTION

GPS / OP
IRIG-B FREQTRIG
UP
DFDTTRIG
OC
PPS time data MAGHIGHTRIG
MAGLOWTRIG
UV

IEC140000146-1-en.vsd

IEC140000146 V2 EN-US

Figure 37: Overview of reporting functionality (PMUREPORT)

The TRM modules are individually AC-calibrated in the factory. The calibration data is stored in the
prepared area of the TRM EEProm. The pre-processor block is extended with calibration
compensation and a new angle reference method based on timestamps. The AI3P output of the
preprocessor block is used to provide the required information for each respective PMUREPORT
phasor channel. More information about preprocessor block is available in the section Signal
matrix for analog inputs SMAI.

6.2.3.1 Frequency reporting GUID-4F3BA7C7-8C9B-4266-9F72-AFB139E9DC21 v2

By using patented algorithm the IED can track the power system frequency in quite wide range
from 9 Hz to 95 Hz. In order to do that, the three-phase voltage signal shall be connected to the
IED. Then IED can adapt its filtering algorithm in order to properly measure phasors of all current
and voltage signals connected to the IED. This feature is essential for proper operation of the
PMUREPORT function or for protection during generator start-up and shut-down procedure.

This adaptive filtering is ensured by proper configuration and settings of all relevant pre-
processing blocks, see Signal matrix for analog inputs in the Application manual. Note that in all
preconfigured IEDs such configuration and settings are already made and the three-phase voltage
are used as master for frequency tracking. With such settings the IED will be able to properly
estimate the magnitude and the phase angle of measured current and voltage phasors in this wide
frequency range.

104 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

One of the important functions of a PMU is reporting a very accurate system frequency to the PDC
client. In the IED, each of the PMUREPORT instances is able to report an accurate frequency. Each
voltage-connected preprocessor block (SMAI block) delivers the frequency data, derived from the
analog input AC voltage values, to the respective voltage phasor channel. Every phasor channel has
a user-settable parameter (PhasorXUseFreqSrc) to be used as a source of frequency data for
reporting to the PDC client. It is very important to set this parameter to On for the voltage-
connected phasor channels. There is an automatic frequency source selection logic to ensure an
uninterrupted reporting of the system frequency to the PDC client. In this frequency source
selection logic, the following general rules are applied:

• Only the voltage phasor channels are used

• The phasor channel with a lower channel number is prioritized to the one with a higher
channel number

As a result, the first voltage phasor is always the one delivering the system frequency to the PDC
client and if, by any reason, this voltage gets disconnected then the next available voltage phasor
is automatically used as the frequency source and so on. If the first voltage phasor comes back,
since it has a higher priority compare to the currently selected phasor channel, after 500 ms it will
be automatically selected again as the frequency source. There is also an output available on the
component which shows if the reference frequency is good, error or reference channel unavailable.

It is possible to monitor the status of the frequency reference channel (frequency source) for the
respective PMUREPORT instance on Local HMI under Test/Function status/Communication/
Station Communication/PMU Report/PMUREPORT:1/Outputs, where the FREQREFCHSEL output
shows the selected channel as the reference for frequency and FREQREFCHERR output states if
the reference frequency is good, or if there is an error or if the reference channel is unavailable. For
more information refer to the table PMUREPORT monitored data.
PID-6244-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 15: PMUREPORT Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TIMESTAT BOOLEAN 1=Ready - Time synchronization status
0=Fail
FREQ REAL - Hz Frequency
FREQGRAD REAL - - Rate of change of frequency
FREQREFCHSEL INTEGER - - Frequency reference channel number
selected
FREQREFCHERR BOOLEAN 0=Freq ref not - Frequency reference channel error
available
1=Freq ref error
2=Freq ref
available
FREQTRIG BOOLEAN - - Frequency trigger
DFDTTRIG BOOLEAN - - Rate of change of frequency trigger
MAGHIGHTRIG BOOLEAN - - Magnitude high trigger
MAGLOWTRIG BOOLEAN - - Magnitude low trigger

6.2.3.2 Reporting filters GUID-D39153B5-81CE-4C1F-A816-C7A4C3407048 v2

The PMUREPORT function block implements the reporting filters designed to avoid aliasing as the
reporting frequency is lower than the sample/calculation frequency. This means, the

Line differential protection RED670 105

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Wide area measurement system

synchrophasor and frequency data which are included in the C37.118 synchrophasor streaming
data are filtered in order to suppress aliasing effects, as the rate of the C37.118 data is slower than
the data rate for internal processing. For this purpose, there is an anti-aliasing filter designed for
each reporting rate. The correct anti-aliasing filter will be automatically selected based on the
reporting rate and the performance class (P/M) settings. The filters are designed to attenuate all
aliasing frequencies to at least -40 dB (a gain of 0.01) at M class.

The synchrophasor measurement is adaptive as it follows the fundamental

frequency over a wide range despite the reporting rate.

For example, when the synchrophasor measurement follows the fundamental frequency beyond
the fixed Nyquist limits in C37.118 standard, the anti-aliasing filter stopband moves with the
measured fundamental frequency. This has to be considered in connection with C37.118, where the
passband is defined relative to a fixed nominal frequency as shown in the equation 12.

Fs
f0 ±
2
IECEQUATION2418 V1 EN-US (Equation 12)
where,

f0 is the nominal frequency

Fs is the reporting rate

6.2.3.3 Scaling Factors for ANALOGREPORT channels GUID-0DDAF6A9-8643-4FDD-97CF-9E35EF40AF7E v2

The internal calculation of analog values in the IED is based on 32 bit floating point. Therefore, if
the user selects to report the analog data (AnalogDataType) as Integer, there will be a down-
conversion of a 32 bit floating value to a new 16 bit integer value. In such a case, in order to
optimize the resolution of the reported analog data, the user-defined analog scaling is
implemented in the IED.

The analog scaling in the IED is automatically calculated by use of the user-defined parameters
AnalogXRange for the respective analog channel X. The analog data value on the input X will have a
range between -AnalogXRange and +AnalogXRange. The resulting scale factor will be applied to
the reported analog data where applicable.

If the AnalogDataType is selected as Float, then these settings are ignored.

The analog scaling in the IED is calculated using the equation:

AnalogXRange ´ 2
S calefactor =
65535.0
offset = 0.0
65535.0 = 16 bit integer range
IECEQUATION2443 V1 EN-US

According to the IEEE C37.118.2 standard, the scale factors (conversion factor) for analog channels
are defined in configuration frame 2 (CFG-2) and configuration frame 3 (CFG-3) frames as follows:

106 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

• CFG-2 frame: The field ANUNIT (4 bytes) specifies the conversion factor as a signed 24 bit
word for user defined scaling. Since it is a 24 bit integer, in order to support the floating point
scale factor, the scale factor itself is multiplied in 10, so that a minimum of 0.1 scale factor can
be sent over the CFG-2 frame. The resulting scale factor is rounded to the nearest decimal
value. The clients receiving the Analog scale factor over CFG-2 should divide the received scale
factor by 10 and then apply it to the corresponding analog data value.
• CFG-3 frame: The field ANSCALE (8 bytes) specifies the conversion factor as X’ = M * X + B
where; M is magnitude scaling in 32 bit floating point (first 4 bytes) and B is the offset in 32
bit floating point (last 4 bytes).

The server uses CFG-3 scale factor to scale the analog data values. As a result, the clients which
use scale factors in CFG-3 in order to recalculate analog values, will get a better resolution than
using the scale factors in CFG-2.

The following examples show how the scale factor is calculated.

Example 1:

AnalogXRange = 3277.0
IECEQUATION2446 V1 EN-US

The scale factor is calculated as follows:

(3277.0 ´ 2.0 )
sc alefac tor = = 0.1 a nd offse t = 0.0
65535.0
IECEQUATION2447 V1 EN-US

The scale factor will be sent as 1 on configuration frame 2, and 0.1 on configuration frame 3. The
range of analog values that can be transmitted in this case is -0.1 to -3276.8 and +0.1 to +3276.7.

Example 2:

AnalogXRange = 4915.5
IECEQUATION2448 V1 EN-US

The scale factor is calculated as follows:

(4915.5 ´ 2.0 )
s c alefac tor = = 0.15 a nd offse t = 0.0
65535.0
IECEQUATION2449 V1 EN-US

The scale factor will be sent as 1 on configuration frame 2, and 0.15 on configuration frame 3. The
range of analog values that can be transmitted in this case is -0.15 to -4915.5 and +0.15 to +4915.5.

Example 3:

Analo gXRange = 10000000000

IECEQUATION2450 V1 EN-US

The scale factor is calculated as follows:

(10000000000 ´ 2.0)
sc alefac tor = = 305180.43 and offse t = 0.0
65535.5
IECEQUATION2451 V1 EN-US

Line differential protection RED670 107

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Wide area measurement system

The scale factor will be sent as 3051804 on configuration frame 2, and 305180.43 on configuration
frame 3. The range of analog values that can be transmitted in this case is -305181 to
-10000000000 and +305181 to +10000000000.

6.2.3.4 PMU Report Function Blocks Connection Rules in PCM600 Application

Configuration Tool (ACT) GUID-66667179-F3E1-455B-8B99-6D73F37E949B v3

There are 3 important general rules which have to be considered in PCM600 ACT for the
connection of preprocessor blocks (SMAI) and 3PHSUM blocks to PHASORREPORT blocks:

Rule 1:

Only SMAI or 3PHSUM blocks shall be connected to PMU PHASORREPORT blocks and they shall
have the same cycle time, 0.9 ms.

Figure 38 shows an example of correct connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
where both function blocks are working on 0.9 ms cycle time.

IEC140000124-2-en.vsd
IEC140000124 V2 EN-US

Figure 38: An example of correct connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
Figure 39 shows an example of wrong connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
where the SMAI block is working on 3 ms while PHASORREPORT block is working on 0.9 ms cycle
time.

IEC140000125-2-en.vsd
IEC140000125 V2 EN-US

Figure 39: An example of wrong connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
Violation of rule 1 results in PMU applications not running at all. The reason is the inconsistent
cycle time. For example, in Figure 39, the SMAI block is updating its output every 3 ms while the
PHASORREPORT block is expecting input every 0.9 ms. The PHASORREPORT filtering window is
designed to receive updated input every 0.9 ms and therefore the application will fail.

Rule 2:

The same SMAI or 3PHSUM block can be connected to more than one PHASORREPORT block only if
all the connected PHASORREPORT blocks have similar instance number or only if all the connected

108 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

PHASORREPORT blocks have similar settings for SvcClass and ReportRate. Figure 40 shows the
settings for PMUREPORT function block demonstrated by PCM600 Parameter Setting Tool (PST).

IEC140000126-2-en.vsd
IEC140000126 V2 EN-US

Figure 40: PMUREPORT settings in PCM600 PST

Figure 41 shows an example of correct connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
where two different SMAI blocks are connected to different PHASORREPORT blocks with different
instance numbers. In this example, as the PHASORREPORT blocks have different instance numbers
and different settings for SvcClass and ReportRate, a separate SMAI block is used for each
PHASORREPORT block.

IEC140000127-2-en.vsd
IEC140000127 V2 EN-US

Figure 41: An example of correct connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
Figure 42 shows an example of wrong connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
where the same SMAI block is connected to different PHASORREPORT blocks with different
instance numbers. Such connection will be only correct if both connected PHASORREPORT blocks
have similar settings for SvcClass and ReportRate. If settings for PMUREPORT instances differ for
SvcClass or ReportRate, then PHASOR1 connection in PHASORREPORT1 instance 2 will not be
compliant with IEEE C37.118 standard. The reason is that the filtering in SMAI/3PHSUM block is
adapted according to the performance class (SvcClass) and reporting rate of the connected
instance of PHASORREPORT function block. In this example, SMAI1 will adapt its filtering

Line differential protection RED670 109

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Wide area measurement system

according to PHASORREPORT instance 1 (because of higher priority) and therefore

PHASORREPORT instance 2 will receive data which does not match its performance class and
report rate.

IEC140000128-2-en.vsd
IEC140000128 V2 EN-US

Figure 42: An example of wrong connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
Rule 3:

This rule is only related to the connection of 3PHSUM block to the PHASORREPORT block. If
3PHSUM block is configured to use external DFT reference (from SMAI reference block), it shall
only be connected to the same PHASORREPORT block instance as the one the SMAI reference
block is connected to. In other words, both the SMAI reference block and 3PHSUM block (3PHSUM
block with external DFT reference) shall be connected to the same instance of PHASORREPORT
block (PHASOR1-32 of Instance number 1 or 2).

Figure 43 shows an example of correct connection of 3PHSUM and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
where SMAI3 is configured as the reference block for DFT reference external out (DFTRefExtOut)
and 3PHSUM uses external DFT reference (from SMAI3). Figures 44 and 45 show the
corresponding setting parameters.

110 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

IEC140000129-2-en.vsd
IEC140000129 V2 EN-US

Figure 43: An example of correct connection of 3PHSUM and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT

IEC140000130-1-en.vsd
IEC140000130 V1 EN-US

Figure 44: SMAI1 setting parameters example-showing that SMAI3 is selected as the DFT
reference (DFTRefGrp3)

Line differential protection RED670 111

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Wide area measurement system

IEC140000131-1-en
IEC140000131 V1 EN-US

Figure 45: 3PHSUM setting parameters example-showing that 3PHSUM is using the External
DFT reference coming indirectly from SMAI3
Figure 46 shows an example of wrong connection of 3PHSUM and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
where SMAI3 is configured as the reference block for DFT reference external out (DFTRefExtOut)
and 3PHSUM uses external DFT reference (from SMAI3).

IEC140000132-2-en.vsd
IEC140000132 V2 EN-US

Figure 46: An example of wrong connection of 3PHSUM and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
If settings for PMUREPORT instances (PHASORREPORT1 instances 1 and 2 above) differ for
SvcClass or ReportRate, then the synchrophasor reported by PHASOR2 connection from
PHASORREPORT1 instance 2 will not be compliant with IEEE C37.118 standard. The reason is as in
the rule 2, the filtering in SMAI/3PHSUM block is adapted according to the performance class
(SvcClass) and reporting rate of the connected instance of PHASORREPORT function block. On the
other hand, when 3PHSUM uses external DFT reference, it also adapts its filtering according to the
SMAI reference block. Therefore, in order to avoid two different filtering applied to the 3PHSUM
block, both SMAI reference block and 3PHSUM shall be connected to the same PHASORREPORT
instance. In this example (Figure 46), SMAI3 adapts its filtering according to PHASORREPORT1
instance 2 (due to connection) and 3PHSUM is adapting its filtering according to PHASORREPORT1
instance 1. On the other hand, since 3PHSUM is set to receive external DFT reference from SMAI3,
therefore If settings for PHASORREPORT1 instances 1 and 2 above differ for SvcClass or

112 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

ReportRate, then 3PHSUM block will be affected by two different filtering at the same time which
is not possible. For example in Figure 46, PHASOR2 from PHASORREPORT1 instance 1 may not be
fully compliant with IEEE C37.118 standard.

Note: If the SMAI reference block is not connected to any PHASORREPORT block, then 3PHSUM
block can be freely connected to any PHASORREPORT block regardless of its DFT reference
setting.

Note: If more 3PHSUM blocks need to be used, all 3PHSUM blocks (using external DFT ref) have to
be connected to the same instance of PHASORREPORT blocks (PHASOR1-32 of Instance number 1
or 2).

Note: If settings SvcClass and ReportRate are the same for different instances of PHASORREPORT
blocks, then 3PHSUM block can be freely connected to any of them regardless of 3PHSUM block
DFT reference setting or the reference SMAI block connection.

Note: Violation of rules 2 or 3 results in non-compliancy with IEEE C37.118 standard for some of the
synchrophasors. In case of rule 2 violation, the non-compliancy only applies to synchrophasors
from instance 2 and the synchrophasors from instance 1 will be still compliant. The non-
compliancy with the standard may be quite obvious as in case of rule 2 violation with different
SvcClass settings. This produces big angle error. On the other hand, it may be difficult to detect
the non-compliancy with the standard if rule 2 is violated with different ReportRates, or if rule 3 is
violated. In such cases, the synchrophasors may only fail to comply (with small error) in some
particular test case(s).

For more information regarding 3PHSUM block application, please refer to the Application Manual
under section Basic IED functions.

6.2.4 Setting guidelines GUID-83969957-DABF-4B9B-95C7-B9F0AF6E647A v2

Based on the functionality and appearance in PCM600, the PMU reporting functionality is
categorized into 4 different categories (function block) as follows:

1. PMUREPORT
2. PHASORREPORT
3. ANALOGREPORT
4. BINARYREPORT

Each category has its corresponding parameter settings except for BINARYREPORT function block
which does not have any specific parameters and settings.

1. PMUREPORT is the main function block which controls the operation of other PMU reporting
function blocks. Each instance of PMUREPORT function block has the following parameters:
• Operation: Enables/Disables the operation of the corresponding instance of PMU
reporting functionality by choosing On/Off setting.
• SvcClass: It refers to the 1-byte SVC_CLASS field of the configuration frame 3 (CFG-3)
organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format. Here the user can select the
performance class (service class) used for synchrophasor data measurement according
to IEEE C37.118.1 standard. The options are P class or M class.
Note: There are 2 PMUREPORT instances available (PMUREPORT:1 and PMUREPORT:2)
corresponding to 2 independent data streams. The user can set different or identical
service class for each data stream. In case of different service classes, special rules shall
be considered in PCM600 ACT for the connection of preprocessor blocks (SMAI) and
3PHSUM blocks to PHASORREPORT blocks. More details are available under section PMU

Line differential protection RED670 113

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Wide area measurement system

Report Function Blocks Connection Rules in PCM600 Application Configuration Tool

(ACT).
• Global_PMU_ID: It refers to the 16-byte G_PMU_ID field of the configuration frame 3
(CFG-3) organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format. It is a 16-character (128
bits) user-assigned value which can be sent with the configuration 3 message. It allows
uniquely identifying PMUs in a system that has more than 65535 PMUs. The coding for
the 16 bytes is left to the user for assignment.
• PMUdataStreamIDCODE: It refers to the 2-byte IDCODE field of the configuration frame
and data frame organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format. It is a user
assigned ID number (1-65534) for each data stream sent out from the PMU. This is
especially important when having multiple data streams (multiple PMU functionality).
Note: The data stream IDCODE is a unique code for each and every data stream in one
physical PMU device. In the IED, there are 2 PMUREPORT instances available
(PMUREPORT:1 and PMUREPORT:2) corresponding to 2 independent data streams. The
user must set different IDCODEs for each instance.
• PhasorFormat: It refers to the Bit 0 of the FORMAT field of the configuration frames 1, 2
and 3 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format. Here the user can select
the format of the calculated synchrophasors. The options are Rectangular or Polar
format. Rectangular format represents the synchrophasor as real and imaginary values,
real value first (a + bj) while the Polar format represents the synchrophasor as
magnitude and angle, magnitude first (A ejα).
• PhasorDataType: It refers to the Bit 1 of the FORMAT field of the configuration frames 1,
2 and 3 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format. Here the user can select
the data type of the calculated synchrophasors. The options are Integer or Float data.
The synchrophasor data are sent via the PHASORS field of data frame organization of
IEEE C37.118.2 message format. Depends on the phasor data type, the size of PHASORS
field can be 4 (Integer) or 8 (Float) bytes per IEEE C37.118.2 message.
Integer data type for the phasors corresponds to a 16-bit integer value. It represents a
16-bit signed integer, range –32 767 to +32 767, in rectangular format, and in polar
format it represents a 16-bit unsigned integer range 0 to 65535 for the magnitude and a
16-bit signed integer, in radians × 104, range –31 416 to +31 416 for the angle.
Float data type for the phasors corresponds to 32-bit values in IEEE floating-point
format. In rectangular format, it represents real and imaginary, in engineering units (real
value first) and in polar format it represents magnitude and angle, in engineering units
(magnitude first) and angle in radians, range –π to + π.
• AnalogDataType: It refers to the Bit 2 of the FORMAT field of the configuration frames 1,
2 and 3 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format. Here the user can select
the type of the analog data which are reported along with the synchrophasor data over
IEEE C37.118.2 message. The options are Integer or Float data corresponding to the 16-
bit integer or 32-bit IEEE floating-point values, respectively. The analog data could be
sampled data such as control signal or transducer values, or it can be active and reactive
power measurement values from each feeder in the substation. Values and ranges are
separately defined by user via the parameter settings related to the ANALOGREPORT
function block. The analog data are sent via the ANALOG field of data frame
organization of IEEE C37.118.2 message format. Depends on the analog data type, the
size of ANALOG field can be 2 (Integer) or 4 (Float) bytes per IEEE C37.118.2 message.
More information is available under the section Scaling Factors for ANALOGREPORT
channels.
• FrequencyDataType: It refers to the Bit 3 of the FORMAT field of the configuration
frames 1, 2 and 3 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format. Here the user
can select the type of the frequency-deviation and rate-of-change-of-frequency data
(FREQ/DFREQ) which can be reported along with the synchrophasor data over IEEE
C37.118.2 message. The options are Integer or Float data corresponding to the 16-bit
integer or 32-bit IEEE floating-point value, respectively.
The frequency-deviation and rate-of-change-of-frequency data are sent via the FREQ
and DFREQ fields of data frame organization of IEEE C37.118.2 message format.

114 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

Depends on the selected data type, the size of each field can be 2 (Integer) or 4 (Float)
bytes per IEEE C37.118.2 message.
The data sent via the FREQ field is frequency deviation from nominal frequency (50 Hz or
60 Hz), in mHz. It is ranged from –32.767 to +32.767 Hz. Integer data type for frequency-
deviation data represents 16-bit signed integers, range –32 767 to +32 767 32, and Float
data type represents actual frequency value in IEEE floating-point format.
The data sent via the DFREQ field is Rate Of Change Of Frequency (ROCOF), in Hertz per
second times 100. It is ranged from –327.67 to +327.67 Hz per second. Integer data type
for ROCOF data represents 16-bit signed integers, range –32 767 to +32 767 32, and Float
data type represents actual value in IEEE floating-point format.
• SendFreqInfo: Enables/Disables sending of the frequency-deviation and Rate Of Change
Of Frequency (ROCOF) data by choosing On/Off setting.
• ReportRate: It refers to the 2-byte DATA_RATE field of the configuration frames 1, 2 and
3 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format. The DATA_RATE field is
identifying the Rate of phasor data transmissions by a 2-byte integer word (–32 767 to
+32 767). Here the user can select the synchrophasor data reporting rate from the PMU
based on the number of frames per second.
In general, the IED has 5 different reporting rates (10, 25, 50, 100, 200 fr/s) on the 50 Hz
system frequency, and has 8 different reporting rates (10, 12, 15, 20, 30, 60, 120, 240
fr/s) on the 60 Hz system frequency. The options are as follows:
• 10/10 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 12/10 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 15/10 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 20/25 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 30/25 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 60/50 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 120/100 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 240/200 fr/s (60/50Hz)

The first number is identifying the reporting rate in a 60Hz system, and the second
number is the reporting rate in a 50Hz system. For example, if the selected setting is
15/10 fr/s (60/50Hz), this means that the synchrophasor data reporting rate would be
15 frames per second if the system frequency is 60Hz. Likewise, if the system frequency
is 50Hz, the selected rate is equal to 10 frames per second.
• RptTimetag: It refers to the method of time-tagging used in the IED which is related to
the phasor estimation and filtering technique. The options are FirstSample,
MiddleSample and LastSample. The time-stamp of the PMU output represents the
phasor equivalent, frequency, and ROCOF of the power system signal at the time it is
applied to the PMU input. All of these estimates must be compensated for PMU
processing delays including analog input filtering, sampling, and estimation group
delay. If the sample time tags are compensated for all input delays, the time tag of the
sample in the middle of the estimation window can be used for the phasor estimation
(output) time tag as long as the filtering coefficients are symmetrical across the
filtering window.
Note: It is recommended to set this parameter on MiddleSample.
2. PHASORREPORT is the function block responsible for reporting the synchrophasors. Each
instance of PMUREPORT function block has 32 phasor channels with the following setting
parameters; where X is a number from 1 to 32:
• PhasorXReport: Enables/Disables the phasor channel X (reporting of PhasorX) by
choosing On/Off setting.
• PhasorX: The group selector for PhasorX. Here, the user can select the type of reported
synchrophasor from the phasor channel X as either a 3-phase symmetrical component
or a single-phase phasor. The options are as follows:

Line differential protection RED670 115

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Wide area measurement system

• A
• B
• C
• NEGSEQ
• POSSEQ
• ZEROSEQ
• PhasorXUseFreqSrc: Enables/Disables the contribution of Phasor channel X in
automatic frequency source selection by choosing On/Off setting. Each voltage-
connected preprocessor block delivers the frequency data, derived from the analog
input AC voltage values, to the respective voltage phasor channel. Every phasor channel
has a user-settable parameter (PhasorXUseFreqSrc) to be used as a source of frequency
data for reporting to the PDC client. It is very important to set this parameter to On for
the voltage-connected phasor channels. There is an automatic frequency source
selection logic to ensure an uninterrupted reporting of the system frequency to the PDC
client. More information is available under the section Frequency reporting.
3. ANALOGREPORT is the function block responsible for reporting the analog values. Each
instance of ANALOGREPORT function block has 24 analog channels with the following setting
parameters; where X is a number from 1 to 24:
• AnalogXRange: This parameter defines a range between -AnalogXRange and
+AnalogXRange for AnalogX value. The range will be used by the IED to apply a proper
scale factor to the AnalogX values when Integer format is used. It refers to the 4-byte
ANUNIT field of the configuration frames 1, 2 organization and the 8-byte ANSCALE field
of the configuration frame 3 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format. The
AnalogXRange value can be a number between 3277.0 and 10000000000. This setting is
only important if the AnalogDataType setting is selected as Integer. More information is
available under the section Scaling Factors for ANALOGREPORT channels.
• AnalogXUnitType: Unit type for analog signal X. It refers to the 4-byte ANUNIT field of
the configuration frames 1, 2 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format.
The options are Single point-on-wave, RMS of analog input and Peak of analog input.

116 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

Section 7 Differential protection

7.1 High impedance differential protection, single phase

HZPDIF (87) IP14239-1 v4

7.1.1 Identification M14813-1 v4

IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

Function description
identification identification device number

High impedance differential

HZPDIF Id 87
protection, single phase

SYMBOL-CC V2 EN-US

7.1.2 Application IP14944-1 v3

SEMOD54734-4 v8
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection function HZPDIF (87) can be used as:

• Generator differential protection

• Reactor differential protection
• Busbar differential protection
• Autotransformer differential protection (for common and serial windings only)
• T-feeder differential protection
• Capacitor differential protection
• Restricted ground fault protection for transformer, generator and shunt reactor windings
• Restricted ground fault protection

The application is dependent on the primary system arrangements and location of breakers,
available CT cores and so on.

Line differential protection RED670 117

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

87N 3·87

3·87B

3·87

3·87B

3·87T

3·87

3·87T

3·87G G

ANSI05000163-1-en.vsd
ANSI05000163 V2 EN-US

Figure 47: Different applications of a 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF
(87) function

7.1.2.1 The basics of the high impedance principle SEMOD54734-153 v9

The high impedance differential protection principle has been used for many years and is well
documented in literature publicly available. Its operating principle provides very good sensitivity
and high speed operation. One main benefit offered by the principle is an absolute stability (that
is, no operation) for external faults even in the presence of heavy CT saturation. The principle is
based on the CT secondary current circulating between involved current transformers and not
through the IED due to high impedance in the measuring branch. This stabilizing resistance is in
the range of hundreds of ohms and sometimes above one kilo Ohm. When an internal fault occurs
the current cannot circulate and is forced through the measuring branch causing relay operation.

It should be remembered that the whole scheme, its built-in components and wiring must be
adequately maintained throughout the lifetime of the equipment in order to be able to withstand
the high voltage peaks (that is, pulses) which may appear during an internal fault. Otherwise any

118 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

flash-over in CT secondary circuits or any other part of the scheme may prevent correct operation
of the high impedance differential relay for an actual internal fault.

87N

en05000164_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000164 V1 EN-US

Figure 48: Example for the high impedance restricted earth fault protection application
For a through fault one current transformer might saturate when the other CTs still will feed
current. For such a case a voltage will be developed across the measuring branch. The calculations
are made with the worst situations in mind and a minimum operating voltage VR is calculated
according to equation 13

VR > IF max × ( Rct + Rl )

EQUATION1531-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 13)

where:
IFmax is the maximum through fault current at the secondary side of the CT
Rct is the current transformer secondary winding resistance and
Rl is the maximum loop resistance of the circuit at any CT.

The minimum operating voltage has to be calculated (all loops) and the IED function is set higher
than the highest achieved value (setting TripPickup). As the loop resistance is the value to the
connection point from each CT, it is advisable to do all the CT core summations in the switchgear

Line differential protection RED670 119

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

to have shortest possible loops. This will give lower setting values and also a better balanced
scheme. The connection in to the control room can then be from the most central bay.

For an internal fault, all involved CTs will try to feed current through the measuring branch.
Depending on the size of current transformer, relatively high voltages will be developed across the
series resistor. Note that very high peak voltages can appear. To prevent the risk of flashover in
the circuit, a voltage limiter must be included. The voltage limiter is a voltage dependent resistor
(Metrosil).

The external unit with stabilizing resistor has a value of either 6800 ohms or 1800 ohms
(depending on ordered alternative) with a sliding link to allow adjustment to the required value.
Select a suitable value of the resistor based on the VR voltage calculated. A higher resistance value
will give a higher sensitivity and a lower value a lower sensitivity of the relay.

The function has a recommended operating current range 40 mA to 1.0A for 1 A inputs and 200 mA
to 5A for 5A inputs. This, together with the selected and set value, is used to calculate the required
value of current at the set TripPickup and R series values.

The CT inputs used for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87)
function, shall be set to have ratio 1:1. So the parameters CTsecx and CTprimx of the
relevant channel x of TRM and/or AIM shall be set equal to 1 A by PST in PCM600;
The parameter CTStarPointx may be set to ToObject.

The tables 16, 17 below show, the operating currents for different settings of operating voltages
and selected resistances. Adjust as required based on tables 16, 17 or to values in between as
required for the application.

Minimum ohms can be difficult to adjust due to the small value compared to the
total value.

Normally the voltage can be increased to higher values than the calculated minimum TripPickup
with a minor change of total operating values as long as this is done by adjusting the resistor to a
higher value. Check the sensitivity calculation below for reference.

Table 16: 1 A channels: input with minimum operating down to 40 mA

Operating Stabilizing Operating Stabilizing Operating
voltage resistor R current level resistor R current level
TripPickup ohms 1A ohms 1A
20 V 500 0.040 A -- --
40 V 1000 0.040 A -- --
60 V 1500 0.040 A 600 0.100 A
80 V 2000 0.040 A 800 0.100 A
100 V 2500 0.040 A 1000 0.100 A
150 V 3750 0.040 A 1500 0.100 A
200 V 5000 0.040 A 2000 0.100 A

120 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

Table 17: 5 A channels: input with minimum operating down to 100 mA

Operating Stabilizing Operating Stabilizing Operating Stabilizing Operating
voltage resistor R1 current level resistor R1 current level resistor R1 current level
TripPickup ohms 5A ohms 5A ohms 5A
20 V 200 0.100 A 100 0.200 A -- --
40 V 400 0.100 A 200 0.200 A 100 0.400
60 V 600 0.100 A 300 0.200 A 150 0.400 A
80 V 800 0.100 A 400 0.200 A 200 0.400 A
100 V 1000 0.100 A 500 0.200 A 250 0.400 A
150 V 1500 0.100 A 750 0.200 A 375 0.400 A
200 V 2000 0.100 A 1000 0.200 A 500 0.400 A

The current transformer saturation voltage must be at least 2 ˣ TripPickup to have sufficient
operating margin. This must be checked after calculation of TripPickup.

When the R value has been selected and the TripPickup value has been set, the sensitivity of the
scheme IP can be calculated. The IED sensitivity is decided by the total current in the circuit
according to equation 14.

IP = n × ( IR + Ires + å lmag )
EQUATION1747 V1 EN-US (Equation 14)

where:
n is the CT ratio
IP primary current at IED pickup,
IR IED pickup current (U>Trip/SeriesResistor)
Ires is the current through the voltage limiter and
ΣImag is the sum of the magnetizing currents from all CTs in the circuit (for example, 4 for
restricted earth fault protection, 2 for reactor differential protection, 3-5 for
autotransformer differential protection).

It should be remembered that the vectorial sum of the currents must be used (IEDs, Metrosil and
resistor currents are resistive). The current measurement is insensitive to DC component in fault
current to allow the use of only the AC components of the fault current in the above calculations.

The voltage dependent resistor (Metrosil) characteristic is shown in Figure 55.

Series resistor thermal capacity SEMOD54734-336 v6

The series resistor is dimensioned for 200 W. Care shall be exercised while testing to ensure that if
current needs to be injected continuously or for a significant duration of time, check that the heat
dissipation Vxxx Series Resistance value does not exceed 200 W. Otherwise injection time shall be
reduced to the minimum.

Line differential protection RED670 121

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

Rl Rl

Rct VR Rct
R
Rres

I>

Protected Object

VR

a) Through load situation

VR

b) Through fault situation

VR

c) Internal faults
ANSI05000427-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000427 V2 EN-US

Figure 49: The high impedance principle for one phase with two current transformer inputs

122 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

7.1.3 Connection examples for high impedance differential protection GUID-8C58A73D-7C2E-4BE5-AB87-B4C93FB7D62B v5

WARNING! USE EXTREME CAUTION! Dangerously high voltages might be present

on this equipment, especially on the plate with resistors. De-energize the primary
object protected with this equipment before connecting or disconnecting wiring or
performing any maintenance. The plate with resistors should be provided with a
protective cover, mounted in a separate box or in a locked cubicle. National law and
standards shall be followed.

7.1.3.1 Connections for three-phase high impedance differential protection GUID-C12CCAAF-5AE5-4A9C-AC9C-F56A66FD2C14 v8

Generator, reactor or busbar differential protection is a typical application for three-phase high
impedance differential protection. Typical CT connections for three-phase high impedance
differential protection scheme are shown in figure 50.

L1 L2 L3
(A) (B) (C)
7 SMAI2
1 BLOCK G2AI3P
AI01 REVROT G2AI1
CT 1200/1 2 (I) ^GRP2_A G2AI2

Star/Wye 3 ^GRP2_B G2AI3

AI02 ^GRP2_C G2AI4
Connected 4 (I) ^GRP2_N G2N

5
AI03
6 (I)
7
AI04
8 (I)
9
1
AI05
0 (I)
1 1
1
1
AI06
2 (I)
Protected Object IED
N
L3 (C)
L2 (B)
L1 (A)

N 4
L3 (C)
L2 (B)

CT 1200/1 L1 (A) 5
Star/Wye
Connected X1 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2

3
1

1
3

3
R4

R5

R6

R1

R2

R3
2 U

2 U

2 U

4
2

L1 L2 L3 X X 6
(A) (B) (C) 3-Ph Plate with Metrosils and Resistors
ANSI09000169-4-en.vsdx

ANSI09000169 V4 EN-US

Figure 50: CT connections for high impedance differential protection

Pos Description
1 Scheme grounding point

It is important to insure that only one grounding point exist in this scheme.

Line differential protection RED670 123

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

2 Three-phase plate with setting resistors and metrosils. Protective ground is a separate 4 mm screw
terminal on the plate.
3 Necessary connection for three-phase metrosil set.
4 Position of optional test switch for secondary injection into the high impedance differential IED.
5 Necessary connection for setting resistors.
6 Factory-made star point on a three-phase setting resistor set.

The star point connector must be removed for installations with 670 series IEDs. This
star point is required for RADHA schemes only.

7 Connections of three individual phase currents for high impedance scheme to three CT inputs in the IED.

7.1.3.2 Connections for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87) GUID-D68A237F-610C-4AF0-870F-273117F64D92 v10

Restricted earth fault protection is a typical application for 1Ph High impedance differential
protection HZPDIF (87). Typical CT connections for the high impedance based protection scheme
are shown in figure 51.

L1 L2 L3
(A) (B) (C)

CT 1500/5 2 AI01 (I)

Star/Wye 3
SMAI2
Connected 4 AI02 (I)
BLOCK G2AI3P

5 REVROT G2AI1

6 6 AI03 (I) ^GRP2_A G2AI2

^GRP2_B G2AI3
7
^GRP2_C G2AI4
8 AI04 (I)
^GRP2_N G2N

9
10 AI05 (I)
11
Protected Object 12 AI06 (I)

L1 L2 L3
IED
N
(A) (B) (C)

4
1
N
CT 1500/5

X1 4 5 1 2 3
2
3
5
1

1
3
R1

R2
2 V

4
2

1-Ph Plate with Metrosil and Resistor

ANSI09000170-5-en.vsdx

ANSI09000170 V5 EN-US

Figure 51: CT connections for restricted earth fault protection

124 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

Pos Description
1 Scheme grounding point

Ensure that only one grounding point exists in this scheme.

2 One-phase plate with stabilizing resistor and metrosil. Protective ground is a separate 4 mm screw
terminal on the plate.
3 Necessary connection for the metrosil.
4 Position of optional test switch for secondary injection into the high impedance differential IED.
5 Necessary connection for stabilizing resistor.
6 How to connect the high impedance restricted earth fault protection scheme to one CT input in IED.

7.1.4 Setting guidelines IP14945-1 v1

M13076-3 v2
The setting calculations are individual for each application. Refer to the different application
descriptions below.

7.1.4.1 Configuration M13076-5 v4

The configuration is done in the Application Configuration tool.

7.1.4.2 Settings of protection function M13076-10 v6

Operation: The operation of the high impedance differential function can be switched Enabled or
Disabled.

AlarmPickup: Set the alarm level. The sensitivity can roughly be calculated as a certain percentage
of the selected Trip level. A typical setting is 10% of TripPickup. This alarm stage can be used for
scheme CT supervision.

tAlarm: Set the time delay for the alarm. A typical setting is 2-3 seconds.

TripPickup: Set the trip level according to the calculations (see examples below for a guidance).
The level is selected with margin to the calculated required voltage to achieve stability. Values can
be within 20V - 400V range dependent on the application.

R series: Set the value of the used stabilizing series resistor. Calculate the value according to the
examples for each application. Adjust the resistor as close as possible to the calculated value.
Measure the value achieved and set this value for this parameter.

The value shall always be high impedance. This means for example, for 1A circuits
say bigger than 400 ohms (400 VA) and for 5 A circuits say bigger than 100 ohms
(2500 VA). This ensures that the current will circulate and not go through the
differential circuit at through faults.

Line differential protection RED670 125

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

That the settings of U>Alarm, U>Trip and SeriesResistor must be chosen such that
both U>Alarm/SeriesResistor and U>Trip/SeriesResistor are >4% of IRated of the
used current input. Normally the settings shall also be such that U>Alarm/
SeriesResistor and U>Trip/SeriesResistor both gives a value <4*IRated of the used
current input. If not, the limitation in how long time the actual current is allowed to
persist not to overload the current input must be considered especially during the
secondary testing.

7.1.4.3 T-feeder protection M16850-4 v7

In many busbar arrangements such as breaker-and-a-half, ring breaker, mesh corner, there will be
a T-feeder from the current transformer at the breakers up to the current transformers in the
feeder circuit (for example, in the transformer bushings). It is often required to separate the
protection zones that the feeder is protected with one scheme while the T-zone is protected with
a separate differential protection scheme. The 1Ph high impedance differential HZPDIF (87)
function in the IED allows this to be done efficiently, see Figure 52.

87

en05000165_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000165 V1 EN-US

Figure 52: The protection scheme utilizing the high impedance function for the T-feeder
Normally this scheme is set to achieve a sensitivity of around 20 percent of the used CT primary
rating so that a low ohmic value can be used for the series resistor.

126 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever high

impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT capability,
minimize the secondary fault current, thereby reducing the stability voltage limit.
Another factor is that during internal faults, the voltage developed across the
selected tap is limited by the non-linear resistor but in the unused taps, owing to
auto-transformer action, voltages induced may be much higher than design limits.

Setting example
Basic data:
Current transformer ratio: 2000/5A
CT Class: C800 (At max tap of 2000/5A)
Secondary resistance: 0.5 Ohm (2000/5A tap)
Cable loop resistance: 2

Max fault current: Equal to switchgear rated fault current 40 kA

Calculation:

40000
VR > × ( 0.5 + 0.4 ) = 90V
400
EQUATION1751-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 15)

Select a setting of TripPickup=100 V.

The current transformer saturation voltage must be at least twice the set operating voltage
TripPickup.

VkneeANSI > (0.5 + 8) × 100 * 0.7 = 595V

EQUATION1752-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 16)

that is, bigger than 2 ˣTripPickup

Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor value to use.
As this application requires to be so sensitive select R Series= 500 ohm, which gives an IED
operating current of 200 mA.

Calculate the primary sensitivity at operating voltage using the following equation.

2000
IP = ( 200 0° + 3 × 50 -60° ) ×10-3 £ approx.100 A
5
EQUATION1887-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 17)

where
100 mA is the current drawn by the IED circuit and
10 mA is the current drawn by each CT just at pickup
20 mA is current drawn by metrosil at pickup

Line differential protection RED670 127

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing curve for the current transformer cores
which should be available. The current value at TripPickup is taken.

It can clearly be seen that the sensitivity is not so much influenced by the selected voltage level so
a sufficient margin should be used. The selection of the stabilizing resistor and the level of the
magnetizing current (mostly dependent of the number of turns) are the most important factors.

7.1.4.4 Tertiary reactor protection M16850-118 v5

Reactive power equipment (for example shunt reactors and/or shunt capacitors) can be
connected to the tertiary winding of the power transformers. The 1Ph High impedance differential
protection function HZPDIF (87) can be used to protect the tertiary reactor for phase faults as well
as ground faults if the power system of the tertiary winding is direct or low impedance grounded.

3·87

ANSI05000176-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000176 V2 EN-US

Figure 53: Application of the1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87) function on a reactor

128 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

Setting example

It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever high

impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT capability,
minimize the secondary fault, thereby reducing the stability voltage limit. Another
factor is that during internal faults, the voltage developed across the selected tap
is limited by the non-linear resistor but in the unused taps, owing to auto-
transformer action, voltages much higher than design limits might be induced.

Basic data:
Current transformer ratio: 100/5 A (Note: Must be the same at all locations)
CT Class: C200
Secondary resistance: 0.1 Ohms (At 100/5 Tap)
Cable loop resistance: <100 ft AWG10 (one way between the junction point and the
farthest CT) to be limited to approximately 0.1 Ohms at 75deg C
Note! Only one way as the tertiary power system grounding is
limiting the ground-fault current. If high ground-fault current exists
use two way cable length.
Max fault current: The maximum through fault current is limited by the reactor
reactance and the inrush will be the worst for a reactor for example,
800 A.

Calculation:

800
VR > × (0.1 + 0.1) = 8
20
EQUATION1768-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 18)

Select a setting of TripPickup=30 V.

The current transformer knee point voltage must be at least, twice the set operating voltage
TripPickup.

VkneeANSI > ( 2 + 0.1) × 100 × 0.7 = 147 V

EQUATION1779-ANSI V2 EN-US (Equation 19)

that is, greater than 2 ˣ TripPickup.

Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor value to use.
Since this application requires good sensitivity, select R Series = 100 ohm, which gives an IED
current of 200 mA.

To calculate the sensitivity at operating voltage, refer to equation 20, which gives an acceptable
value, ignoring the current drawn by the non-linear resistor. A little lower sensitivity could be
selected by using a lower resistance value.

Line differential protection RED670 129

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

100
IP = × (200 + 2 × 30) £ approx.5.2 A
5
EQUATION1769-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 20)

Where 200mA is the current drawn by the IED circuit and 50mA is the current drawn by each CT
just at pickup. The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing curve of the current
transformer cores, which should be available. The current value at TripPickup is taken.

7.1.4.5 Restricted earth fault protection (87N) M16850-156 v10

For solidly grounded systems a restricted earth fault protection REFPDIF (87N) is often provided
as a complement to the normal transformer differential function. The advantage with the
restricted ground fault functions is the high sensitivity for internal earth faults in the transformer
winding. Sensitivities of 2-8% can be achieved whereas the normal differential function will have
sensitivities of 20-40%. The sensitivity for high impedance restricted ground fault function is
mostly dependent on the current transformers magnetizing currents.

The connection of a restricted earth fault function is shown in Figure 54. It is connected across
each directly or low impedance grounded transformer winding.

87N

en05000177_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000177 V1 EN-US

Figure 54: Application of HZPDIF (87) function as a restricted earth fault protection for a
star connected winding of an YNd transformer

130 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

Setting example

It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever high

impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT capability,
minimize the current, thereby reducing the stability voltage limit. Another factor is
that during internal faults, the voltage developed across the selected tap is limited
by the non-linear resistor but in the unused taps, owing to auto-transformer
action, voltages much higher than design limits might be induced.

Basic data:
Transformer rated current on HV winding: 250 A
Current transformer ratio: 600-300/5A A (Note: Must be the same at all
locations)
CT Class: C200
Secondary resistance: 0.66 ohms
Cable loop resistance: <50 ft AWG10 (one way between the junction point
and the farthest CT) to be limited to approx. 0.05
Ohms at 75° C gives loop resistance 2 ˣ 0.05 = 0.1
Ohms
Max fault current: The maximum through fault current is limited by
the transformer reactance, use 15 ˣ rated current of
the transformer

Calculation:

250
VR > 15 × × ( 0.1 + 0.1) = 6.25V
600 / 5
EQUATION1775-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 21)

Select a setting of TripPickup=40 V.

The current transformerknee point voltage can roughly be calculated from the rated values.
Considering knee point voltage to be about 70% of the accuracy limit voltage.

VkneeANSI > (0.1 + 2) × 100 = 210V

EQUATION1770-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 22)

that is, greater than 2 ˣ TripPickup

Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor value to use.
Since this application requires high sensitivity, select R series= 100 ohm which gives a current of
200 mA.

To calculate the sensitivity at operating voltage, refer to equation 23 which is acceptable as it

gives around 10% minimum operating current, ignoring the current drawn by the non-linear
resistor.

Line differential protection RED670 131

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

600
IP = × ( 200 0° + 4 × 20 -60° ) £ approx.5.4 A
5
EQUATION1885-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 23)

Where 200mA is the current drawn by the IED circuit and 50mA is the current drawn by each CT
just at pickup. The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing curve for the current
transformer cores which should be available. The current value at TripPickup is taken.

7.1.4.6 Alarm level operation M16850-196 v6

The 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87) function has a separate alarm level,
which can be used to give alarm for problems with an involved current transformer circuit. The
setting level is normally selected to be around 10% of the operating voltage TripPickup.

As seen in the setting examples above the sensitivity of HZPDIF (87) function is normally high,
which means that the function will in many cases operate also for short circuits or open current
transformer secondary circuits. However the stabilizing resistor can be selected to achieve
sensitivity higher than normal load current and/or separate criteria can be added to the operation,
like a check zone. This can be either another IED, with the same HZPDIF (87) function, or be a check
about the fault condition, which is performed by a ground overcurrent function or neutral point
voltage function.

For such cases where operation is not expected during normal service the alarm output should be
used to activate an external shorting of the differential circuit avoiding continuous high voltage in
the circuit. A time delay of a few seconds is used before the shorting and alarm are activated.
Auxiliary relays with contacts that can withstand high voltage shall be used, like RXMVB types.

The metrosil operating characteristic is given in the following figure.

IEC05000749 V1 EN-US

Figure 55: Current voltage characteristics for the non-linear resistors, in the range 10-200 V, the average
range of current is: 0.01–10 mA

132 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

7.2 Low impedance restricted earth fault protection REFPDIF

(87N) IP14640-1 v6

7.2.1 Identification
M14843-1 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Restricted earth fault protection, low REFPDIF 87N
impedance
IdN/I

SYMBOL-AA V1 EN-US

7.2.2 Application IP14941-1 v1

M13940-3 v12
A breakdown of the insulation between a transformer winding and the core or the tank may result
in a large fault current which causes severe damage to the windings and the transformer core. A
high gas pressure may develop, damaging the transformer tank.

Fast and sensitive detection of ground faults in a power transformer winding can be obtained in
solidly grounded or low impedance grounded networks by the restricted earth fault protection.
The only requirement is that the power transformer winding is connected to ground in the star
point (in case of wye-connected windings) or through a separate grounding transformer (in case
of delta-connected windings).

The low impedance restricted ground fault protection REFPDIF (87N) is a winding protection
function. It protects the power transformer winding against faults involving ground. Observe that
single phase-to-ground faults are the most common fault types in transformers. Therefore, a
sensitive ground fault protection is desirable.

A restricted ground fault protection is the fastest and the most sensitive protection, a power
transformer winding can have and will detect faults such as:

• ground faults in the transformer winding when the network is grounded through an
impedance
• ground faults in the transformer winding in solidly grounded network when the point of the
fault is close to the winding star point.

The restricted ground fault protection is not affected, as a differential protection, with the
following power transformer related phenomena:

• magnetizing inrush currents

• overexcitation magnetizing currents
• load tap changer
• external and internal phase faults which do not involve ground
• symmetrical overload conditions

Due to its features, REFPDIF (87N) is often used as a main protection of the transformer winding
for all faults involving ground.

Line differential protection RED670 133

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

7.2.2.1 Transformer winding, solidly grounded M13048-3 v10

The most common application is on a solidly grounded transformer winding. The connection is
shown in Figure 56.

I3PW1CT1

REFPDIF (87N)

I3P

ANSI05000210_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000210 V3 EN-US

Figure 56: Connection of the low impedance Restricted earth fault function REFPDIF (87N)
for a directly (solidly) grounded transformer winding

7.2.2.2 Transformer winding, grounded through Zig-Zag grounding transformer M13048-8 v11

A common application is for low reactance grounded transformer where the grounding is through
separate Zig-Zag grounding transformers. The fault current is then limited to typical 800 to 2000
A for each transformer. The connection for this application is shown in figure 57.

134 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

ANSI05000211_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000211 V3 EN-US

Figure 57: Connection of the low impedance Restricted earth-fault function REFPDIF for a
zig-zag grounding transformer

7.2.2.3 Autotransformer winding, solidly grounded M13048-13 v9

Autotransformers can be protected with the low impedance restricted ground fault protection
function REFPDIF. The complete transformer will then be protected including the HV side, the
neutral connection and the LV side. The connection of REFPDIF (87N) for this application is shown
in figure 58.

Line differential protection RED670 135

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

I3PW1CT1

REFPDIF (87N)

I3PW2CT1
I3P

ANSI05000212-4-en.vsd
ANSI05000212 V4 EN-US

Figure 58: Connection of restricted ground fault, low impedance function REFPDIF (87N) for
an autotransformer, solidly grounded

7.2.2.4 Reactor winding, solidly grounded M13048-18 v10

Reactors can be protected with restricted ground fault protection, low impedance function
REFPDIF (87N). The connection of REFPDIF (87N) for this application is shown in figure 59.

136 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

ANSI05000213_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000213 V3 EN-US

Figure 59: Connection of restricted earth-fault, low impedance function REFPDIF (87N) for a
solidly grounded reactor

7.2.2.5 Multi-breaker applications M13048-23 v9

Multi-breaker arrangements including ring, one breaker-and-a-half, double breaker and mesh
corner arrangements have two sets of current transformers on the phase side. The restricted
earth-fault protection, low impedance function REFPDIF (87N) has inputs to allow two current
inputs from each side of the transformer. The second winding set is only applicable for
autotransformers.

A typical connection for a star-delta transformer is shown in figure 60.

Line differential protection RED670 137

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

A 52 52

B 52 52

C 52 52

REFPDIF (87N)

I3PW1CT1

I3PW1CT2

I3P

ANSI05000214-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000214 V2 EN-US

Figure 60: Connection of Restricted earth fault, low impedance function REFPDIF (87N) in
multi-breaker arrangements

7.2.2.6 CT grounding direction M13048-29 v13

To make the restricted earth fault protection REFPDIF (87N) operate correctly, the main CTs are
always supposed to be wye-connected. The main CT's neutral (star) formation can be positioned
in either way, ToObject or FromObject. However, internally REFPDIF (87N) always uses reference
directions towards the protected transformers, as shown in Figure 60. Thus the IED always
measures the primary currents on all sides and in the neutral of the power transformer with the
same reference direction towards the power transformer windings.

The grounding can be freely selected for each of the involved current transformers.

7.2.3 Setting guidelines IP14942-1 v1

7.2.3.1 Setting and configuration M13052-3 v3

Recommendation for analog inputs M13052-8 v10

I3P: Neutral point current ( All analog inputs connected as 3Ph groups in ACT).

I3PW1CT1: Phase currents for winding 1 first current transformer set.

I3PW1CT2: Phase currents for winding1 second current transformer set for multi-breaker
arrangements. When not required configure input to "GRP-OFF".

I3PW2CT1: Phase currents for winding 2 first current transformer set. Used for autotransformers.

138 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

I3PW2CT2: Phase currents for winding 2 second current transformer set for multi-breaker
arrangements. Used when protecting an autotransformer. When not required, configure input to
"GRP-OFF".

Recommendation for Binary input signals M13052-17 v8

Refer to the pre-configured configurations for details.

BLOCK: The input will block the operation of the function. It can be used, for example, to block the
operation during special service conditions for a limited time.

Recommendation for output signals M13052-21 v9

Refer to pre-configured configurations for details.

PICKUP: The pickup output indicates that Idiff is in the operate region of the characteristic.

TRIP: The trip output is activated when all operating criteria are fulfilled.

DIR_INT: The output is activated when the directional criteria has been fulfilled.

BLK2H: The output is activated when the function is blocked due to high level of second harmonic.

7.2.3.2 Settings M13052-28 v13

The parameters for the restricted earth fault protection, low impedance function REFPDIF (87N)
are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (VBase) and primary power
(SBase) are set in a Global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

Operation: The operation of REFPDIF (87N) can be switched Enabled/Disabled.

IdMin: The setting gives the minimum operation value. The setting is in percent of the IBase value
of the chosen GlobalBaseSel. For function operation, the neutral current must be larger than half
of this value. A recommended setting is 30% of power transformer-winding rated current for a
solidly grounded winding.

ROA: Relay operate angle for zero sequence directional feature. It is used to differentiate an
internal fault and an external fault based on measured zero sequence current and neutral current.

CTFactorPri1: A factor to allow a sensitive function also at multi-breaker arrangement where the
rating in the bay is much higher than the rated current of the transformer winding. The stabilizing
can then be high so an unnecessary high fault level can be required. The setting is normally 1.0 but
in multi-breaker arrangement the setting shall be CT primary rating/IBase.

CTFactorPri2: A factor to allow a sensitive function also at multi-breaker arrangement where the
rating in the bay is much higher than the rated current of the transformer winding. The stabilizing
can then be high so an unnecessary high fault level can be required. The setting is normally 1.0 but
in multi-breaker arrangement the setting shall be CT primary rating/IBase.

CTFactorSec1: See setting CTFactorPri1. Only difference is that CTFactorSec1 is related to W2 side.

CTFactorSec2: See setting CTFactorPri2. Only difference is that CTFactorSec2 is related to W2

side.

Line differential protection RED670 139

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

7.3 High speed line differential protection for 4 CT sets, 2-3

line ends L4CPDIF

7.3.1 Identification
GUID-690568A1-7B01-4FB6-B82E-7A50A886DE9D v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number

High speed line differential

protection for 4 CT sets, 2-3 line L4CPDIF 3Id/I> 87L
ends

SYMBOL-HH V1 EN-US

7.3.2 Application IP14947-1 v1

GUID-B6473BCC-CD39-4471-9092-18836321A33F v2
High speed line differential protection for 4 CT sets, 2-3 line ends (L4CPDIF) is a unit-type
protection system. These types of systems are suitable for the protection of complex
transmission network configurations because they exhibit good performance during evolving,
inter-circuit, and cross-country faults. They are also highly immune to power swings, mutual
coupling and series impedance unbalances.

7.3.2.1 Charging current compensation GUID-DA14E51D-1C05-4608-BC60-97EED67ABE8C v2

Magnitude of the charging current is proportional to the capacitance and time derivative of
voltage. With ground cables and long overhead lines, the magnitude can be such that it affects the
possibility to achieve the wanted sensitivity of differential protection. To overcome this, two
charging current compensation methods, exact and approximate, are available in L4CPDIF.

7.3.2.2 Charging current calculation using the exact method GUID-125A1DA8-C8DE-489B-8932-1E7697CFD013 v2

Charging current in a transmission line or cable is proportional to the capacitance and time
derivative of voltage.

Charging currents in phase A are calculated as:

d (vA  0) d (vA  vB ) d (vA  vC )

icA  Cn   Cp   Cp 
dt dt dt
dvA dvA dvB dvA dvC
icA  Cn   Cp   Cp   Cp   Cp 
dt dt dt dt dt
dvA dvB dvC
icA  (Cn  2Cp )   Cp   Cp 
dt dt dt

ANSIEQUATION15158 V1 EN-US (Equation 24)

140 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

In real power systems, zero and positive sequence capacitances C0 and C1 are usually known
instead of Cn and Cp.

Zero sequence capacitance is calculated as:

C 0  Cn

IECEQUATION15160 V1 EN-US (Equation 25)

Positive sequence capacitance is calculated as:

C1  3  Cp  Cn

IECEQUATION15159 V1 EN-US (Equation 26)

Using the above equations, Cn and Cp can be expressed in terms of C0 and C1:

Cn  C 0
C1  C 0
Cp 
3

IECEQUATION15161 V1 EN-US (Equation 27)

When studying all three phases, charging currents can be expressed as:

 dvA 
 
 icA   (2C1  C 0) / 3 (C 0  C1) / 3 (C 0  C1) / 3   dt 
     dvB 
 icB    (C 0  C1) / 3 (2C1  C 0) / 3 (C 0  C1) / 3    dt 
 icC   (C 0  C1) / 3 (C 0  C1) / 3 (2C1  C 0) / 3  
    dvC 
 
 dt 

ANSIEQUATION15162 V1 EN-US (Equation 28)

Charging currents are then subtracted from the differential currents:

Line differential protection RED670 141

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

IdiffcompA  IdiffA  IcA

IdiffcompB  IdiffB  IcB
IdiffcompC  IdiffC  IcC

ANSIEQUATION15163 V1 EN-US (Equation 29)

where:
IdiffcompX denotes compensated differential currents (as phasors) to be used in the differential algorithm

To perform charging current compensation using the exact method, setting CCCOpMode should
be set to U based, and no block signals should exist from local or remote ends. The operation
principle is shown in Figure 61.

IEC15000475-1-en.vsd

IEC15000475 V1 EN-US

Figure 61: Operation principle for charging current compensation

Block signals coming from local can indicate fuse failure, breaker open or shunt reactor connected
conditions. If a block signal from local exists or if CCCOpMode = Disable, CCCBlockToRemote will
be set to 1 and sent out to other IEDs in the protected zone. In that case, all IEDs will stop the
charging current compensation function.

Figure 62 shows an example of block signals from and to the charging current compensation
function between two IEDs.

142 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

IEC15000476-1-en.vsd
IEC15000476 V1 EN-US

Figure 62: An example of block signals from/to charging current compensation between
two IEDs

If a shunt reactor is installed in a protected circuit, the charging current compensation function is
disabled or blocked.

7.3.2.3 Charging current calculation using the approximate method GUID-E01B2F36-8D7B-4763-8857-1CB063B9D44F v2

The approximate method does not calculate the exact charging currents in separate phases.
Instead, it assumes that small permanent differential currents represent the resultant total
charging currents in each phase. These charging currents are subtracted from differential currents
in a phase-wise way, which results in differential currents being close to zero.

When an internal fault occurs, values of the pre-fault differential currents are not updated. The
update is only resumed 80 ms after normal condition (no start signals) has been restored. If an
open CT condition is detected, charging current compensation is stopped immediately, and
charging currents are temporarily memorized by L4CPDIF. When the open CT condition resets, the
compensation process is resumed.

Freezing the pre-fault values during fault conditions in this manner introduces a small error in the
resulting calculated differential current. However, this does not have any negative consequences
since the positive effect of maintaining high sensitivity even with high charging currents is
achieved. To demonstrate this, two cases are presented: one with a low-resistance and one with a
high-resistance internal short circuit.

Case 1: charging current with low-resistance internal short circuit

Charging current is generated because a voltage is applied over the line capacitance. If an internal
short circuit with small fault resistance occurs, voltage at the fault location is approximately zero.

Line differential protection RED670 143

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

Consequently, zero voltage will also be applied over part of the line capacitance which, in turn,
decreases the charging current compared to the pre-fault value. When a fault is detected, the value
of the false pre-fault differential current is frozen, and the value of the subtracted charging current
will therefore be higher than the actual charging current. However, with a low-resistance fault, the
differential current will be high, and any error in the charging current approximation will not be
significant.

Case 2: charging current with high-resistance internal short circuit

With a high-resistance fault, voltage reduction at the fault location is small. Consequently, the
value of the false pre-fault differential current provides a good estimation of the actual charging
current. This method can be advantageous in cases where voltages at all ends are not available or
where shunt reactors are switched on and off on a daily basis without available information on
their status to L4CPDIF.

7.3.2.4 Open CT detection GUID-1743988D-DF06-4EF1-B6F5-A6F32664CD11 v2

L4CPDIF has a built-in, advanced open CT detection feature. This feature can block the unwanted
operation of L4CPDIF in case of an open CT circuit under normal load conditions. L4CPDIF
generates a trip signal if the false differential current is sufficiently high. An open CT circuit is
typically detected in 12–14 ms, and if the load in the protected circuit is relatively high (close to
nominal load), it is not always possible to prevent the unwanted trip. However, it is still vital to
receive information on what caused the open CT condition.

Settings for open CT detection:

• OpenCTEnable: enables/disables the open CT detection feature

• OCTBlockEn: enables/disables the blocking of L4CPDIF
• tOCTResetDelay: defines the time delay after which open CT condition resets once the
defective CT circuit has been repaired

When an open CT circuit is detected and OCTBlockEnable = Enable, all differential functions,
except for the unrestrained (instantaneous) differential function, are blocked. If OCTBlockEn =
Disable, open CT detection does not block the differential functions but issues an alarm signal to
indicate that an open CT condition occurs

Outputs for open CT detection:

• OPENCT: provides instant information to indicate that an open CT circuit has been detected
• OPENCTIN: provides information on local HMI about which open CT circuit has been detected
(1 = CT input No 1, 2 = CT input No 2, and so on)
• OPENCTPH: provides information on local HMI about the phase in which an open CT circuit
has been detected (1 = Phase A, 2 = Phase B, 3 = Phase C)

7.3.2.5 Loss of data synchronism detection GUID-85DC849B-86A9-4E2B-8A85-ACD611E36D60 v2

L4CPDIF has a build-in feature to detect the loss of data synchronism condition and, as a result,
block the L4CPDIF function. The principle of this feature is based on all three-phase differential
currents having almost the same amplitudes when loss of data synchronism occurs between IEDs.

Loss of data synchronism detection can be enabled/disabled using setting LossSynEn (Enable/
Disable). If enabled, the feature tries to prevent mal-operation when loss of data synchronism
occurs. L4CPDIF is blocked as soon as loss of data synchronism condition is detected.

144 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

When loss of data synchronism is detected, output SYNLOSS is set to TRUE and L4CPDIF is
blocked. If SYNLOSS is set for more than 120 ms, a settable reset delay tLossSynReset is added
when the function output is reset. If SYNLOSS is set for more than 5 s, it will be latched.

7.3.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD54832-1 v3

7.3.3.1 General settings M12541-93 v3

NoOfUsedCTs GUID-4DDD239C-938D-4433-A0FF-B5C0A01189CD v1
NoOfUsedCTs indicates the number of three-phase CT groups included in the protected zone. One
IED can process one or two local CTs in the protected zone. This applies, for example, with 1½
breaker configurations in a line bay where each of the two CT groups will be represented as one
separate CT. A protected line with 1½ breaker configurations at each line end must consequently
have setting NoOfUsedCTs = 4.

IEC09000973-2-en.vsd
IEC09000973 V2 EN-US

Figure 63: An example where setting NoOfUsedCTs = 4 in 1½ breaker configurations

TapTransformer GUID-8D099C81-5EF5-4384-B47E-C6A80A34A03C v2
TapTransformer must be set to Enable if a tap transformer (without its currents being measured)
is included in the protected zone. If TapTransformer = Enable, harmonic blocking is checked
whenever the bias current is less than a relatively low value of 1.25 x IBase (IBase reflects the
nominal current of a power line). The default value for TapTransformer is Disable.

DiffMode GUID-1DEA3BA3-9B25-40C5-BC64-2CD17A5B6468 v1
DiffMode can be set to Master or Slave. In Slave mode, an IED only sends analog information to the
master and waits for the trip signal from it. This mode is normally used in three or more terminal
lines that do not have enough communication links.

7.3.3.2 Percentage restrained differential operation settings GUID-1FAED18D-1094-4EF0-A40A-AB3D6A976A08 v1

L4CPDIF is phase-segregated meaning that the operate current is the vector sum of all measured
currents separately for each phase. However, the restrain current is considered the greatest
current in this phase, and it is determined by five settings:

• IdMin
• EndSection1
• EndSection2
• SlopeSection2
• SlopeSection3

IdMin GUID-2C8F998F-DC5F-47A8-845C-1C2360503EF4 v2
IdMin is a multiple of IBase. It must take into account the fundamental frequency charging current,
and the existence of a possible tap transformer in the protected zone.

Line differential protection RED670 145

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

The positive sequence line charging current is calculated from equation:

V V
ICharge  
3  XC1 3
1
2 f  C1

ANSIEQUATION15164 V1 EN-US (Equation 30)

where:
V is system voltage
XC1 is capacitive positive sequence reactance of the line
f is system frequency
C1 is positive sequence line capacitance

If charging current compensation is enabled, IdMin must be set to ≥ 1.2 × ICharge with some
margin included. If charging current compensation is disabled, IdMin must be set to ≥ 2.5 ×
ICharge. In many cases, the charging current is quite small so the lower limit of the setting range
(20% of IBase) can be considered the practical sensitivity limit.

If a tap transformer is included in the protected zone, IdMin takes into account its charging and
load currents.

IdMinHigh GUID-E4ECD6B4-05BD-418A-AC9E-0FAB07962125 v1
IdMinHigh is a multiple of IBase. It is used to temporarily decrease sensitivity in situations where a
line is energized.

Energizing a line can cause transient charging currents to appear. These currents are pure
differential currents, but since they are rich in harmonics, they can be partly measured by L4CPDIF
(through measuring Fourier filtered differential currents). Desensitizing L4CPDIF using IdMinHigh
instead of IdMin in this case, is a safety precaution. Setting IdMinHigh to 1.00 × IBase should be
suitable in most cases.

tIdMinHigh GUID-C2D1214C-BDDF-4A3E-8217-9E2D4CFF530D v1
tIdMinHigh defines the time that setting IdMinHigh remains active after a previously disconnected
protected circuit has been reconnected to a power source. A setting value of 1 s is sufficient.

IdUnre GUID-2CB5AB45-AF7D-4E99-9725-12977BAFEE95 v1
IdUnre is set as multiple of IBase. Differential current values above the unrestrained limit generate
a trip irrespective of the internal fault detector or any presence of harmonics. This limit is intended
to generate fast tripping in the case of internal faults with high fault currents. The recommended
setting is 120% of the highest through fault current that can appear on a protected line. Thus, to
set this value properly, the fault current must be calculated in each specific case.

In a short line or with a 1½ breaker bay, the through fault current can be practically the same as
the differential current with internal faults. Extreme unequal CT saturation in case of external
faults could thus present a risk for unwanted operation if unrestrained operation is used. In such
cases, it is recommended not to use the unrestrained operation by setting IdUnre to its maximum
value.

146 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

In long lines, the through fault current is often considerably less than the maximum differential
current with internal faults. In that case, it is easy to calculate a suitable value for IdUnre.

EndSection1 GUID-FB7D1CB7-5B56-47A2-938E-0A177B4F2F1D v1
EndSection1 is set as multiple of IBase. The default value is 1.00. If the conditions are known in
more detail, other values can be chosen to increase or decrease the sensitivity.

EndSection2 GUID-66D7FF78-BCA2-4C63-9215-8D45615DB40B v1
EndSection2 is set as multiple of IBase. The default value is 3.00. If the conditions are known in
more detail, other values can be chosen to increase or decrease the sensitivity.

SlopeSection2 GUID-C4DBD825-FAD4-4659-8FF2-FC8070A1196B v1
SlopeSection2 is set as percentage: [delta operate current/delta restrain current] × 100 percent.
The default value is 50.0. If the conditions are known in more detail, other values can be chosen to
increase or decrease the sensitivity.

SlopeSection3 GUID-99496B23-5FBA-4976-85AE-68A0EE11D577 v1
SlopeSection3 is set as percentage: [delta operate current/delta restrain current] × 100 percent.
The default value is 100.0. If the conditions are known in more detail, other values can be chosen to
increase or decrease the sensitivity.

7.3.3.3 2nd and 5th harmonic settings GUID-6B8A460F-4115-451C-B521-14C9680566B5 v2

The 2nd and the 5th harmonic block scheme is active under the following conditions:

• TapTransformer = Enable and the bias current is lower than 1.25 x IBase.
• No internal fault or switch-on-to-fault condition is detected.

When harmonic content is above the set level, restrained differential operation is blocked.
However, if a fault is classified as internal, harmonic restrain gets overridden.

I2/I1Ratio GUID-CC7A3242-8765-4CF6-ACAF-05ABA72DC432 v1

I2/I1Ratio defines the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component and fundamental frequency
component in differential current. To obtain this information, it is necessary to analyze the
differential current.

CT saturation causes a considerable increase in the 2nd harmonics on the CT secondary side, which
helps to stabilize the relay in through fault conditions. It is strongly recommended to maintain a
sensitive setting for the I2/I1Ratio. The default value of 10% is reliable enough to detect CT
saturation and tap transformer inrush currents.

I5/I1Ratio GUID-4BBAB771-ECE1-4E50-9B5E-170F334A34B6 v2

I5/I1Ratio defines the ratio of the 5th harmonic component and fundamental frequency
component in differential current. To obtain this information, it is necessary to analyze the
differential current.

The excitation current has a high degree of the 5th harmonics, so the default value of 10% for I5/
I1Ratio is, in most cases, suitable to detect the phenomenon.

Since CT saturation causes 5th harmonic on the secondary side, it is recommended to maintain the
setting at 10% even when no tap transformer is included in the protected zone.

Line differential protection RED670 147

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

7.3.3.4 Charging current compensation settings

CCCOpMode GUID-63BC295C-0848-4E5D-89C5-4C500830BC99 v1
CCCOpMode defines the operation mode for charging current compensation, and can be set as
follows:

• CCCOpMode = Disable: no charging current compensation performed

• CCCOpMode = U based: charging current compensation performed using the exact method
based on voltage
• CCCOpMode = Idiff reduction: charging current compensation performed using the
approximate method based on subtraction of small differential currents in steady state

Exact method GUID-00DB014F-9FB0-44C8-99E8-5BF62826F9EA v2

The total charging current is contributed by all input channels. The capacitance used to calculate
the contribution from each input group is obtained from Equation 31:

C0
C 0 _ GrpX 
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrpX
C1
C1_ GrpX 
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrpX

IECEQUATION15165 V2 EN-US (Equation 31)

where:
C0 is the total zero sequence capacitance of the protected circuit
C1 is the total positive sequence capacitance of the protected circuit
NoOfLineEnds is the total number of actual physical line ends in the protected zone
NoOfCTSetsGrpX is the number of three-phase CT sets at the line end with their currents connected to the input
group X (maximum 2)

VTOnLineGrpX indicates if a voltage transformer is installed to a line end that has a current group
connected to it. If a voltage transformer is installed on the line, the value is set to YES, and
compensation is performed continuosly depending on voltage on the line. Otherwise the value is
set to NO. In that case compensation is performed only when CB is closed and the line is
energized.

7.3.4 Setting examples

7.3.4.1 Setting example with a two-end power line GUID-4C105C98-F9FE-41B3-A7E0-FC5430EC141A v2

In this example, a two-end 220 kV and 200 km power line is protected using L4CPDIF.

148 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

The protected zone is determined by CT positions. One three-phase CT group is placed at one end
of the power line, and another three-phase CT group is placed at the other end. Everything that is
placed between these two CT groups (including CBs) are included in the protected zone.

To apply the exact (voltage-based) method of charging current compensation, the power line's
positive and zero-sequence capacitances must be known. If not known, the approximate method
can be applied instead.

Table 18 shows the power system parameters in this example.

Table 18: Power system parameters

Power line data Value Remark
Number of three-phase CT 2 A two-end power line with one three-phase CT group installed at each
groups end.
(each group represents an
independent source of Setting NoOfUsedCTs is used to indicate to L4CPDIF how many current
information about the current) input channels (2, 3 or 4) with current samples are to be read and
processed.
Source impedance at both ends 4.84 Ω -
Power line length 200 km -
Rated voltage 220 kV -
Line impedance ZL ≈ XL 58.64 Ω -
Total zero sequence line 7.751e-9 x 200 7.751e-9 F per 1 km of line
capacitance, C0
Total positive sequence line 12.74e-9 x 200 12.74e-9 F per 1 km of line
capacitance, C1
Charging current 92 A Measured at rated voltage as the differential current under normal load.
(measured without charging
current compensation)
Rated current 1000 A

Table 19 shows the relevant settings in this example.

Table 19: Relevant settings

Setting Value Remark
IdMin 0.20 20 % of IBase = 1000 A

Must be set above the maximum possible charging current (in this
example set to approximately 2 x of that value).
EndSection1 1.00 100 % of IBase = 1000 A
EndSection2 3.00 300 % of IBase = 1000 A
SlopeSection2 0.50 Slope = 50 %
SlopeSection3 1.00 Slope = 100 %
IdMinHigh 1.00 100 % of IBase = 1000 A
tIdMinHigh 1000 Interval of initial decreased sensitivity in ms.
Table continues on next page

Line differential protection RED670 149

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

Setting Value Remark

IdUnre 3.00 300 % of IBase = 1000 A

Maximum through fault current calculated based on:

220
IThrough   2.45kA
3  (4.84  58.64)

IECEQUATION15178 V1 EN-US

1.2  IThrough 1.2  2.45kA

IdUnre    2.94kA
IBase 1kA

IECEQUATION15179 V1 EN-US

I2/I1Ratio 0.10 Ratio = 10 %

The value can be set this low because the 2nd harmonic block is ignored
if an internal fault is detected.
I5/I1Ratio 0.10 Ratio = 10 %

The value can be set this low because the 5th harmonic block is ignored
if an internal fault is detected and no tap transformer exists in the
protected zone.
CCCOpMode 1 The exact method with currents and voltages is used. Line capacitances
must be specified.
VTOnLineGrp1 0 VT is placed on the bus.
VTOnLineGrp2 0 VT is placed on the bus.
C0 7.751e-9 x 200 Total zero sequence capacitance of 220kV on a 200 km power line.
C1 12.74e-9 x 200 Total positive sequence capacitance of 220kV on a 200 km power line.
NoOfLineEnds 2 Number of physical line ends in the protected zone (setting used by
charging current compensation).
NoOfCTSetsGrp1 1 Number of three-phase CT groups at first line end, the currents of
which are connected to input group 1 (setting used by charging current
compensation).
NoOfCTSetsGrp2 1 Number of three-phase CT groups at second line end, the currents of
which are connected to input group 2 (setting used by charging current
compensation).
IBase 1000 Nominal current of the protected power line.
NoOfUsedCTs 2 Total number of CT groups in the protected zone.
TapTransformer 0 Tap transformer not included in the protected zone (and its current
therefore not directly measured).
DiffMode Master Differential function activated.

Figure 64 shows the sequence of events after an internal fault. In this example, the fault occurred
at t = 400 ms in the middle of the power line. The operate time in the example below is obtained
from the software algorithm only without considering the delays due to the hardware and
communication.

Figure 64: Sequence of events after an internal fault at t = 400 ms

150 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT IN PHASE A (AMPERES)

Pre-fault instantaneous current

is equal to the charging current

Internal fault

DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT AND VALUE REQUIRED FOR START (AMPERES)

Fundamental frequency differential current

Value required for trip

BIAS CURRENT IN PHASE A (AMPERES)

Internal fault

ANGLE BETWEEN INCREMENTAL CURRENTS IN PHASE A (RADIANS) AND INTERNAL FAULT SIGNAL

Angle between incremental currents = 90°

Internal fault declared in 5 ms

Angle under internal fault = approx. 0°

TRIP COMMAND IN PHASE A

Trip command in 6 ms

Time in seconds
ANSI15000477-1-en.vsdx

Before the internal fault occurs, instantaneous differential current is composed only of the power
line capacitive charging current (approximately 92 A). This current is not visible in the fundamental
frequency differential current because it is removed by the exact method of charging current
compensation.

The fundamental frequency differential current becomes greater than the value required to trip.
This happens 4 ms after fault occurrence (a start signal is issued but the respective Boolean
output is not shown here). The value required to trip (dependent variable) is a function of the
chosen operate-restrain characteristic and magnitude, and of the bias current (independent
variable).

The relative angle between incremental currents at both ends of the protected line falls from the
initial 90 degrees to close to 0 degrees (1.145 degrees) 4 ms after the fault occurrence. This angle
is not available as an output signal.

Internal fault is declared in 5 ms, and the harmonic block that could delay the trip is deactivated.
L4CPDIF initiates an internal trip decision in 6 ms by which time the start signal has been
confirmed 3 times in succession as a special security measure. The trip command will be issued by
the IED after the trip decision is made with the added delay time form the hardware and
communication.

Line differential protection RED670 151

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

Figure 65 shows charging current compensation when the exact method is used (CCCOpMode = U
based). The charging current is subtracted from all three phases.

TOTAL COMPENSATED CURRENT IN PHASE A

CCC starts 92 A subtracted from the fundamental
after 100 ms frequency differential current fault
37 A subtracted under
fault conditions

TOTAL COMPENSATED CURRENT IN PHASE B

92 A subtracted fault
37 A subtracted

TOTAL COMPENSATED CURRENT IN PHASE C

92 A subtracted fault
37 A subtracted

Time in seconds
ANSI15000466-1-en.vsdx

ANSI15000466 V1 EN-US

Figure 65: Charging current compensation using the exact method

Charging current compensation starts 100 ms after simulation start when the power line was
switched on to normal load. Under normal load conditions, approximately 92 A is subtracted,
which results in all fundamental frequency differential currents being close to zero. Under fault
conditions with very low voltage at the fault and decreased voltages at both ends, the charging
current is smaller, and only 37 A is subtracted from the differential currents.

Figure 66 shows charging current compensation when the approximate method is used
(CCCOpMode = IDiff reduction). The charging current is subtracted from all three phases.

TOTAL COMPENSATED CURRENT IN PHASE A

CCC compensated 92 A subtracted from the fundamental 92 A subtracted under fault
in app. 100 ms frequency differential current fault conditions

TOTAL COMPENSATED CURRENT IN PHASE B

92 A subtracted fault 92 A subtracted

TOTAL COMPENSATED CURRENT IN PHASE C

92 A subtracted fault 92 A subtracted

Time in seconds
ANSI15000467-1-en.vsdx

ANSI15000467 V1 EN-US

Figure 66: Charging current compensation using the approximate method

Charging current compensation is achieved 100 ms after simulation start when the power line was
switched on to normal load. Under normal load conditions, approximately 92 A is subtracted,

152 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

which results in all fundamental frequency differential currents being close to zero. Since voltage
profiles are not known, the approximate method continues, even under fault conditions, to
subtract the pre-fault charging current of 92 A.

With low resistance faults, the 55 A difference of the approximate method in comparison to the
exact method, is relatively small when considering high fault currents. With high-resistance faults,
the charging current will not change much so it is acceptable to continue subtracting it.

7.3.4.2 Setting examples for charging current compensation using the exact
method

Setting example 1: two-end power line with one CT group at both ends GUID-AAF0EF81-4581-47AC-91FA-621A167E79BA v2

IEC15000478-1-en.vsd
IEC15000478 V1 EN-US

Figure 67: Protection scheme for a two-end power line with one CT group at both ends

Charging current compensation settings used in this example:

• NoOfLineEnds: number of physical line ends in the protected zone

• NoOfCTSetsGrp1: number of three-phase CT groups at the line end with their currents
connected to input group 1
• NoOfCTSetsGrp2: number of three-phase CT groups at the line end with their currents
connected to input group 2

Charging current compensation settings for IEDs at End1 and End2

Currents are measured at both ends of the power line. Currents from CT1 at End1 are connected to
input group 1 and currents from CT2 at End2 are connected to input group 2. Settings are defined
as:

• NoOfLineEnds = 2
• NoOfCTSetsGrp1 = 1
• NoOfCTSetsGrp2 = 1

Zero and positive sequence capacitances are used to compensate for the charging currents
contributed by separate ends. These are calculated as:

Line differential protection RED670 153

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp1   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp1 2 1 2
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp1   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp1 2 1 2

IECEQUATION15166 V2 EN-US (Equation 32)

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp 2   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp 2 2 1 2
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp 2   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp 2 2 1 2

IECEQUATION15167 V2 EN-US (Equation 33)

Setting example 2: two-end power line with two CT groups at one end and one CT group at
the other end GUID-60B52DE8-3316-46E9-9308-2A5BF6826C99 v2

IEC15000479-1-en.vsd
IEC15000479 V1 EN-US

Figure 68: Protection scheme for a two-end power line with two CT groups at one end and
one CT group at the other end

Charging current compensation settings used in this example:

• NoOfLineEnds: number of physical line ends in the protected zone

• NoOfCTSetsGrp1: number of three-phase CT groups at the line end with their currents
connected to input group 1
• NoOfCTSetsGrp2: number of three-phase CT groups at the line end with their currents
connected to input group 2
• NoOfCTSetsGrp3: number of three-phase CT groups at the line end with their currents
connected to input group 3

Charging current compensation settings for the IED at End1

154 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

Information on currents from all three CT groups is received at End1. Currents from CT1 and CT2 at
End1 are connected to input group 1 and group 2, respectively. Currents from CT3 at End2 are
connected to input group 3. Settings are defined as:

• NoOfLineEnds = 2
• NoOfCTSetsGrp1 = 2
• NoOfCTSetsGrp2 = 2
• NoOfCTSetsGrp3 = 1

Zero and positive sequence capacitances are used to compensate for the charging currents
contributed by separate ends. These are calculated as:

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp1   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp1 2  2 4
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp1   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp1 2  2 4

IECEQUATION15168 V2 EN-US (Equation 34)

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp 2   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp 2 2  2 4
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp 2   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp 2 2  2 4

IECEQUATION15169 V2 EN-US (Equation 35)

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp3   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp3 2 1 2
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp3   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp3 2 1 2

IECEQUATION15170 V2 EN-US (Equation 36)

Charging current compensation settings for the IED at End2

Information on currents from all three CT groups is received at End2. Currents from CT3 at End2
are connected to input group 1. Currents from CT1 and CT2 at End1 are connected to input group 2
and group 3, respectively. Settings are defined as:

Line differential protection RED670 155

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

• NoOfLineEnds = 2
• NoOfCTSetsGrp1 = 1
• NoOfCTSetsGrp2 = 2
• NoOfCTSetsGrp3 = 2

Zero and positive sequence capacitances are used to compensate for the charging currents
contributed by separate ends. These are calculated as:

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp1   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp1 2 1 2
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp1   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp1 2 1 2

IECEQUATION15166 V2 EN-US (Equation 37)

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp 2   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp 2 2  2 4
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp 2   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp 2 2  2 4

IECEQUATION15169 V2 EN-US (Equation 38)

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp3   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp3 2  2 4
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp3   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp3 2  2 4

IECEQUATION15171 V2 EN-US (Equation 39)

156 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

Setting example 3: three-end power line with two CT groups at one end and one CT group at
the other ends GUID-7C8EE312-B22F-427D-844A-DCA436EA7D90 v2

End 1 End 2

CT1
CT3

CT2

IED IED

End 3
IED

CT4
IEC15000480-1-en.vsd
IEC15000480 V1 EN-US

Figure 69: Protection scheme for a three-end power line with two CT groups at one end and
one CT group at the other ends

Charging current compensation settings used in this example:

• NoOfLineEnds: number of physical line ends in the protected zone

• NoOfCTSetsGrp1: number of three-phase CT groups at the line end with their currents
connected to input group 1
• NoOfCTSetsGrp2: number of three-phase CT groups at the line end with their currents
connected to input group 2
• NoOfCTSetsGrp3: number of three-phase CT groups at the line end with their currents
connected to input group 3
• NoOfCTSetsGrp4: number of three-phase CT groups at the line end with their currents
connected to input group 4

Charging current compensation settings for the IED at End1

Information on currents from all four CT groups is received at End1. Currents from CT1 and CT2 at
End1 are connected to input group 1 and group 2, respectively. Currents from CT3 at End2 are
connected to input group 3. Currents from CT4 at End3 are connected to input group 4. Settings
are defined as:

• NoOfLineEnds = 3
• NoOfCTSetsGrp1 = 2
• NoOfCTSetsGrp2 = 2
• NoOfCTSetsGrp3 = 1
• NoOfCTSetsGrp4 = 1

Zero and positive sequence capacitances are used to compensate for the charging currents
contributed by separate ends. These are calculated as:

Line differential protection RED670 157

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp1   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp1 3  2 6
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp1   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp1 3  2 6

IECEQUATION15172 V2 EN-US (Equation 40)

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp 2   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp 2 3  2 6
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp 2   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp 2 3  2 6

IECEQUATION15173 V2 EN-US (Equation 41)

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp3   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp3 3 1 3
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp3   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp3 3 1 3

IECEQUATION15174 V2 EN-US (Equation 42)

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp 4   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp 4 3 1 3
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp 4   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp 4 3 1 3

IECEQUATION15175 V2 EN-US (Equation 43)

Charging current compensation settings for the IED at End2

Information on currents from all four CT groups is received at End2. Currents from CT3 at End2 are
connected to input group 1. Currents from CT1 and CT2 at End1 are connected to input group 2
and group 3, respectively. Currents from CT4 at End3 are connected to input group 4. Settings are
defined as:

158 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

• NoOfLineEnds = 3
• NoOfCTSetsGrp1 = 1
• NoOfCTSetsGrp2 = 2
• NoOfCTSetsGrp3 = 2
• NoOfCTSetsGrp4 = 1

Zero and positive sequence capacitances are used to compensate for the charging currents
contributed by separate ends. These are calculated as:

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp1   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp1 3 1 3
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp1   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp1 3 1 3

IECEQUATION15176 V2 EN-US (Equation 44)

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp 2   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp 2 3  2 6
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp 2   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp 2 3  2 6

IECEQUATION15173 V2 EN-US (Equation 45)

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp3   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp3 3  2 6
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp3   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp3 3  2 6

IECEQUATION15177 V2 EN-US (Equation 46)

Line differential protection RED670 159

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp 4   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp 4 3 1 3
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp 4   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp 4 3 1 3

IECEQUATION15175 V2 EN-US (Equation 47)

Charging current compensation settings for the IED at End3

Information on currents from all four CT groups is received at End4. Currents from CT4 at End3 are
connected to input group 1. Currents from CT1 and CT2 at End1 are connected to input group 2
and group 3, respectively. Currents from CT3 at End2 are connected to input group 4. Settings are
defined as:

• NoOfLineEnds = 3
• NoOfCTSetsGrp1 = 1
• NoOfCTSetsGrp2 = 2
• NoOfCTSetsGrp3 = 2
• NoOfCTSetsGrp4 = 1

Zero and positive sequence capacitances are used to compensate for the charging currents
contributed by separate ends. These are calculated as:

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp1   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp1 3 1 3
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp1   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp1 3 1 3

IECEQUATION15176 V2 EN-US (Equation 48)

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp 2   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp 2 3  2 6
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp 2   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp 2 3  2 6

IECEQUATION15173 V2 EN-US (Equation 49)

160 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp3   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp3 3  2 6
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp3   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp3 3  2 6

IECEQUATION15177 V2 EN-US (Equation 50)

C0 C0 C0
C 0 _ Grp 4   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp 4 3 1 3
C1 C1 C1
C1_ Grp 4   
NoOfLineEnds  NoOfCTSetsGrp 4 3 1 3

IECEQUATION15175 V2 EN-US (Equation 51)

Line differential protection RED670 161

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

7.4 Line differential protection IP13934-1 v1

7.4.1 Identification
M14844-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number

Line differential protection, 3 CT

sets, 2-3 line ends
L3CPDIF 3Id/I> 87L

SYMBOL-HH V1 EN-US

Line differential protection, 6 CT

sets, 3-5 line ends
L6CPDIF 3Id/I> 87L

SYMBOL-HH V1 EN-US

Line differential protection 3 CT

sets, with in-zone transformers, 2-3 LT3CPDIF 3Id/I> 87LT
line ends

SYMBOL-HH V1 EN-US

Line differential protection 6 CT

sets, with in-zone transformers, 3-5 LT6CPDIF 3Id/I> 87LT
line ends

SYMBOL-HH V1 EN-US

Line differential logic LDLPSCH - 87L

7.4.2 Application IP14947-1 v1

M12022-3 v6
Line differential protection can be applied on overhead lines and cables. It is an absolute selective
unit protection with a number of advantages. Coordination with other protections is normally
simple. All faults on the line, between the line bay CTs, can be cleared instantaneously. The
sensitivity can be made high, which is especially important for the ability to detect high resistive
ground faults. It is not influenced by possible voltage and/or current inversion, associated with
faults in series compensated networks. It is not influenced by fault current reversal at ground
faults on parallel lines. As it is phase-segregated, the identification of faulted phases is inherent,
and thus the application of single- or two-pole trip and auto-reclosing can be made robust and
reliable. Note that if an in-line or shunt power transformer is included in the protected circuit, of
the type Dy or Yd, then the protection cannot be phase-segregated. Single-phase automatic re-
closing will not be possible.

Line differential protection can be applied on multi-terminal lines with maximum five line ends.
Depending on the actual network, reliable fault clearance can often be difficult to achieve with
conventional distance protection schemes in these types of applications.

162 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

It is recommended to use the same firmware version as well as hardware version

for a specific line differential scheme.

With 1½ breaker configurations, normally the line protection is fed from two CTs. Avoiding to add
the currents from the two CTs externally before entering the IED is important as this will enable
possible bias current from both CTs to be considered in the current differential algorithm, and in
that way assuring that the correct restrain will be possible, as shown in figure 70.

Protected zone

IED IED

IED

ANSI05000428-2-en.vsdx

ANSI05000428 V2 EN-US

Figure 70: Line protection with breaker-and-a-half configurations, fed from two CTs

7.4.2.1 Power transformers in the protected zone M12022-47 v6

Line differential protection can also be applied with in-line power transformers in the protected
zone. Such an in-line power transformer can be situated in tap, as shown in Figure 71 or in one end
of a two-terminal line. Observe that the currents of the in-line power transformer are measured by
the IED on the low voltage side. Up to two two-winding transformers, or alternatively one three-
winding transformer can be included.

Protected zone

IED IED

IED

ANSI05000429-2-en.vsdx

ANSI05000429 V2 EN-US

Figure 71: Transformer situated in tap

A current differential protection including power transformers must be compensated for
transformer turns ratio and phase shift/vector group. In the line differential function this

Line differential protection RED670 163

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

compensation is made in the software algorithm, which eliminates the need for auxiliary
interposing current transformers. Necessary parameters, such as transformer rated voltages and
phase shift, must be entered via the Parameter Setting tool or the LHMI.

Another concern with differential protection on power transformers is that a differential

protection may operate unwanted due to external ground faults in cases where the zero-sequence
current can flow only on one side of the power transformer but not on the other side, as in the
case of Yd or Dy phase shift/vector groups. This is the situation when the zero-sequence current
cannot be transformed from one side to the other side of the transformer. To make the
differential protection insensitive to external ground faults in these situations, the zero-sequence
current must be eliminated from the terminal currents so that it does not appear as a differential
current. This was previously achieved by means of intermediate current transformers. The
elimination of zero-sequence current is done numerically and no auxiliary transformers are
necessary. Instead it is necessary to eliminate the zero-sequence current by proper setting of the
parameter ZerSeqCurSubtr. If the power transformer is of the type Dyn, where yn-windings
currents are measured, then the zero-sequence component will be subtracted when these currents
are transformed to the HV-side.

7.4.2.2 Small power transformers in a tap M12022-54 v5

If there is a line tap with a comparatively small power transformer (say 1-20MVA) , line differential
protection can be applied without the need of current measurement from the tap. It works such
that line differential protection function will be time delayed for small differential currents below a
set limit, making coordination with downstream short circuit protection in the tap possible. For
differential currents above that limit, the operation will be instantaneous in the normal way. Under
the condition that the load current in the tap will be negligible, normal line faults, with a fault
current higher than the fault current on the LV side of the transformer, will be cleared
instantaneously.

For faults on the LV side of the transformer the function will be time delayed, with the delay
characteristic selected, thus providing selectivity to the downstream functions, see figure 72. The
scheme will solve the problem with back-up protection for faults on the transformer LV side where
many expensive solutions have been applied such as intertripping or a local HV breaker. In many
such applications the back-up protection has been lacking due to the complexity in cost
implications to arrange it. Refer also to the setting example below.

Protected zone in instantaneous function

IED IED

ANSI05000435-2-en.vsdx

ANSI05000435 V2 EN-US

Figure 72: Line tap with a small power transformer, the currents of which are not measured,
and consequently contribute to a (false) differential current

164 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

7.4.2.3 Charging current compensation M12022-58 v6

There are capacitances between the line phase conductors and between phase conductors and
ground. These capacitances give rise to line charging currents which are seen by the differential
protection as “false” differential currents, as shown in figure 73.

Ic1 Idiff, false = Ic1 + Ic2 Ic2

Communication
IED IED

ANSI05000436-2-en.vsdx

ANSI05000436 V2 EN-US

Figure 73: Charging currents

The magnitude of the charging current is dependent of the line capacitance and the system
voltage. For underground cables and long overhead lines, the magnitude can be such that it
affects the possibility to achieve the wanted sensitivity of the differential protection. To overcome
this, a charging current compensation is available in line differential protection. When enabled,
this algorithm will measure the fundamental frequency differential current under steady state
undisturbed conditions and then subtract it, making the resulting differential current zero (or
close to zero). Note that all small pre-fault differential currents are subtracted, no matter what
their origin. This action is made separately for each phase.

When a disturbance occurs, values of the pre-fault differential currents are not updated, and the
updating process is only resumed 100 ms after normal conditions have been restored. Normal
conditions are then considered when there are no pickup signals, neither internal nor external fault
is detected, the power system is symmetrical and so on. If an Open CT condition is detected, the
compensation of charging currents is stopped immediately and the charging currents are
temporarily memorized by the function. When Open CT signal resets, the process of compensation
is resumed with the same charging current as before. The consequence of freezing the pre-fault
values during fault conditions in this way will actually introduce a small error in the resulting
calculated differential current under fault conditions. However, this will not have any practical
negative consequences, while the positive effect of maintaining high sensitivity even with high
charging currents will be achieved. To demonstrate this, two cases can be studied, one with a low
resistive short circuit, and one with a high resistive short circuit.

The charging current is generated because there is a voltage applied over the line capacitance as
seen in figure 73. If an external short circuit with negligible fault resistance occurs close to the line,
the voltage in the fault location will be approximately zero. Consequently, zero voltage will also be
applied over part of the line capacitance, which in turn will decrease the charging current
compared to the pre-fault value. As mentioned above, the value of the pre-fault “false” differential
current will be frozen when a fault is detected, and, as a consequence, the value of the subtracted
charging current will be too high in this case. However, as it is a low resistive fault, the bias current
will be comparatively high, while the charging current and any errors in the approximation of this

Line differential protection RED670 165

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

will be comparatively low. Thus, the overestimated charging current will not jeopardize stability as
can be seen from figure 74, showing the characteristic of line differential protection. In this figure,
the considered fault will appear in the section well in the restrain area.

Operate current
[ in pu of IBase]
Operate
5
unconditionally

UnrestrainedLimit
4

Operate IdMinHigh
3 C
conditionally
A B

2
Section 1 Section 2 Section 3

SlopeSection3
1
IdMin
SlopeSection2 Restrain
0
0 1 2 3 4 5

EndSection1 Restrain current

EndSection2 [ in pu of IBase]

en05000300.vsd
IEC05000300 V1 EN-US

Figure 74: Overestimated charging current

If a high resistive fault is considered, the voltage in the fault location will not be much reduced.
Consequently, the value of the pre-fault “false” differential current will be a good estimation of the
actual charging current.

Subtracting the pre-fault charging current from the differential current under fault conditions will
make it possible to set Idmin mainly without considering the charging current in order to achieve
maximum sensitivity. The stability at external faults will not be affected.

7.4.2.4 Time synchronization M12022-66 v3

Time synchronization of sampled current values is a crucial matter in numerical line differential
protections. The synchronization is made with the so called echo method, which can be
complemented with GPS synchronization. In applications with symmetrical communication delay,
that is, send and receive times are equal, the echo method is sufficient. When used in networks
with asymmetrical transmission times, the optional GPS synchronization is required.

7.4.2.5 Communication channels for line differential protection M12022-69 v7

The line differential protection function uses 64 kbit/s or 2 Mbit/s communication channels to
exchange telegrams between the line differential protection IEDs. These telegrams contain current

166 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

sample values, time information, trip signals, block signals, alarm signals and 8/192 binary signals,
which can be used for any purpose. Each IED can have a maximum of four communication
channels.

On a two terminal line there is a need for one communication channel provided that there is only
one CT at each line end (see Figure 75).

Protected zone

IED IED

ANSI05000437-2-en.vsdx

ANSI05000437 V2 EN-US

Figure 75: Two-terminal line

In case of breaker-and-a-half arrangements or ring buses, a line end has two CTs (see Figure 76).

Protected zone

IED IED

ANSI05000438-2-en.vsdx

ANSI05000438 V2 EN-US

Figure 76: Two-terminal line with breaker-and-a-half

In Figure 76, both local CTs on the left side are treated as separate ends by the line
differential protection function.

Current values from two CTs in double breakers, ring main or breaker-and-a-half system ends with
dual breaker arrangements need to be sent to the remote end. As a 64 kbit/s LDCM only has
capacity for one three-phase current (duplex), this implies that two communication channels are
needed at both ends, and this is also the normal solution.

To reduce the number of communication channels needed, it is also possible to sum up the two
local currents before sending by using a software in the IED. However, this is not recommended as
it reduces information about bias currents. Bias current is considered the greatest phase current
at any line end, and it is common for all three phases. When sending full information from both
local CTs to the remote end, the principle works, but when the two local currents are summed up
before sending, information on real phase currents from the two local CTs will not be available at
the remote line end.

In 64 kbit mode, the decision on using one communication channel instead of two (as show in
Figure 76) must be made case by case. Correct information on bias currents is always available

Line differential protection RED670 167

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

locally while only distorted information is available at the end that receives limited information
using only one LDCM.

In 2 Mbit mode, it is possible to send up to 9 different analog signals from each LDCM; therefore
only one LDCM can be used.

7.4.2.6 Configuration of analog signals M12022-86 v5

Currents from the local end enter the IED as analog values via the Analog input modules. These
currents are converted to digital values and then forwarded to the line differential protection
function in the local IED. From there, they are transmitted to remote IEDs via a Line differential
communication module (LDCM). Currents coming from a remote IED are received as digital values
via local IED's LDCM, and they are then forwarded to the protection function in the local IED.

LDLPSCH acts as the interface to and from the protection function.

Configuration of this data flow is made in the SMT tool as shown in Figure 77.

Currents from
A/D
local CT

Currents from
remote end 1
LDCM 1
Currents to
remote end 1

Currents from
remote end 2
LDCM 2
Currents to
remote end 2

SMAI L3DPDIF

Pre-processing Line Differential

block function

IEC05000533-2-en.vsd

IEC05000533-NEW V2 EN-US

Figure 77: Typical configuration of analog signals for a three-terminal line

Figure 77 shows how one IED in a three-terminal line differential protection can be configured.
There are two LDCMs each supporting a duplex connection with a remote line end. Thus, the same
local current is configured to both LDCMs, while the received currents from the LDCMs are
configured separately to the line differential protection function.

7.4.2.7 Configuration of output signals M12022-93 v4

There are a number of signals available from the LDCM that can be connected to the virtual binary
inputs (SMBI) and used internally in the configuration. The signals appear only in the Signal Matrix
Tool (SMT) where they can be mapped to the desired virtual input.

168 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

The signal name is found in the Object Properties window by clicking on the input signal number in
SMT. Connect the signals to the virtual inputs as desired (see Figure 78

SMBI

IEC06000638-2-en.vsd

IEC06000638 V2 EN-US

Figure 78: Example of LDCM signals in SMTl

7.4.2.8 Open CT detection GUID-DB3841A9-5B55-490E-8A2D-EBF0CB263378 v7

Line differential protection has a built-in, advanced open CT detection feature. This feature can
block the unwanted operation created by the Line differential protection function in case of an
open CT secondary circuit under a normal load condition. However, there is no guarantee that the
Open CT algorithm prevents an unwanted disconnection of the protected circuit. The Open CT can
be detected in approximately 14 ± 2 ms, and the differential protection might by that time in some
cases have already issued a trip command. Nevertheless, the information on an open CT as the
reason for trip is still very important. An alarm signal can also be issued to the substation
operational personnel to make remedy action once the open CT condition is detected. The open
CT algorithm is active under normal load conditions and a little above, i.e. in the range of load
current from app. 10 % to app. 150 % rated load. Under normal conditions load is considered to be
well described by the bias current. The Open CT detection algorithm is based on the principle that
in the phase with an open CT, the current will suddenly drop to zero, while in the other two phases
the currents continue as before. The Open CT at each end is enabled 60 seconds after the currents
at that end are higher than 3 % rated current of the protected line circuit. An open CT can only be
declared if in the phase where an open CT is suspected, exceeds 10 % of the rated current. The
Open CT signal disappears when all currents are again normal, or when all three currents become
zero.

• Setting parameter OpenCTEnable enables and disables this feature.

• Setting parameter OCTBlockEnenables and disables the blocking of differential function once
an open CT is detected. When OCTBlockEn is set to OFF, only an alarm signal is issued.
• Setting parameter tOCTAlarmDelay defines the time delay after which the alarm signal is
given.
• Setting parameter tOCTResetDelay defines the time delay after which the open CT condition
resets once the defective CT circuits have been repaired.
• Once the open CT condition has been detected, all the differential protection functions are
blocked except the unrestrained (instantaneous) differential protection. However, there is no
guarantee that an unwanted disconnection of the protected circuit can always be prevented.
• For applications where the currents from two CTs are summated and sent over LDCM, the
output OPENCT must be connected to CTFAIL on LDLPSCH logic in order for the Open CT

Line differential protection RED670 169

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

detection to operate properly. Observe that summation of currents shall be avoided where
possible.

The outputs of the open CT conditions are OPENCT and OPENCTAL.

• OPENCT: Open CT detected

• OPENCTAL: Alarm issued after the setting delay

Outputs (positive integer) for information on the local HMI:

• OPENCTIN: Open CT in CT group inputs (1 for input 1 and 2 for input 2)

• OPENCTPH: Open CT with phase information (1 for phase A, 2 for phase B, 3 for phase C)

7.4.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD54832-1 v3

M12541-86 v4
Line differential protection receives information about currents from all line terminals and
evaluates this information in three different analysis blocks. The results of these analyses are then
forwarded to an output logic, where the conditions for trip or no trip are checked.

The three current analyses are:

• Percentage restrained differential analysis

• The 2nd and 5th harmonic analysis (only if there is a power transformer included in the
protected circuit)
• Internal/external fault discriminator

7.4.3.1 General settings M12541-93 v3

IBase set in primary Amp M12541-95 v3

Set a common IBase in Global base for the protected line (circuit). Most current settings for the
protection function are then related to the IBase. The setting of IBase is normally made so that it
corresponds to the maximum rated CT in any of the line terminals. For example, if all CTs used in a
protected circuit are 1000A/1A, that is, the primary current rating is 1000 A, then IBase = 1000 A is
a good choice.

NoOfUsedCTs M12541-98 v8
NoOfUsedCTs indicates to the function the number of three-phase CT sets included in the
protected circuit. Note that one IED can process one or two local current terminals of the
protected circuit. This is the case, for example, in breaker-and-a-half configurations in the line bay,
where each of the two CT sets will be represented as one separate current terminal. A protected
line with 1½ breaker configurations at each line end must consequently have NoOfUsedCTs = 4.

NoOfUsedCTs indicates to the function the number of three-phase CT sets included in the
protected circuit. Note that one IED can process one or two local current terminals of the
protected circuit. This is the case, for example, in breaker-and-a-half configurations in the line bay,
where one of the two CT sets will be represented as one separate current terminal. A two-terminal
line with 1½ breaker configurations at one line end must consequently have NoOfUsedCTs = 3.

170 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

IEC09000973-2-en.vsd
IEC09000973 V2 EN-US

Figure 79: Example when setting NoOfUsedCTs = 4 in breaker-and-a-half configurations

7.4.3.2 Percentage restrained differential operation M12541-104 v4

Line differential protection is phase-segregated where the operate current is the vector sum of all
measured currents taken separately for each phase. The restrain current, on the other hand, is
considered the greatest phase current in any line end and it is common for all three phases.
Observe that the protection may no more be phase-segregated when there is an in-line power
transformer included in the protected circuit. These are usually of the Dy or Yd type and the three
phases are related in a complicated way. For example, a single-phase earth fault on the wye side of
the power transformer is seen as a two-phase fault on the delta side of the transformer.

Operation: Line differential protection function is switched on or off with this setting. If the
parameter Operation is set to Off this IED is switched over to Slave mode and trip is initiated by
the remote end IED.

The characteristic of the restrained differential function is shown in Figure 80. The restrained
characteristic is defined by the settings:

1. IdMin
2. EndSection1
3. EndSection2
4. SlopeSection2
5. SlopeSection3

Line differential protection RED670 171

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

Operate current
[ in pu of IBase]
Operate
5
unconditionally

UnrestrainedLimit
4

Operate IdMinHigh
3 C
conditionally
A B

2
Section 1 Section 2 Section 3

SlopeSection3
1
IdMin
SlopeSection2 Restrain
0
0 1 2 3 4 5

EndSection1 Restrain current

EndSection2 [ in pu of IBase]

en05000300.vsd
IEC05000300 V1 EN-US

Figure 80: Restrained differential function characteristic (reset ratio 0.95)

where:

slope = D Ioperate × 100%

D Irestrain
EQUATION1246 V1 EN-US

Line differential protection is phase-segregated where the operate current is the vector sum of all
measured currents taken separately for each phase. The restrain current, on the other hand, is
considered as the greatest phase current in any line end and it is common for all three phases.

IdMin M12541-121 v6
This setting is a multiple of IBase and must take into account the fundamental frequency line
charging current, and whether a power transformer is included in the protected zone or not.

The positive sequence line charging current is calculated according to equation 53.

172 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

V V
ICh arg e = =
3 × XC1 1
3×
2p f × C 1
EQUATION1762-ANSI V2 EN-US (Equation 53)

where:
V is system voltage
XC1 is capacitive positive sequence reactance of the line

f is system frequency
C1 is positive sequence line capacitance

If the charging current compensation is enabled, the setting of IdMin must be: IdMin ≥ 1.2 ×
ICharge, concidering some margin in the setting. If the charging current compensation is disabled,
the setting of IdMin must be IdMin ≥ 2.5 × ICharge. In many cases, the charging current is quite
small, which makes the lower limit of the setting range, that is 20% of IBase the practical limit of
sensitivity.

When a power transformer is included in the protected zone, the setting of IdMin shall be the
highest of recommendations considering charging current as described above and 0.3 × IBase.

IdMinHigh M12541-165 v5
The IdMinHigh setting is a multiple of IBase and used to temporarily decrease sensitivity in
situations when the line is energized.

Energizing a line can cause transient charging currents to appear. These currents are pure
differential currents, but as they are rich in harmonics, they can partly be measured by the
differential protection, which in this case measures the Fourier-filtered differential current.
Desensitizing the differential protection in this situation by using IdMinHigh instead of IdMin is a
safety precaution, and a setting of 1.00 × IBase should be suitable in most cases.

If there is a power transformer included in the protected zone, energizing the line means that the
transformer is energized at the same time. If the transformer nominal current is more than 50% of
IBase, IdMinHigh is recommended to be set at 2.00 × IBase, otherwise it can be kept at 1.00 ×
IBase.

Switching of a transformer inside the protected zone does not normally occur. If the transformer
is equipped with a breaker on the HV side, it would most probably not be included in the protected
zone. However, tap transformers are sometimes connected with a disconnector on the HV side,
and the normal procedure is then to energize the transformer with the disconnector. In such
cases, where the tap (shunt) power transformer's power rating is relatively small in comparison to
the normal load of the circuit, connecting the tap power transformer to the voltage source, that is,
to the protected line circuit, does usually not result in inrush currents high enough to be detected
by the differential protection. This is especially the case if the tap power transformer is connected
at a junction somewhere towards the middle of the protected line circuit, because the inrush
phenomenon is effectively prevented in such cases. If a pickup signal is nevertheless issued by the
differential protection, then the 2nd harmonic will prevent an unwanted trip. Observe that the
harmonic inhibit algorithm is active as long as the bias current is below 125% of the base current
IBase. (If there is an in-line power transformer included in the protected line circuit, then the
harmonic inhibit algorithm is permanently activated, and can only be overridden if an internal fault
has been detected.)

Line differential protection RED670 173

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

tIdMinHigh M12541-177 v4
This setting defines the time that IdMinHigh will be active after the previously dead protected
circuit has been connected to the power source. If a power transformer is included in the
protection zone, due to long duration of transformer inrush current the parameter should be set
to 60 s. Otherwise a setting of 1 s is sufficient.

IdUnre M12541-180 v5
IdUnre is set as a multiple of IBase. Values of differential currents above the unrestrained limit
generate a trip disregarding all other criteria, that is, irrespective of the internal or external fault
discriminator and any presence of harmonics. It is intended for fast tripping of internal faults with
high fault currents. The recommended setting is 120% of the highest through fault current that
can appear on the protected line. Consequently, to set this value properly, the fault current must
be calculated in each specific case.

For a short line or a situation with a breaker-and-a-half bay, the through fault current might be
practically the same as the differential current at an internal fault. Extreme unequal CT saturation
at external faults could then be a risk of unwanted operation if the unrestrained operation is used.
Consequently, if the through fault currents can be of the same order as the maximum differential
currents at internal faults, for example, when there is a source of power only on one side (in the
branch with the first CT), and only load on the other side (in the branch with the other CT), it is
recommended to refrain from using the unrestrained operation, by setting the max value IdUnre =
50 × IBase.

On long lines, the through fault current is often considerably less than the maximum differential
current at internal faults, and a suitable setting of the unrestrained level is then easy to calculate.

When a transformer is included in the protected zone, the maximum inrush current must be
considered when the unrestrained level is calculated. The inrush current appears from one side of
the transformer, while the maximum differential current at internal faults is limited by the source
impedances on all sides of the transformer. Observe that if the power transformer is energized via
a power line, even a short one, the inrush phenomenon is much less pronounced. The fundamental
frequency of the inrush current will not be as high as when the power transformer is connected
directly to a source with very low internal impedance.

EndSection1 M12541-186 v3
EndSection1 is set as a multiple of IBase. The default value 1.25 is generally recommended. If the
conditions are known more in detail, other values can be chosen in order to increase or decrease
the sensitivity.

EndSection2 M12541-189 v3
EndSection2 is set as a multiple of IBase. The default value 3.00 is generally recommended. If the
conditions are known more in detail, other values can be chosen in order to increase or decrease
the sensitivity.

SlopeSection2 M12541-192 v4
SlopeSection2 is set as a percentage value: [delta operate current/delta restrain current] × 100%.
The default value 40.0 is generally recommended. If the conditions are known more in detail, other
values can be chosen in order to increase or decrease the sensitivity.

SlopeSection3 M12541-195 v4
SlopeSection3 is set as a percentage value: [delta operate current/delta restrain current] × 100%.
The default value 80.0 is generally recommended. If the conditions are known more in detail, other
values can be chosen in order to increase or decrease the sensitivity.

174 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

7.4.3.3 The 2nd and 5th harmonic analysis M12541-198 v5

The 2nd and 5th harmonic block scheme is permanently active only if an in-line power transformer
(A or B, alternatively both A and B) is part of the protected circuit. This is a must due to
phenomena specific for power transformers, such as inrush and over-excitation. If there is no
power transformer included in the protected multi-terminal line circuit, then the 2nd and 5th
harmonic block scheme is only active under the following conditions:

• If the bias current is lower than 1.25 times IBase.

• Under external fault conditions.
• If NegSeqDiffEn = Disabled (the default is Enabled )

When the harmonic content is above the set level, the restrained differential operation is blocked.
However, if a fault has been classified as internal by the negative sequence fault discriminator, any
harmonic restraint is overridden.

I2/I1Ratio M12541-201 v4

The set value is the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component of the differential current to the
fundamental frequency component of the differential current. To obtain this information, the
instantaneous differential current must be analyzed.

Transformer inrush currents cause high degrees of the 2nd harmonic in the differential current. The
default value of 15% is a reliable value to detect power transformer inrush currents.

CT saturation causes 2nd harmonics of considerable value on the CT secondary side, which
contributes to the stabilization of the relay at through fault conditions. It is strongly
recommended to maintain a sensitive setting of the I2/I1Ratio also when a power transformer is
not included in the protected zone.

I5/I1Ratio M12541-206 v4

The set value is the ratio of the 5th harmonic of the differential current to the fundamental
frequency of the differential current. To obtain this information, the instantaneous differential
current must be analyzed.

A 20...30% over-excitation of a transformer can cause an increase in the excitation current of

10...100 times the normal value. This excitation current is a true differential current if the
transformer is inside the protected zone. It has a high degree of the 5th harmonic, and the default
setting of 25% will be suitable in most cases to detect the phenomenon. As CT saturation also
causes 5th harmonics on the secondary side, it is recommended to maintain this setting at 25% or
lower even if no power transformer is included in the protected zone.

7.4.3.4 Internal/external fault discriminator M12541-210 v2

NegSeqDiffEn M12541-213 v4
The negative sequence fault discriminator can be set Enabled/Disabled. It is an important
complement to the percentage restrained differential function. As it is directional, it can
distinguish between external and internal faults also in difficult conditions, such as CT saturation,
and so on. It is strongly recommended that it is always activated (Enabled).

NegSeqROA M12541-218 v4
This is the setting of the relay operate angle of the negative sequence current based internal/
external fault discriminator. The directional test is made so that the end with the highest negative

Line differential protection RED670 175

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

sequence current is found. Then, the sum of the negative sequence currents at all other circuit
ends is calculated. Finally, the relative phase angle between these two negative sequence currents
is determined. See figure 81. Ideally the angle is zero degrees for internal faults and 180 degrees
for external faults. However, measuring errors caused by, for example, CT saturation as well as
different phase angles of the negative sequence impedances, require a safety margin, expressed
as the ROA (Relay Operate Angle). The default value 60 degrees is recommended in most cases.
The setting NegSeqROA is a compromise between the security and dependability of the
differential protection. The value NegSeqROA = 60 degrees emphasizes security against
dependability. Tests have proven that 60 degrees is a good choice.

90 deg
120 deg
If one or the Internal/external
other of fault boundary
currents is too
low, then no
measurement
NegSeqROA
is done, and
(Relay
120 degrees
Operate
is mapped
Angle)

180 deg 0 deg

IMinNegSeq

External Internal
fault fault
region region

270 deg en05000188-3-en.vsd

IEC05000188 V3 EN-US

Figure 81: Negative sequence current function Relay Operate Angle (ROA)

IminNegSeq M12541-223 v4
IminNegSeq is set as a multiple of IBase. The local, and the sum of all remote negative sequence
currents are compared separately if they are above the set threshold value IminNegSeq. If either is
below the threshold, no comparison is made. Neither internal nor external fault is declared in this
case. The default value 0.04 × IBase can be used if no special considerations, such as extremely
week sources, are taken into account. Observe that internally, whenever the bias current is higher
than 1.5 times IBase, the actual threshold is equal to the sum of IminNegSeq + 0.1 Ibias. This is in
order to prevent wrong decisions of the internal/external fault discriminator under heavy three-
phase external fault conditions with severe CT saturation.

7.4.3.5 Power transformers in the protected zone M12541-6 v7

One three-winding transformer or two two-winding transformers can be included in the line
protection zone. The alternative with one two-winding transformer in the protected zone is shown
in Figure 82 and Figure 83.

176 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

Protected zone

IED IED

IEC05000442-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000442 V2 EN-US

Protected zone

IED IED

ANSI05000442-2-en.vsdx

ANSI05000442 V2 EN-US

Figure 82: One two–winding transformer in the protected zone

Protected zone

IED IED

IED

ANSI04000209-2-en.vsdx

ANSI04000209 V2 EN-US

Figure 83: One two–winding transformer in the protected zone

An alternative with two two-winding transformers in the protected zone is shown in Figure 84.

Line differential protection RED670 177

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

Protected zone

IED IED

A B

IED IED

ANSI04000210-2-en.vsdx

ANSI04000210 V2 EN-US

Figure 84: Two two–winding transformers in the protected zone

An alternative with one three-winding transformer in the protected zone is shown in Figure 85.
Observe that in this case, the three-winding power transformer is seen by the differential
protection as two separate power transformers, A and B, which have one common winding on the
HV side.

Figure 85: One three–winding transformer in the protected zone

Protected zone

A T
IED B
IED
T

ANSI15000451-2-en.vsdx

ANSI15000451 V2 EN-US

Figure 86: One three–winding transformer in the protected zone

TraAOnInpCh M12541-239 v6
This parameter is used to indicate that a power transformer is included in the protection zone at
current terminal X. This can be either a two-winding transformer or the first secondary winding of
a three-winding transformer. The current transformer feeding the IED is located at the low voltage
side of the transformer. The parameter is set within the range 0...3 or 0...6, where 0 (zero) is used
if no transformer A is included in the protection zone. This is the only setting that is different for
each separate IED.

The setting specifies the current input on the differential current function block where the input
current must be recalculated, that is, referred to the high voltage side, which is the reference side
of the differential protection. The measured current, fed to the input channel determined by the
setting TraAOnInpCh, will be recalculated to I ·RatVoltW2TraA/RatVoltW1TraA and shifted
counterclockwise by the angle, determined by the product ClockNumTransA × 30 degrees.

178 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

RatVoltW1TraA M12541-279 v3
The rated voltage (kV) of the primary side (line side = high voltage side) of the power transformer
A.

RatVoltW2TraA M12541-282 v3
The rated voltage (kV) of the secondary side (non-line side = low voltage side) of the power
transformer A.

ClockNumTransA M12541-285 v3
This is the phase shift from primary to secondary side for power transformer A. The phase shift is
given in intervals of 30 degrees, where 1 is -30 degrees, 2 is -60 degrees, and so on. The parameter
can be set within the range 0...11.

TraBOnInpCh M12541-292 v5
This parameter is used to indicate that a power transformer is included in the protection zone at
current terminal Y. This can be either a two-winding transformer or the second secondary winding
of a three-winding transformer. The current transformer feeding the IED is located at the low
voltage side of the transformer. The parameter is set within the range 0...3 or 0...6, where zero is
used if no transformer B is included in the protection zone.

The setting specifies the current input on the differential current function block where the input
current must be recalculated, that is, referred to the high voltage side, which is the reference side
of the differential protection. The set input measured current I will be recalculated to I ×
RatVoltW2TraB/RatVoltW1TraB and shifted counterclockwise by the angle, determined by the
product ClockNumTransB × 30 degrees.

RatVoltW1TraB M12541-295 v3
The rated voltage (kV) of the primary side (line side = high voltage side) of the power transformer
B.

RatVoltW2TraB M12541-298 v3
The rated voltage (kV) of the secondary side (non-line side = low voltage side) of the power
transformer B.

ClockNumTransB M12541-301 v2
This is the phase shift from primary to secondary side for power transformer B. The phase shift is
given in intervals of 30 degrees, where 1 is -30 degrees, 2 is -60 degrees and so on. The parameter
can be set within the range 0 – 11.

ZerSeqCurSubtr M12541-307 v4
The elimination of zero sequence currents in the differential protection can be set Enabled/
Disabled. In case of a power transformer in the protected zone, where the zero sequence current
cannot be transformed through the transformer, that is, in the great majority of cases, the zero
sequence current must be eliminated.

ZerSeqCurSubtr must be set Enabled if there is a transformer in the zone. The zero sequence
currents are then subtracted from all current terminals.

CrossBlockEn M12541-310 v3
The possibility of cross-blocking can be set Enabled/Disabled. The meaning of cross-blocking is
that the 2nd and 5th harmonic blocking in one phase also blocks the differential function of the
other phases. It is recommended to enable the cross-blocking if a power transformer is included in
the protection zone, otherwise not.

Line differential protection RED670 179

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

IMaxAddDelay M12541-313 v4
IMaxAddDelay is set as a multiple of IBase. The current level, under which a possible extra added
time delay (of the output trip command), can be applied. The possibility for delayed operation for
small differential currents is typically used for lines with a (minor) tapped transformer somewhere
in the protected circuit and where no protection terminal of the multi-terminal differential
protection is applied at the transformer site. If such a minor tap transformer is equipped with a
circuit breaker and its own local protection, then this protection must operate before the line
differential protection to achieve selectivity for faults on the low voltage side of the transformer.
To ensure selectivity, the current setting must be higher than the greatest fault current for faults
at the high voltage side of the transformer.

AddDelay M12541-316 v2
The possibility of delayed operation for small differential currents can be set Enabled/Disabled.

CurveType M12541-321 v3
This is the setting of type of delay for low differential currents.

tMinInv M12541-324 v4
This setting limits the shortest delay when inverse time delay is used. Operation faster than the
set value of tMinInv is prevented.

If the user-programmable curve is chosen the characteristic of the curve is defined by equation 54.

æ ö
ç ÷
ç a
top = TD + b÷
çæ I Measured ö
P
÷
çç ÷ - c ÷
è è IMaxAddDelay ø ø
EQUATION1764-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 54)

where:
top is operate time

TD is time multiplier of the inverse time curve

a, b, c, p are settings that will model the inverse time characteristic

7.4.3.6 Settings examples M12541-349 v3

M12941-3 v8

Setting example with a power transformer in the protected zone

Figure 87 shows a line with a power transformer in the protected zone. Circuit impedances are
presented in Figure 88. The protected zone is limited by three current transformers: CT1, CT2 and
CT3. IEDs are situated in two separate substations 1 and 2.

The circuit is protected by two terminals 1 and 2. These terminals process the same data except
for minor distortion in data that takes place during communication between them. Both terminals
operate as masters. If at least one of them indicates an internal fault, the protected circuit is
disconnected.

180 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

Substation 1 Substation 2

terminal 2 terminal 3
CT 3

terminal 1
CT 1 CB 1 Line 31.5 miles CB 3 52
52
220 kV, 600 A
CB 2 52

200 MVA,
220 / 70 kV, CT 2
525 / 1650 A

IED 1 Current samples from terminal 1

IED 2
Current samples from terminals 2 and 3

ANSI05000534-2-en.vsdx

ANSI05000534 V2 EN-US

Figure 87: Line differential protection with a power transformer in the protected zone

Zsource 1 ZL ZT Zsource 2/3

ANSI05000444-2-en.vsdx

ANSI05000444 V2 EN-US

Figure 88: Circuit impedances

where:
Line data is
Z L » X L = 15.0W
EQUATION1419 V1 EN-US

Transformer data is 10 2202

X % = 10% Þ X T 220 = × = 24.2W
100 200
EQUATION1420 V1 EN-US

Source impedance is
Z Source1 = 7.0W
EQUATION1421 V1 EN-US

2
æ 220 ö
ZSource2 / 3 = 5W Þ (ZSource2 / 3 ) 220 =ç ÷ × 5 = 49.4W
è 70 ø
EQUATION1422 V1 EN-US

Line differential protection RED670 181

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

Table 20: General settings

Setting IED 1 IED 2 Description
Operation On On Operation Mode (active)
NoOfTerminals 3 3 Number of current sources/
circuit ends
IBase (Global base) 600 A 600 A Reference current of the
protection in the primary
system (note 1)
IBase is set in the Global
base values function
(GBASVAL).
TransfAonInpCh 2 1 Input currents on the input
channels are referred to the
high voltage side (note 2)
TraAWind1Volt 220 kV 220 kV Transformer A: Y-side
voltage
TraAWind2Volt 70 kV 70 kV Transformer A: d-side
voltage
ClockNumTransA 1 1 LV d-side lags Y-side by 30
degrees
TransfBonInpCh 3 2 Input currents on the input
channels are referred to the
high voltage side (note 2)
TraBWind1Volt 220 kV 220 kV Transformer B: Y-side
voltage
TraBWind2Volt 70 kV 70 kV Transformer B: d-side
voltage
ClockNumTransB 1 1 LV d-side lags Y-side by 30
degrees
ZerSeqCurSubtr On On Zero-sequence currents are
subtracted from
differential and bias
currents (note 3)

Table 21: Setting group N

Setting IED 1 IED 2 Description
ChargCurEnable Off Off Charging current not
eliminated (default)
IdMin 0.35 · IBase 0.35 · IBase Sensitivity in Section 1
of the operate-
restrain characteristic
EndSection1 1.25 · IBase 1.25 · IBase End of section 1 of the
operate-restrain
characteristic
EndSection2 3.00 · IBase 3.00 · IBase End of section 2 of the
operate-restrain
characteristic
SlopeSection2 40% 40% Slope of the operate-
restrain characteristic
in Section 2
Table continues on next page

182 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

Setting IED 1 IED 2 Description

SlopeSection3 80% 80% Slope of the operate-
restrain characteristic
in Section 3
IdMinHigh 2.00 · IBase 2.00 · IBase Temporarily
decreased sensitivity
used when the
protected circuit is
connected to a power
source (note 4)
IntervIdMinHig 30.000 s 30.000 s Time interval when
IdMinHig is active
(note 5)
Idunre 5.50 · IBase 5.50 · IBase Unrestrained operate
(differential) current
limit (note 6)
CrossBlock 1 1 CrossBlock logic
scheme applied (note
7)
I2/I1Ratio 15% 15% Second to
fundamental
harmonic ratio limit
I5/I1Ratio 25% 25% Fifth to fundamental
harmonic ratio limit
NegSeqDiff On On Internal/external fault
discriminator enabled
(default)
IminNegSeq 0.04 · IBase 0.04 · IBase Minimum value of the
negative-sequence
current
NegSeqROA 60.0 deg 60.0 deg Operate angle (ROA)
for Internal/external
fault discriminator
(default)
AddDelay Off Off Additional delay
disabled (default)
ImaxAddDelay 1.00 · IBase 1.00 · IBase Not applicable in this
case (default)
CurveType 15 15 Not applicable in this
case (default)
DefDelay 0.100 s 0.100 s Not applicable in this
case (default)
IDMTtMin 0.010 s 0.010 s Not applicable in this
case (default)
TD 0.00 0.00 Not applicable in this
case (default)
p 0.02 0.02 Not applicable in this
case (default)
Table continues on next page

Line differential protection RED670 183

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

Setting IED 1 IED 2 Description

a 0.14 0.14 Not applicable in this
case (default)
b 1.00 1.00 Not applicable in this
case (default)
c 1.00 1.00 Not applicable in this
case (default)

Notes:
1 IBase (set in GBASVAL) is the reference current of the line differential protection given in
primary Amperes. CT1 in terminal 1 has a ratio of 600/5 and that is why 600 A is chosen
for IBase in this example.
2 Only one physical power transformer is included in the protected circuit. However, to
handle the situation with two CTs on the low-voltage side of the transformer, one more
fictitious power transformer is introduced. Thus, transformer A can be thought of as
being installed at CT2, and transformer B, which is identical to A, can be thought of as
being installed at CT3. Currents measured at CT2 and CT3 are internally separately
referred to the high-voltage side of the transformer by the multi-terminal differential
algorithm using the same transformation rule. This rule is defined by the power
transformer transformation ratio and its type (Yd1 in this example). If an in-line power
transformer is included in the protected zone, the protected power lines are usually on
the high-voltage side of the in-line power transformer. The differential algorithm always
transforms the low-voltage side currents to the high-voltage side.
3 Ground faults on the Y-side of the transformer cause a zero sequence current that flows
in the Y-winding of the power transformer. This current does not appear outside the
transformer on the d-side, and is consequently not measured by CT2 and CT3. Thus, if Y-
side ground fault is external to the protected zone, zero sequence current that passes the
neutral point of the transformer appears as a false differential current. This can cause an
unwanted trip if zero sequence currents are not subtracted from all three fundamental
frequency differential currents.
4 Energizing the circuit means that the power transformer is energized at the same time. It
is assumed that this is always made from the high-voltage side, and the harmonic
restraint detects the inrush current and prevents a trip. Setting IdMinHigh = 2.00 · IBase
is justified in this case since the transformer is large.
5 The interval when IdMinHigh is active is set to 60 s because a power transformer is
included in the protected zone. As both IEDs process the same currents, both must have
the same value set for IdMinHigh.
6 The unrestrained operate (differential) current limit should greater than the highest
through fault current. This current appears at a three-phase short circuit on the 33 kV
side of the transformer and can be calculated as:

220
IThrough = = 2.75kA
3 × (7.0 + 15.0 + 24.2)
EQUATION1423 V1 EN-US (Equation 59)

With a safety margin of 20%:

1.2 × IThrough 1.2 × 2.75kA 3.30kA

Idunre = = = = 5.50
Ibase 0.6 kA 0.6kA
EQUATION1424 V1 EN-US (Equation 60)

7 The cross-block logic should always be active when there is a power transformer in the
protected zone.

184 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

Setting example with a small tap transformer in the protected zone

A typical example is shown in Figure 89

SA SA
1700 52 52 1280
MVA MVA

Communication Channel
87L 87L

10 MVA
ek=10%
138/10 kV

52

51

51

52

ANSI12000193-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000193 V1 EN-US

Figure 89: Setting example

Input data to calculation:

• Apparent source power at A side: SsA = 1700 MVA

• Line impedance from A to tap: ZlA = 2.8 Ω
• Line impedance from tap to B side: ZlB = 1.2 Ω
• Apparent source power at B side: SsB = 1280 MVA
• Base current of differential current protection: IBase = 42 A
• Apparent power of transformer: Sn = 10 MVA
• Short circuit impedance of transformer: ek = 10%
• Nominal voltage on transformer high voltage winding: Vn = 138 kV

Fault current on the high voltage (HV) side of the tap transformer is calculated for a three-phase
fault on the low voltage (LV) side. 138 kV is chosen as calculation voltage.

Line differential protection RED670 185

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

ZsA ZlA ZlB ZsB

Ztrf E

IEC14000046-1-en.vsd
IEC14000046 V1 EN-US

Figure 90: Thevenin equivalent of the tap transformer

Converting the sources into impedances gives:

1382
ZS A = = 11.2 Ω
1700
EQUATION14000034 V1 EN-US (Equation 61)

1382
ZS B = = 15.9 Ω
1200
EQUATION14000035 V1 EN-US (Equation 62)

Calculating the short circuit impedance of the transformer gives:

ek Vn 2 1382
Z trf = × = 0.1 × = 190.4 Ω
100 Sn 10
ANSIEQUATION14000036 V1 EN-US (Equation 63)

Based on the Thevenin equivalent, it is possible to calculate the fault current on the HV side of the
transformer:

138
If138 =
3 × Z res
EQUATION14000037 V1 EN-US (Equation 64)

where:

( Zs + Zla ) × ( ZsB + ZlB )

A
Z res = + Z trf = 198Ω
Zs A + Zla + ZsB + ZlB
EQUATION14000039 V1 EN-US (Equation 65)

The numerical value for Zres input in the formula for If138 gives If138 = 403 A

To avoid unwanted operation of the differential protection for a fault on the LV side of the
transformer, IdMin must be set to:

186 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

If138
> 1.2 ×
I Base
EQUATION14000038 V1 EN-US (Equation 66)

If138
IdMin = 1.2 × = 11.5
I Base
EQUATION14000040 V1 EN-US (Equation 67)

To allow the differential protection to act as a backup protection for internal faults and faults on
the LV side of the transformer, AddDelay is set to On, and a suitable setting is calculated for Imax
AddDelay. Differential currents below the set value for Imax AddDelay are time delayed. Value two
times the rated current of the transformer on the HV side is chosen. The setting is calculated as:

Sn
ImaxAddDelay = 2 × = 2.0
3 × Vn × I Base
ANSIEQUATION14000041 V1 EN-US (Equation 68)

Table 22: Backup protection example data

Station Tap transformer 10 MVA
Type of fault Three phase fault
Object 1 = 10 kV Line A 2 = T1 10 kV 50/51 3 = 130 kV 87L
(ImaxAddDelay)
Setting 2 MVA 14 MVA 20 MVA
Characteristic IEC Extr.inverse, k=0.5, A=80, IEC Norm.inverse k=0.12, IEC Norm.inverse k=0.18,
p=2 A=0.14, p=0.02 A=0.14, p=0.02
High set stage 14 MVA ---- ----

It is important to achieve a proper back-up protection. The short circuit protection on the
outgoing bays and on the LV side of the transformer are set according to a prepared selectivity
chart. An example in Figure 91 shows that the setting of the short circuit protection on the LV side
is 14 MVA, and Normal Inverse has k=0.12 to give back-up to outgoing bays' relays which are
extremely inverse and selective to remote fuses.

Line differential protection RED670 187

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

IEC14000047 -1-en.ai
IEC14000047 V1 EN-US

Figure 91: Selectivity chart

Setting example with two transformers in the protected zone (master- slave
differential operation)

B
A T
IED IED

T C

IED

ANSI13000295-2-en.vsdx

ANSI13000295 V2 EN-US

Figure 92: Master- slave differential operation

Setting Station A Station B Station C

PDIF L3TCPDIF
NoOfUsedCTs 3
TraAOnInpCh 2
TraBOnInpCh 3

188 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

Protection functions in stations B and C operate as slaves (differential function switched off) so
currents are sent to protection function in station A, and received on channels 2 and 3. To inform
the differential algorithm that currents are coming from the LV sides of the transformers,
TraAOnInpCh must be set to 2 and TraBOnInpCh to 3 (channel1 is reserved for local measurement).
This is to ensure that proper turn ratio and vector group correction is done.

Setting example with a three-winding transformer in the protected zone

A T
IED B
IED
T

ANSI13000296-2-en.vsdx

ANSI13000296 V2 EN-US

Figure 93: Three-winding transformer in the zone

Settings Station A Station B

PDIF L3TCPDIF L3TCPDIF
NoOfUsedCTs 3 3
TraAOnInpCh 2 1
TraBOnInpCh 3 2

Currents from the secondary and tertiary windings of the power transformer are connected to one
line differential protection IED. Currents for each CT group are sent to the IED at station A by the
LDCM. To inform the differential algorithm that currents are coming from the LV sides of the
transformers, TraAOnInpCh must be set to 2 and TraBOnInpCh to 3 (channel1 is reserved for local
measurement). This is to ensure that proper turn ratio and vector group correction is done.

7.5 Additional security logic for differential protection

LDRGFC (11) GUID-0E064528-0E70-4FA1-87C7-581DADC1EB55 v2

7.5.1 Identification
GUID-3081E62B-3E96-4615-97B8-2CCA92752658 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Additional security logic for LDRGFC - 11
differential protection

Line differential protection RED670 189

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

7.5.2 Application GUID-93AF4444-C7ED-4DF5-9379-176DF17AE22C v4

Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC (11) can help the security of the
protection especially when the communication system is in abnormal status or for example when
there is unspecified asymmetry in the communication link. It reduces the probability for mal-
operation of the protection. LDRGFC (11) is more sensitive than the main protection logic to
always release operation for all faults detected by the differential function. LDRGFC (11) consists
of four sub functions:

• Phase-to-phase current variation

• Zero sequence current criterion
• Low voltage criterion
• Low current criterion

Phase-to-phase current variation takes the current samples (IL1–IL2, IL2–IL3, etc.) as input and it
calculates the variation using the sampling value based algorithm. Phase-to-phase current
variation function is major one to fulfil the objectives of the start up element.

Zero sequence criterion takes the zero sequence current as input. It increases security of
protection during the high impedance fault conditions.

Low voltage criterion takes the phase voltages and phase to phase voltages as inputs. It increases
the security of protection when the three phase fault occurred on the weak end side.

Low current criterion takes the phase currents as inputs and it increases the dependability during
the switch onto fault case of unloaded line.

The differential function can be allowed to trip as no load is fed through the line and protection is
not working correctly.

Features:

• Startup element is sensitive enough to detect the abnormal status of the protected system
• Startup element does not influence the operation speed of main protection
• Startup element detects the evolving faults, high impedance faults and three phase fault on
weak side
• It is possible to block the each sub function of startup element
• Startup signal has a settable pulse time

The Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC (11) is connected as a local
criterion to release the tripping from line differential protection. LDRGFC is connected with an
AND gate to the trip signals from LDLPDIF function. Figure 94 shows a configuration for three
phase tripping, but LDRGFC can be configured with individual release to all phases trip. The BFI_3P
signal can also, through one of the available binary signal transfer channels, be sent to remote end
and there connected to input REMSTEP. Normally, the local criterion is sufficient.

190 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 7
Differential protection

Release of line
differential
LDLPSCH (87L) AND protection trip
CTFAIL TRIP INPUT1 OUT
OUTSERV TRL1 INPUT2 NOUT
BLOCK TRL2 INPUT3
TRL3 INPUT4N
TRLOCAL
TRLOCL1
TRLOCL2
TRLOCL3
TRREMOTE
DIFLBLKD

Start signal to
LDRGFC (11REL) remote side
I3P* START
U3P* STCVL1L2
BLOCK STCVL2L3
BLKCV STCVL3L1
BLKUC STUC
BLK3I0 ST3I0
Start signal from BLKUV STUV
REMSTUP
remote side ANSI11000232-3-en.vsd
ANSI11000232 V3 EN-US

Figure 94: Local release criterion configuration for line differential protection

7.5.3 Setting guidelines GUID-3C315FA5-8262-416D-A8ED-927FE0BFAB8F v3

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, VBase and
SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

tStUpReset: Reset delay of the startup signal. The default value is recommended.

Settings for phase-phase current variation subfunction are described below.

Enable CV: Enabled/Disabled, is set Enabled in most applications

Pick Up ICV: Level of fixed threshold given in % of IBase. This setting should be based on fault
calculations to find the current increase in case of a fault at the point on the protected line giving
the smallest fault current to the protection. The phase current shall be calculated for different
types of faults (single phase-to-ground, phase-to-phase to ground, phase-to-phase and three
phase short circuits) at different switching states in the network. In case of switching of large
objects (shunt capacitor banks, transformers, and so on) large change in current can occur. The
Pick Up ICV setting should ensure that all multi-phase faults are detected.

Time Delay CV: Time delay of zero sequence overcurrent criterion. Default value 0.002 s is
recommended

Settings for zero sequence current criterion subfunction are described below.

Enable 3I0: Enabled/Disabled, is set Enabled for detection of phase-to-ground faults with high
sensitivity

PU 3I0 : Level of high zero sequence current detection given in % of IBase. This setting should be
based on fault calculations to find the zero sequence current in case of a fault at the point on the
protected line giving the smallest fault current to the protection. The zero sequence current shall
be calculated for different types of faults (single phase-to-groundand phase to phase to ground)
at different switching states in the network.

t3I0: Time delay of zero sequence overcurrent criterion. Default value 0.0 s is recommended

Line differential protection RED670 191

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Differential protection

Setting for low voltage criterion subfunction are described below.

OperationUV: Enabled/Disabled, is set Enabled for detection of faults by means of low phase-to-
ground or phase-to-phase voltage

V_Ph-N: Level of low phase-ground voltage detection, given in % of VBase. This setting should be
based on fault calculations to find the phase-ground voltage decrease in case of a fault at the
most remote point where the differential protection shall be active. The phase-ground voltages
shall be calculated for different types of faults (single phase-to-ground and phase to phase to
ground) at different switching states in the network. The setting must be higher than the lowest
phase-ground voltage during non-faulted operation.

V_Ph-Ph: Level of low phase-phase voltage detection, given in % of VBase. This setting should be
based on fault calculations to find the phase-phase voltage decrease in case of a fault at the most
remote point where the differential protection shall be active. The phase-phase voltages shall be
calculated for different types of faults (single phase to ground and phase to phase to ground) at
different switching states in the network. The setting must be higher than the lowest phase-phase
voltage during non-faulted operation.

tUV: Time delay of undervoltage criterion. Default value 0.0 s is recommended

Settings for low current criterion subfunction are described below.

Operation37: Enabled/Disabled, is set Enabled when tripping is preferred at energizing of the line
if differential does not behave correctly.

PU_37: Level of low phase current detection given in % of IBase. This setting shall detect open line
ends and be below normal minimum load.

tUC: Time delay of undercurrent criterion. Default value is recommended to verify that the line is
open.

192 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

Section 8 Impedance protection

8.1 Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for

series compensated lines ZMCPDIS (21), ZMCAPDIS (21),
ZDSRDIR (21D) SEMOD168167-1 v3

8.1.1 Identification
SEMOD168165-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Distance measuring zone, ZMCPDIS 21
quadrilateral characteristic for series
compensated lines (zone 1) Z
S00346 V2 EN-US

Distance measuring zone, ZMCAPDIS 21

quadrilateral characteristic for series
compensated lines (zone 2-5) Z
S00346 V2 EN-US

Directional impedance quadrilateral, ZDSRDIR 21D

including series compensation
Z<->

IEC09000167 V1 EN-US

8.1.2 Application SEMOD168236-1 v1

8.1.2.1 Introduction SEMOD168232-4 v2

Sub transmission networks are being extended and often become more and more complex,
consisting of a high number of multi-circuit and/or multi terminal lines of very different lengths.
These changes in the network will normally impose more stringent demands on the fault clearing
equipment in order to maintain an unchanged or increased security level of the power system.

The distance protection function is designed to meet basic requirements for application on
transmission and sub transmission lines (solid grounded systems) although it also can be used on
distribution levels.

8.1.2.2 System grounding SEMOD168232-11 v2

The type of system grounding plays an important roll when designing the protection system. In
the following sections, some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted.

Line differential protection RED670 193

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

Solid grounded networks SEMOD168232-14 v2

In solid grounded systems the transformer neutrals are connected solidly to ground without any
impedance between the transformer neutral and ground.

ANSI05000215 V2 EN-US

Figure 95: Solidly grounded network

The ground fault current is as high or even higher than the short-circuit current. The series
impedances determine the magnitude of the fault current. The shunt admittance has very limited
influence on the ground fault current. The shunt admittance may, however, have some marginal
influence on the ground fault current in networks with long transmission lines.

The ground fault current at single phase -to-ground in phase A can be calculated as equation 69:

3 × VA VA
3I 0 = =
Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f Z1 + Z N + Z f
EQUATION1710 V2 EN-US (Equation 69)

Where:
VA is the phase-to-ground voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before
fault
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance (Ω/phase)
Z2 is the negative sequence impedance (Ω/phase)
Z0 is the zero sequence impedance (Ω/phase)
Zf is the fault impedance (Ω), often resistive
ZN is the ground return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3

The voltage on the healthy phases is generally lower than 140% of the nominal phase-to-ground
voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage.

The high zero sequence current in solid grounded networks makes it possible to use impedance
measuring technique to detect ground-fault. However, distance protection has limited
possibilities to detect high resistance faults and must, therefore, always be complemented with
other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in those cases.

Effectively grounded networks SEMOD168232-40 v2

A network is defined as effectively grounded if the ground-fault factor fe is less than 1.4. The
ground-fault factor is defined according to equation 70.

194 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

Vmax
fe =
Vpn
ANSIEQUATION1268 V1 EN-US (Equation 70)

Where:
Vmax is the highest fundamental frequency voltage on one of the healthy phases at single
phase-to-ground fault.
Vpn is the phase-to-ground fundamental frequency voltage before fault.

Another definition for effectively grounded network is when the following relationships between
the symmetrical components of the network impedances are valid, as shown in equation 71 and
equation 72.

X 0 ≤ 3 ⋅ X1
EQUATION1269 V4 EN-US (Equation 71)

R0 £ X 1
EQUATION1270 V4 EN-US (Equation 72)

The magnitude of the ground fault current in effectively grounded networks is high enough for
impedance measuring element to detect ground-fault. However, in the same way as for solid
grounded networks, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults
and must, therefore, always be complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out
the fault clearance in this case.

8.1.2.3 Fault infeed from remote end SEMOD168232-84 v2

All transmission and most all sub transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical for this
type of network is that we will have fault infeed from remote end when fault occurs on the
protected line. The fault infeed may enlarge the fault impedance seen by the distance protection.
This effect is very important to keep in mind when both planning the protection system and
making the settings.

With reference to figure 96, we can draw the equation for the bus voltage Va at left side as:

VA = IA × p × ZL + ( IA + IB ) × Rf
EQUATION1273 V1 EN-US (Equation 73)

If we divide Va by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side

Va IA + IB
ZA = = p × ZL + × Rf
IA IA
EQUATION1274 V2 EN-US (Equation 74)

Line differential protection RED670 195

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

The infeed factor (IA+IB)/IA can be very high, 10-20 depending on the differences in source
impedances at local and remote end.

VA VA
p*ZL (1-p)*ZL EsB
EsA A IA IB B ZSB
ZSA
ZL

21 21
Rf

en05000217_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000217 V1 EN-US

Figure 96: Influence of fault infeed from remote end

The effect of fault current infeed from remote end is one of the most driving factors to justify
complementary protection to distance protection.

8.1.2.4 Load encroachment SEMOD168232-97 v3

Sometimes the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault on the
protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur when an external
fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the protected line. The effect of load
encroachment is illustrated to the left in figure 97. The entrance of the load impedance inside the
characteristic is not allowed and the way to handle this with conventional distance protection is to
consider this with the settings that is, to have a security margin between the distance zone and
the minimum load impedance. This has the drawback that it will reduce the sensitivity of the
protection that is, the ability to detect resistive faults.

The IED has a built in function which shapes the characteristic according to the right figure 97. The
load encroachment algorithm increases the possibility to detect high fault resistances, especially
for line to ground faults at remote end. For example, for a given setting of the load angle LdAngle
for the load encroachment function, the resistive blinder for the zone measurement can be
expanded according to the right in figure 97 given higher fault resistance coverage without risk for
unwanted operation due to load encroachment. This is valid in both directions.

The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavy loaded lines, where there
might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary sensitivity of
the distance protection. The function can also preferably be used on heavy loaded medium long
lines. For short lines the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage and load
encroachment is not a major problem. So, for short lines, the load encroachment function could
preferable be switched off.

The settings of the parameters for load encroachment are done in the Phase selection with load
enchroachment, quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS, 21) function.

196 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

Zm Zm

ZL

Load impedance area in LdAngle

forward direction LdAngle
R R
LdAngle
LdAngle
RldRev RLdFwd

ANSI05000495_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000495 V2 EN-US

Figure 97: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment characteristic

8.1.2.5 Long transmission line application SEMOD168232-128 v3

For long transmission lines the margin to the load impedance that is, to avoid load encroachment,
will normally be a major concern. It is difficult to achieve high sensitivity for line to ground-fault at
remote end of a long lines when the line is heavy loaded.

Definition of long lines with respect to the performance of distance protection can generally be
described as in table 23, long lines have SIR’s less than 0.5.

Table 23: Definition of long lines

Line category Vn Vn
110 kV 500 kV
Long lines 45-60 miles 200-250 miles
Very long lines >60 miles >250 miles

The possibility in IED to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero
sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-to-
ground fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high
resistive faults at the same time as the security is improved (risk for unwanted trip due to load
encroachment is eliminated), as shown in figure 98.

Line differential protection RED670 197

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

Zm

ZL

LdAngle LdAngle
R
LdAngle
LdAngle

RLdRev RLdFwd

en05000220_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000220 V1 EN-US

Figure 98: Characteristic for zone measurement for long line with load encroachment
activated

8.1.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling SEMOD168232-149 v2

General SEMOD168232-151 v2
Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get necessary area
for new lines.

Parallel lines introduce an error in the measurement due to the mutual coupling between the
parallel lines. The lines need not be of the same voltage to experience mutual coupling, and some
coupling exists even for lines that are separated by 100 meters or more. The reason to the
introduced error in measuring due to mutual coupling is the zero sequence voltage inversion that
occurs.

It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual impedances for
positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2%) of the self impedance and it is practice to
neglect them.

From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations (classes) that
must be considered when making the settings for the protection function. Those are:

• Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network

• Parallel circuits with common positive but isolated zero-sequence network
• Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources isolated

One example of class3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400 kV line and rail road
overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although it exists and is not
treated any further in this manual.

198 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

For each type of network class we can have three different topologies; the parallel line can be in
service, out of service, out of service and grounded in both ends.

The reach of the distance protection zone1 will be different depending on the operation condition
of the parallel line. It is therefore recommended to use the different setting groups to handle the
cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of service and grounded at both ends.

The distance protection within the IED can compensate for the influence of a zero-sequence
mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-ground faults in the following ways, by
using:

• The possibility of different setting values that influence the ground-return compensation for
different distance zones within the same group of setting parameters.
• Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a protected multi
circuit line.

Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits. The application guide mentioned
below recommends in more detail the setting practice for this particular type of line. The basic
principles also apply to other multi circuit lines.

Parallel line applications SEMOD168232-169 v2

This type of networks are defined as those networks where the parallel transmission lines
terminate at common nodes at both ends. We consider the three most common operation modes:

• parallel line in service

• parallel line out of service and grounded
• parallel line out of service and not grounded

Parallel line in service SEMOD168232-176 v3

This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission and
transmission networks.

Here is the description of what happens when a fault occurs on the parallel line, as shown in
figure 99.

From symmetrical components, it is possible to derive the impedance Z at the IED point for
normal lines without mutual coupling according to equation 75.

V ph Vph

Z = =
Z -Z0 1 I + 3I 0 × K
ph N

I + 3I ×
ph 0

3× Z 1

EQUATION1275 V3 EN-US (Equation 75)

Where:
Vph is phase-to-ground voltage at the IED point
Iph is phase current in the faulty phase
3I0 is ground-fault current
Z1 is positive sequence impedance
Z0 is zero sequence impedance

Line differential protection RED670 199

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

A B
FAULT

Z0m

21 21
en05000221_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000221 V1 EN-US

Figure 99: Class 1, parallel line in service

The equivalent circuit of the lines can be simplified, as shown in figure 100.

Z0 - Z0m
A

Z0m
C
Z0 - Z0m
B
99000038.vsd
IEC99000038 V1 EN-US

Figure 100: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit, parallel,
operating line with a single phase-to-ground-fault at the remote busbar
When mutual coupling is introduced, the voltage at the IED point A is changed, according to
equation 76.

æ Z 0 - Z1L Z 0m ö
V ph = Z1L × ç I ph + 3I 0 × L + 3I 0 p ÷
è 3 × Z1L 3 × Z1L ø
EQUATION1276 V4 EN-US (Equation 76)

By dividing equation 76 by equation 75 and after some simplification we can write the impedance
present to the IED at A side as:

æ 3I 0 × KNm ö
Z = Z 1L ç 1 + ÷
è I ph + 3I 0 × KN ø
EQUATION1277 V3 EN-US (Equation 77)

Where:
KNm = Z0m/(3 · Z1L)

200 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

The second part in the parentheses is the error introduced to the measurement of the line
impedance.

If the current on the parallel line has negative sign compared to the current on the protected line
that is, the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction compared to the current on the
protected line, the distance function overreaches. If the currents have the same direction, the
distance protection underreaches.

Maximum overreach occurs if the fault infeed from remote end is weak. If we consider a single
phase-to-ground fault at "p" unit of the line length from A to B on the parallel line for the case
when the fault infeed from remote end is zero, we can draw the voltage V in the faulty phase at A
side as in equation 78.

VA =p × Z 1L ( I ph + K N × 3I 0 + K Nm × 3I 0 p )
EQUATION1278 V4 EN-US (Equation 78)

Notice that the following relationship exists between the zero sequence currents:

3I 0 ⋅ Z 0 L = 3I 0 p ⋅ Z 0 L ( 2 − p )
EQUATION1279 V3 EN-US (Equation 79)

Simplification of equation 79, solving it for 3I0p and substitution of the result into equation 78
gives that the voltage can be drawn as:

æ 3I 0 × p ö
VA = p × Z 1L ç I ph + K N × 3I 0 + K Nm × ÷
è 2-p ø
EQUATION1280 V2 EN-US (Equation 80)

If we finally divide equation 80 with equation 75 we can draw the impedance present to the IED as

 3I 0 ⋅ p 
 I ph + KN ⋅ 3I 0 + KN m ⋅ 
 2− p 
Z = p ⋅ ZI L
 I ph + 3I 0 ⋅ KN 
 
 
EQUATION1379 V3 EN-US (Equation 81)

Calculation for a 400 kV line, where we for simplicity have excluded the resistance, gives with
X1L=0.48 Ohm/Mile, X0L=1.4Ohms/Mile, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of the line reactance p=71%
that is, the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%.

The zero-sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the protected
circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of the reach is most pronounced
with no infeed in the line IED closest to the fault. This reach reduction is normally less than 15%.
But when the reach is reduced at one line end, it is proportionally increased at the opposite line
end. So this 15% reach reduction does not significantly affect the operation of a permissive under-
reach scheme.

Line differential protection RED670 201

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

Parallel line out of service and grounded SEMOD168232-227

SEMOD168232-229 v3

A B
OPEN OPEN

Z0m
CLOSED CLOSED

21 21
en05000222_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000222 V1 EN-US

Figure 101: The parallel line is out of service and grounded

When the parallel line is out of service and grounded at both ends on the bus bar side of the line
CT so that zero sequence current can flow on the parallel line, the equivalent zero sequence circuit
of the parallel lines will be according to figure 101.

A I0 Z 0 Zm0

Zm0 I0
C

B Z 0 Zm0

99000039.vsd
DOCUMENT11520-IMG7100 V1 EN-US

Figure 102: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line that
operates with one circuit disconnected and grounded at both ends
Here the equivalent zero sequence impedance is equal to Z0-Z0m in parallel with (Z0-Z0m)/Z0-
Z0m+Z0m which is equal to equation 82.

2 2
Z 0 - Z om
ZE =
Z0
EQUATION2002 V4 EN-US (Equation 82)

The influence on the distance measurement can be a considerable overreach, which must be
considered when calculating the settings. All expressions below are proposed for practical use.
They assume the value of zero sequence, mutual resistance R0m equals to zero. They consider only
the zero-sequence, mutual reactance X0m. Calculate the equivalent X0E and R0E zero-sequence
parameters according to equation 83 and equation 84 for each particular line section and use
them for calculating the reach for the underreaching zone.

 X 0m 2 
R0 E = R0 ⋅ 1 + 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3502 V2 EN-US (Equation 83)

202 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

 X 0m 2 
X 0E = X 0 ⋅ 1 − 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3503 V2 EN-US (Equation 84)

Parallel line out of service and not grounded SEMOD168232-243 v3

A B
OPEN OPEN

Z0m
CLOSED CLOSED

21 21
en05000223_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000223 V1 EN-US

Figure 103: Parallel line is out of service and not grounded

When the parallel line is out of service and not grounded, the zero sequence on that line can only
flow through the line admittance to the ground. The line admittance is high which limits the zero
sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In practice, the equivalent zero sequence
impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus bar can be simplified to the circuit shown in
figure 103.

The line zero-sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the distance
protection in a faulty circuit. This means that the reach of the underreaching distance protection
zone is reduced if, due to operating conditions, the equivalent zero sequence impedance is set
according to the conditions when the parallel system is out of operation and grounded at both
ends.

I0 Z0 Z0m
A
Z0m I0
C
Z0 Z0m
B
99000040.vsd
IEC99000040 V1 EN-US

Figure 104: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line with one
circuit disconnected and not grounded
The reduction of the reach is equal to equation 85.

Line differential protection RED670 203

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

1
3
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 E + R f ) Zm0
2

KU = = 1-
1
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 + R f ) (
Z 0 × 2 × Z 1 + Z 0 + 3R f )
3
EQUATION1284 V1 EN-US (Equation 85)

This means that the reach is reduced in reactive and resistive directions. If the real and imaginary
components of the constant A are equal to equation 86 and equation 87.

Re( A ) = R 0 × (2 × R1 + R 0 + 3 × Rf ) - X 0 × ( X 0 + 2 × X 1)
EQUATION1285 V1 EN-US (Equation 86)

Im( A ) = X 0 × (2 × R1 + R0 + 3 × R1 ) + R0 × (2 × X 1 + X 0 )
EQUATION1286 V1 EN-US (Equation 87)

The real component of the KU factor is equal to equation 88.

( )
Re A ⋅ X m 0 2
( )
Re K u = 1 + 2
 Re ( A )  +  Im ( A ) 
2

   
EQUATION1287 V3 EN-US (Equation 88)

The imaginary component of the same factor is equal to equation 89.

( )
Im A × X m 0 2
( )
Im K U =
é Re ( A ) ù + é Im ( A ) ù
2 2

ë û ë û
EQUATION1288 V2 EN-US (Equation 89)

Ensure that the underreaching zones from both line ends will overlap a sufficient amount (at least
10%) in the middle of the protected circuit.

8.1.2.7 Tapped line application SEMOD168232-266 v2

204 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

SEMOD168232-268 v2

A B

BC

ANSI05000224-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000224 V2 EN-US

Figure 105: Example of tapped line with Auto transformer

This application gives rise to similar problem that was highlighted in section "Fault infeed from
remote end" that is, increased measured impedance due to fault current infeed. For example, for
faults between the T point and B station the measured impedance at A and C is as follows:

IA + IC
ZA =ZAT + ·ZTF
IA
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3509 V3 EN-US (Equation 90)

IA + IC V2
Z C = Z Trf + (Z CT + × Z TB ) × ( )2
IC V1
EQUATION1714 V1 EN-US (Equation 91)

Where:
ZAT and ZCT is the line impedance from the B respective C station to the T point.
IA and IC is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B.
V2/V1 Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at V1 side of the
transformer to the measuring side V2 (it is assumed that current and voltage
distance function is taken from V2 side of the transformer).

Line differential protection RED670 205

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T point to the
fault can be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T point to the fault
divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the high voltage side V1 has to be
transferred to the measuring voltage level by the transformer ratio.

Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current from one
end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example, for faults at T the
current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending on the system parameters (as
shown in the dotted line in figure 105), given that the distance protection in B to T will measure
wrong direction.

In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the impedances of
the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to accept zone2 trip in one end
or sequential trip in one end.

Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone1 that both gives
overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other zone1 settings
that is, without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are necessary to determine suitable
settings and selection of proper scheme communication.

Fault resistance SEMOD168232-289 v2

The performance of distance protection for single phase-to-ground faults is very important,
because normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are single phase-to-ground
faults. At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three parts: arc resistance, resistance of
a tower construction, and tower-footing resistance. The arc resistance can be calculated
according to Warrington's formula:

28707 × L
Rarc =
I1.4
EQUATION1456 V1 EN-US (Equation 92)

where:
L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection zone 1.
Consider approximately three-times arc foot spacing for the zone 2 and wind speed of approximately 30
m/h
I is the actual fault current in A.

In practice, the setting of fault resistance for both phase-to-ground (RFPG) and phase-to-phase
(RFPP) must be as high as possible without interfering with the load impedance to obtain reliable
fault detection.

8.1.2.8 Series compensation in power systems SEMOD168320-4 v2

The main purpose of series compensation in power systems is virtual reduction of line reactance
in order to enhance the power system stability and increase loadability of transmission corridors.
The principle is based on compensation of distributed line reactance by insertion of series
capacitor (SC). The generated reactive power provided by the capacitor is continuously
proportional to the square of the current flowing at the same time through the compensated line
and series capacitor. This means that the series capacitor has a self-regulating effect. When the
system loading increases, the reactive power generated by series capacitors increases as well. The
response of SCs is automatic, instantaneous and continuous.

206 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

The main benefits of incorporating series capacitors in transmission lines are:

• Steady state voltage regulation and raise of voltage collapse limit

• Increase power transfer capability by raising the transient stability limit
• Improved reactive power balance
• Increase in power transfer capacity
• Active load sharing between parallel circuits and loss reduction
• Reduced costs of power transmission due to decreased investment costs for new power lines

Steady state voltage regulation and increase of voltage collapse limit SEMOD168320-24 v2
A series capacitor is capable of compensating the voltage drop of the series inductance in a
transmission line, as shown in figure 106. During low loading, the system voltage drop is lower and
at the same time, the voltage drop on the series capacitor is lower. When the loading increases
and the voltage drop become larger, the contribution of the series capacitor increases and
therefore the system voltage at the receiving line end can be regulated.

Series compensation also extends the region of voltage stability by reducing the reactance of the
line and consequently the SC is valuable for prevention of voltage collapse. Figure 107 presents the
voltage dependence at receiving bus B (as shown in figure 106) on line loading and compensation
degree KC, which is defined according to equation 93. The effect of series compensation is in this
particular case obvious and self explanatory.

XC
KC =
X Line
EQUATION1895 V1 EN-US (Equation 93)

A typical 500 km long 500 kV line is considered with source impedance

Z SA1 = 0
EQUATION1896 V1 EN-US (Equation 94)

A B
Z SA1 Power line Load
EA ~
Seires
capacitor

en06000585.vsd
IEC06000585 V1 EN-US

Figure 106: A simple radial power system

Line differential protection RED670 207

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

500

V limit
400

300
V[kV]

200

P30

P50

P70
P0
100

0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800

P[MW]

en06000586_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000586 V1 EN-US

Figure 107: Voltage profile for a simple radial power line with 0, 30, 50 and 70% of
compensation

Increased power transfer capability by raising the first swing stability limit SEMOD168320-32 v2
Consider the simple one-machine and infinite bus system shown in figure 108.

A B
System
ZSA1 -jXC +jXLine
PMech
EA ~

en06000587.vsd
IEC06000587 V1 EN-US

Figure 108: One machine and infinite bus system

The equal-areas criterion is used to show the effectiveness of a series capacitor for improvement
of first swing transient stability (as shown in figure 109).

In steady state, the mechanical input power to the generator (PMech) is equal to the electrical
output power from the generator (PE ) and the generator angle is d0. If a 3-phase fault occurs at a
point near the machine, the electrical output of the generator reduces to zero. This means that the
speed of the generator increases and the angle difference between the generator and the infinite
bus increases during the fault. At the time of fault clearing, the angle difference has increased to
δC. After reclosing of the system, the transmitted power exceeds the mechanical input power and
the generator deaccelerates. The generator decelerates as long as equal area condition AACC=ADEC
has not been fulfilled. The critical condition for post-fault system stability is that the angular
displacement after fault clearing and during the deceleration does not exceed its critical limit δCR,
because if it does, the system cannot get back to equilibrium and the synchronism is lost. The first
swing stability and the stability margin can be evaluated by studying the different areas in figure
109 for the same system, once without SC and once with series compensation. The areas under
the corresponding P – δ curves correspond to energy and the system remains stable if the
accelerating energy that the generator picks up during the fault is lower than the decelerating
energy that is transferred across the transmission line during the first system swing upon fault
clearing.

208 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

without SC with SC

P [ pu ]

P [ pu ]
A SM

A DEC

A DEC
PMech A SM P Mech

AACC AACC

0 C EA CR 0 C EA CR

en06000588.vsd
IEC06000588 V1 EN-US

Figure 109: Equal area criterion and first swing stability without and with series
compensation
This means that the system is stable if AACC ≤ (ADEC + ASM). The stability margin is given by the
difference between the available decelerating energy (area between the P (δ) and PMech and the
angular difference between δC and δCR ) and the accelerating energy. It is represented in figure 109
by the area ASM. Notice that a substantial increase in the stability margin is obtained by installing a
series capacitor. The series compensation can improve the situation in two ways, it can decrease
the initial angle difference δ0 corresponding to a certain power transfer and it also shifts the P – δ
curve upwards.

Improve reactive power balance SEMOD168320-43 v2

A series capacitor increases its output of reactive power instantaneously, continuously and
automatically with increasing line load. It is thus a self-regulating device, which improves voltage
regulation and reduces the need for other means of voltage control for example, shunt
compensation. The reactive power balance of a series compensated line is shown in figure 110 as
an example for 500 km long 500 kV transmission line with 50% compensation degree.

Q
(Mvar) 600
(S.C.)
400
Capacitive
200
Power flow
(MW)
500 1000 1500
200
(T.L. + S.C.)
Inductive
400

600
Transmission 500 kV
800 Line 500 km (T.L.)
Series
1000 Compensation k = 50 %

en06000589.vsd
IEC06000589 V1 EN-US

Figure 110: Self-regulating effect of reactive power balance

Line differential protection RED670 209

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

Increase in power transfer SEMOD168320-45 v2

The increase in power transfer capability as a function of the degree of compensation for a
transmission line can be explained by studying the circuit shown in figure 111. The power transfer
on the transmission line is given by the equation 95:

VA × VB × sin ( d ) VA × VB × sin ( d )
P= =
X Line - X C X Line × (1 - K C )
EQUATION1994-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 95)

The compensation degree Kc is defined as equation

VA DV VB

PA A B PB
-jX C +jXL
VA VB d
QA QB

en06000590_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000590 V1 EN-US

Figure 111: Transmission line with series capacitor

The effect on the power transfer when considering a constant angle difference (δ) between the
line ends is illustrated in figure 112. Practical compensation degree runs from 20 to 70 percent.
Transmission capability increases of more than two times can be obtained in practice.

Multiple of power over

a non-compensated line
Power transfer with constant angle difference
3.5

3
Increase in power transfer

2.5

1.5

1
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
Degree of series compensation [%] Degree of
compensation
IEC06000592-2-en.vsd
IEC06000592 V2 EN-US

Figure 112: Increase in power transfer over a transmission line depending on degree of series
compensation

Active load sharing between parallel circuits and loss reduction SEMOD168320-79 v2
A series capacitor can be used to control the distribution of active power between parallel
transmission circuits. The compensation of transmission lines with sufficient thermal capacity can
relieve the possible overloading of other parallel lines. This distribution is governed by the
reactance, while the losses are determined by the resistance. A properly designed series
compensation system can considerably reduce the total transmission system losses, as shown in
figure 113.

210 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

-jXC
jXL1 RL1

Line 1

jXL2 R L2

Line 2

en06000593.vsd
IEC06000593 V1 EN-US

Figure 113: Two parallel lines with series capacitor for optimized load sharing and loss
reduction
To minimize the losses, the series capacitor must be installed in the transmission line with the
lower resistance. The size of the series capacitor that minimizes the total losses is given the
following expression:

X L1 - X C RL1
=
X L2 RL 2
EQUATION1899 V1 EN-US (Equation 96)

Reduced costs of power transmission due to decreased investment costs for new power
line SEMOD168320-88 v2
As shown in figure 112 the line loading can easily be increased 1.5-2 times by series compensation.
Thus, the required number of transmission lines needed for a certain power transfer can be
significantly reduced. The cost of series compensation is small compared to the cost of a
transmission line. When evaluating the cost of a transmission system upgrade also the cost of
secondary equipment such as eventual upgrading of line protections on the compensated as well
as, adjacent lines should be considered. The main advantages of series compensation against the
new transmission line within the same corridor are:

• Significantly reduced investment costs; the same increase in power transmission for up to
90% reduced costs
• In many cases, the only practical way to increase the transmission capacity of a corridor
• Series compensation shortens the lead times
• Environmental impact

EA ~ Series compensation ~ EB

New transmission line

en06000594.vsd
IEC06000594 V1 EN-US

Figure 114: Series compensation is an important alternative to new transmission lines

Advancements in series compensation using thyristor switching technology SEMOD168320-102 v3

A thyristor switched series capacitor (TSSC) can be used for power flow control. This is performed
by changing the reactance of the transmission circuit in discrete steps, as shown in figure 115. A
TSSC typically consists of a few segments in series that can be inserted independently of each
other in order to achieve different total series capacitor reactance.

Line differential protection RED670 211

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

-jXC -jX C -jXC

Fw Fw Fw

Rv Rv Rv

en06000595.vsd
IEC06000595 V1 EN-US

Figure 115: Thyristor switched series capacitor

-jXC
iL
+ -

VC
Fw
iV

jX L

Rv
en06000596_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000596 V1 EN-US

Figure 116: Thyristor controlled series capacitor

IL Line current

IV Current through the thyristor

UC Voltage over the series capacitor

XC Rated reactance of the series capacitor

A thyristor controlled series capacitor (TCSC) allows continuous control of the series capacitor
reactance. This is achieved by adding current through the capacitor via the parallel thyristor valve
path see figure 116. The main circuit of the TCSC consists of a capacitor bank and a thyristor
controlled inductive branch connected in parallel. The capacitor bank may have a value of for
example, 10...30 Ω/phase and a rated continuous current of 1500...3000 A. The capacitor bank for
each phase is mounted on a platform providing full insulation towards ground. The thyristor valve
contains a string of series connected high power thyristors with a maximum total blocking voltage
in the range of hundreds of kV. The inductor is an air-core reactor with a few mH inductance. The
wave forms of a TCSC in capacitive boost mode are shown in figure 117.

212 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

IL 0

-2
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2
5

IV 0

-5
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2
50

UC 0

-50
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2
0

XC -20

-40
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2

en06000597.vsd

IEC06000597 V1 EN-US

Figure 117: TCSC wave forms presented in capacitive boost mode for a typical 50Hz system
The apparent impedance of the TCSC (the impedance seen by the power system) can typically be
increased to up to 3 times the physical impedance of the capacitor, see figure 118. This high
apparent reactance will mainly be used for damping of power oscillations.

Imperatriz TCSC, Operating range

3.2
B C D
3

2.8

2.6

2.4

2.2
Continuous 30 min 10s
2

1.8

1.6
Xtcsc/Xc (pu)

1.4
A
1.2

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2
Continuous
0 30 min. overload
-0.2 10s overload
E F G Bypass mode
-0.4
Series5
0 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
Line current (Arms)

en06000598.vsd
IEC06000598 V1 EN-US

Figure 118: Operating range of a TCSC installed for damping of power oscillations (example)
During continuous valve bypass the TCSC represents an inductive impedance of about 20% of the
capacitor impedance. Both operation in capacitive boost mode and valve bypass mode can be
used for damping of power swings. The utilization of valve bypass increases the dynamic range of
the TCSC and improves the TCSC effectiveness in power oscillation damping.

Line differential protection RED670 213

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

8.1.2.9 Challenges in protection of series compensated and adjacent power lines SEMOD168320-10 v2

System planning does not consider any more possible protection issues and difficulties, when
deciding for a particular, non conventional solution of certain operation and stability problems. It
is supposed that modern communication and state of the art computer technologies provides
good basis for the required solution. This applies also to protection issues in series compensated
networks. Different physical phenomena, which influence conventional principles of IED
protection, like distance protection, phase comparison protection, are well known and accordingly
considered in IED design. Some other issues, like influence of controlled thyristors in series
capacitor banks are getting increased importance, although not as high as they would deserve.

The most important challenges, which influence the operation of different protection functions in
the greatest extent, are described in this chapter.

Voltage and current inversion SEMOD168320-168 v2

Series capacitors influence the magnitude and the direction of fault currents in series
compensated networks. They consequently influence phase angles of voltages measured in
different points of series compensated networks and this performances of different protection
functions, which have their operation based on properties of measured voltage and current
phasors.

Voltage inversion SEMOD168320-171 v2

Figure 119 presents a part of series compensated line with reactance XL1 between the IED point
and the fault in point F of series compensated line. The voltage measurement is supposed to be
on the bus side, so that series capacitor appears between the IED point and fault on the protected
line. Figure 120 presents the corresponding phasor diagrams for the cases with bypassed and fully
inserted series capacitor.

Voltage distribution on faulty lossless serial compensated line from fault point F to the bus is
linearly dependent on distance from the bus, if there is no capacitor included in scheme (as shown
in figure 120). Voltage VM measured at the bus is equal to voltage drop D VL on the faulty line and
lags the current IF by 90 electrical degrees.

The situation changes with series capacitor included in circuit between the IED point and the fault
position. The fault current IF (see figure 120) is increased due to the series capacitor, generally
decreases total impedance between the sources and the fault. The reactive voltage drop D VL on
XL1 line impedance leads the current by 90 degrees. Voltage drop DVC on series capacitor lags the
fault current by 90 degrees. Note that line impedance XL1 could be divided into two parts: one
between the IED point and the capacitor and one between the capacitor and the fault position.
The resulting voltage VM in IED point is this way proportional to sum of voltage drops on partial
impedances between the IED point and the fault position F, as presented by

VM = I F × j ( X L1 - X C )
EQUATION1995-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 97)

214 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

With bypassed With inserted

capacitor capacitor
Source voltage

Pre -fault voltage

V’ M Fault voltage

VM
V

Source
XS XL1
~ XF
IF XC

21

en06000605_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000605 V1 EN-US

Figure 119: Voltage inversion on series compensated line

VS
xVS

xVS
VS

With bypassed With inserted

capacitor capacitor
x VL
V’M=xV L

IF IF
x VC

VM

en06000606_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000606 V1 EN-US

Figure 120: Phasor diagrams of currents and voltages for the bypassed and inserted series
capacitor during voltage inversion
It is obvious that voltage VM will lead the fault current IF as long as XL1> XC. This situation
corresponds, from the directionality point of view, to fault conditions on line without series
capacitor. Voltage VM in IED point will lag the fault current IF in case when:

X L1 < X C < X S + X L1
EQUATION1902 V1 EN-US (Equation 98)

Where
XS is the source impedance behind the IED

The IED point voltage inverses its direction due to presence of series capacitor and its dimension.
It is a common practice to call this phenomenon voltage inversion. Its consequences on operation
of different protections in series compensated networks depend on their operating principle. The
most known effect has voltage inversion on directional measurement of distance IEDs (see
chapter "Distance protection" for more details), which must for this reason comprise special
measures against this phenomenon.

Line differential protection RED670 215

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

There will be no voltage inversion phenomena for reverse faults in system with VTs located on the
bus side of series capacitor. The allocation of VTs to the line side does not eliminate the
phenomenon, because it appears again for faults on the bus side of IED point.

Current inversion SEMOD168320-206 v2

Figure 121 presents part of a series compensated line with corresponding equivalent voltage
source. It is generally anticipated that fault current IF flows on non-compensated lines from power
source towards the fault F on the protected line. Series capacitor may change the situation.

With inserted
capacitor
Source voltage v
VM

Pre -fault voltage

With bypassed
capacitor V’ M Fault voltage

Source
XS XL1
~ XF
IF XC

21

en06000607_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000607 V1 EN-US

Figure 121: Current inversion on series compensated line

The relative phase position of fault current IF compared to the source voltage VS depends in
general on the character of the resultant reactance between the source and the fault position. Two
possibilities appear:

X S - X C + X L1 > 0
X S - X C + X L1 < 0
EQUATION1935 V1 EN-US (Equation 99)

The first case corresponds also to conditions on non compensated lines and in cases, when the
capacitor is bypassed either by spark gap or by the bypass switch, as shown in phasor diagram in
figure 122. The resultant reactance is in this case of inductive nature and the fault currents lags
source voltage by 90 electrical degrees.

The resultant reactance is of capacitive nature in the second case. Fault current will for this reason
lead the source voltage by 90 electrical degrees, which means that reactive current will flow from
series compensated line to the system. The system conditions are in such case presented by
equation 100

X C > X S + X L1
EQUATION1936 V1 EN-US (Equation 100)

216 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

VS HVS
VS
HVS

VM
With bypassed With inserted

HVC
V’M=HV L capacitor capacitor

IF IF

HVL
en06000608_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000608 V1 EN-US

Figure 122: Phasor diagrams of currents and voltages for the bypassed and inserted series
capacitor during current inversion
It is a common practice to call this phenomenon current inversion. Its consequences on operation
of different protections in series compensated networks depend on their operating principle. The
most known effect has current inversion on operation of distance IEDs (as shown in section
"Distance protection" for more details), which cannot be used for the protection of series
compensated lines with possible current inversion. Equation 100 shows also big dependence of
possible current inversion on series compensated lines on location of series capacitors. XL1 = 0 for
faults just behind the capacitor when located at line IED and only the source impedance prevents
current inversion. Current inversion has been considered for many years only a theoretical
possibility due to relatively low values of source impedances (big power plants) compared to the
capacitor reactance. The possibility for current inversion in modern networks is increasing and
must be studied carefully during system preparatory studies.

The current inversion phenomenon should not be studied only for the purposes of protection
devices measuring phase currents. Directional comparison protections, based on residual (zero
sequence) and negative sequence currents should be considered in studies as well. Current
inversion in zero sequence systems with low zero sequence source impedance (a number of power
transformers connected in parallel) must be considered as practical possibility in many modern
networks.

Low frequency transients SEMOD168320-220 v2

Series capacitors introduce in power systems oscillations in currents and voltages, which are not
common in non-compensated systems. These oscillations have frequencies lower than the rated
system frequency and may cause delayed increase of fault currents, delayed operation of spark
gaps as well as, delayed operation of protective IEDs. The most obvious difference is generally
seen in fault currents. Figure 123 presents a simplified picture of a series compensated network
with basic line parameters during fault conditions. We study the basic performances for the same
network with and without series capacitor. Possible effects of spark gap flashing or MOV
conducting are neglected. The time dependence of fault currents and the difference between
them are of interest.

-jXC
RL jXL
i L(t)

eG (t) ~
F

en06000609.vsd
IEC06000609 V1 EN-US

Figure 123: Simplified equivalent scheme of SC network during fault conditions

Line differential protection RED670 217

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

We consider the instantaneous value of generator voltage following the sine wave according to
equation 101

eG = EG × sin (w × t + l )
EQUATION1904 V1 EN-US (Equation 101)

The basic loop differential equation describing the circuit in figure 123 without series capacitor is
presented by equation 102

diL
LL × + RL × iL = EG × sin (w × t + l )
dt
EQUATION1905 V1 EN-US (Equation 102)

The solution over line current is presented by group of equations 103

R
EG é EG ù - t × LL
L

iL = × sin (w × t + l - j ) + ê I L ( t = 0) - × sin ( l - j ) ú × e
Z ë Z û
Z = RL 2 + (w × LL )
2

æ w × LL ö
j = atg ç ÷
è RL ø
EQUATION1906 V1 EN-US (Equation 103)

The line fault current consists of two components:

• The steady-state component which magnitude depends on generator voltage and absolute
value of impedance included in the circuit
• The transient DC component, which magnitude depends on the fault incident angle decays
with the circuit time constant

LL RL [ s ]
EQUATION1907 V1 EN-US (Equation 104)

The basic loop differential equation describing the circuit in figure 123 with series capacitor is
presented by equation 105.

d 2il di 1
LL × 2 + RL × L + iL (t ) = EG × w × cos (w × t + l )
dt dt C L
EQUATION1908 V1 EN-US (Equation 105)

The solution over line current is in this case presented by group of equations 106. The fault current
consists also here from the steady-state part and the transient part. The difference with non-
compensated conditions is that

218 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

• The total loop impedance decreases for the negative reactance of the series capacitor, which
in fact increases the magnitude of the fault current
• The transient part consists of the damped oscillation, which has an angular frequency b and is
dying out with a time constant a

EG
iL = × sin (w × t + l - j ) + [ K1 × cos ( b × t ) + K 2 × sin ( b × t )] × e -a ×t
Z SC
2
æ 1 ö
Z SC = RL + ç w × LL -
2
÷
è w × CL ø
EG
K1 = I L ( t = 0) - × sin ( l - j )
Z SC
é R E × w × LL ù
ê EG × sin ( l ) - VC ( t = 0) - L × I L ( t = 0) - G × cos ( l - j ) - ú
1 2 Z SC
K2 = ê ú
b × LL ê EG × RL ú
ê - 2 × Z × sin ( l - j ) ú
ë SC û
RL
a=
2 × LL

1 RL2
b = -
LL × C L 4 × L2L
EQUATION1996-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 106)

The transient part has an angular frequency b and is damped out with the time-constant α.

The difference in performance of fault currents for a three-phase short circuit at the end of a
typical 500 km long 500 kV line is presented in figure 124.

The short circuit current on a non-compensated line is lower in magnitude, but comprises at the
beginning only a transient DC component, which diminishes completely in approximately 120ms.
The final magnitude of the fault current on compensated line is higher due to the decreased
apparent impedance of a line (60% compensation degree has been considered for a particular
case), but the low frequency oscillation is also obvious. The increase of fault current immediately
after the fault incidence (on figure 124 at approximately 21ms) is much slower than on non-
compensated line. This occurs due to the energy stored in capacitor before the fault.

Line differential protection RED670 219

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

10

I[pu]
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2

10

t[ms ]
en06000610.vsd

IEC06000610 V1 EN-US

Figure 124: Short circuit currents for the fault at the end of 500 km long 500 kV line without
and with SC

Location of instrument transformers SEMOD168320-261 v2

Location of instrument transformers relative to the line end series capacitors plays an important
role regarding the dependability and security of a complete protection scheme. It is on the other
hand necessary to point out the particular dependence of those protection schemes, which need
for their operation information on voltage in IED point.

Protection schemes with their operating principle depending on current measurement only, like
line current differential protection are relatively independent on CT location. Figure 125 shows
schematically the possible locations of instrument transformers related to the position of line-end
series capacitor.

- jX C
CT 1 CT 2

VT1 VT 2
en06000611_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000611 V1 EN-US

Figure 125: Possible positions of instrument transformers relative to line end series
capacitor

Bus side instrument transformers SEMOD168320-266 v2

CT1 and VT1 on figure 125 represent the case with bus side instrument transformers. The
protection devices are in this case exposed to possible voltage and current inversion for line
faults, which decreases the required dependability. In addition to this may series capacitor cause
negative apparent impedance to distance IEDs on protected and adjacent lines as well for close-in
line faults (see also figure 127 LOC=0%), which requires special design of distance measuring
elements to cope with such phenomena. The advantage of such installation is that the protection
zone covers also the series capacitor as a part of protected power line, so that line protection will
detect and cleared also parallel faults on series capacitor.

220 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

Line side instrument transformers SEMOD168320-271 v2

CT2 and VT2 on figure 125 represent the case with line side instrument transformers. The
protective devices will not be exposed to voltage and current inversion for faults on the protected
line, which increases the dependability. Distance protection zone 1 may be active in most
applications, which is not the case when the bus side instrument transformers are used.

Distance IEDs are exposed especially to voltage inversion for close-in reverse faults, which
decreases the security. The effect of negative apparent reactance must be studied seriously in
case of reverse directed distance protection zones used by distance IEDs for teleprotection
schemes. Series capacitors located between the voltage instruments transformers and the buses
reduce the apparent zero sequence source impedance and may cause voltage as well as current
inversion in zero sequence equivalent networks for line faults. It is for this reason absolutely
necessary to study the possible effect on operation of zero sequence directional ground-fault
overcurrent protection before its installation.

Dual side instrument transformers SEMOD168320-277 v2

Installations with line side CT2 and bus side VT1 are not very common. More common are
installations with line side VT2 and bus side CT1. They appear as de facto installations also in
switchyards with double-bus double-breaker and breaker-and-a-half arrangement. The advantage
of such schemes is that the unit protections cover also for shunt faults in series capacitors and at
the same time the voltage inversion does not appear for faults on the protected line.

Many installations with line-end series capacitors have available voltage instrument transformers
on both sides. In such case it is recommended to use the VTs for each particular protection
function to best suit its specific characteristics and expectations on dependability and security.
The line side VT can for example be used by the distance protection and the bus side VT by the
directional residual OC ground fault protection.

Apparent impedances and MOV influence SEMOD168320-285 v2

Series capacitors reduce due to their character the apparent impedance measured by distance
IEDs on protected power lines. Figure 126 presents typical locations of capacitor banks on power
lines together with corresponding compensation degrees. Distance IED near the feeding bus will
see in different cases fault on remote end bus depending on type of overvoltage protection used
on capacitor bank (spark gap or MOV) and SC location on protected power line.

100 %
66%
50 %
33%
0%
EA ~ X
KC = 80% 33 % 50 % 33% 80 %
21

en06000612_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000612 V1 EN-US

Figure 126: Typical locations of capacitor banks on series compensated line

Implementation of spark gaps for capacitor overvoltage protection makes the picture relatively
simple, because they either flash over or not. The apparent impedance corresponds to the
impedance of non-compensated line, as shown in figure 127 case KC = 0%.

Line differential protection RED670 221

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

KC = 80% KC = 50% KC = 2 x 33% KC = 80%

KC = 0% LOC = 0% LOC = 50% LOC = 33%, 66% LOC = 100%

jX
jX

jX

jX

jX
R R R R R

en06000613.vsd
IEC06000613 V1 EN-US

Figure 127: Apparent impedances seen by distance IED for different SC locations and spark
gaps used for overvoltage protection

iM MOV

-jX C
iL iC

VC

MOV protected series capacitor

20 100

10 50

0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

50
10

100
20
Line current as a function of time Capacitor voltage as a function of time

20 20

10 10

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

10
10

20
20

Capacitor current as a function of time MOV current as a function of time

en06000614_ansi.vsd

ANSI06000614 V1 EN-US

Figure 128: MOV protected capacitor with examples of capacitor voltage and corresponding
currents
The impedance apparent to distance IED is always reduced for the amount of capacitive reactance
included between the fault and IED point, when the spark gap does not flash over, as presented
for typical cases in figure 127. Here it is necessary to distinguish between two typical cases:

• Series capacitor only reduces the apparent impedance, but it does not cause wrong
directional measurement. Such cases are presented in figure 127 for 50% compensation at
50% of line length and 33% compensation located on 33% and 66% of line length. The remote
end compensation has the same effect.
• The voltage inversion occurs in cases when the capacitor reactance between the IED point and
fault appears bigger than the corresponding line reactance, Figure 23, 80% compensation at
local end. A voltage inversion occurs in IED point and the distance IED will see wrong direction
towards the fault, if no special measures have been introduced in its design.

222 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

The situation differs when metal oxide varistors (MOV) are used for capacitor overvoltage
protection. MOVs conduct current, for the difference of spark gaps, only when the instantaneous
voltage drop over the capacitor becomes higher than the protective voltage level in each half-cycle
separately, see figure 128.

Extensive studies at Bonneville Power Administration in USA ( ref. Goldsworthy, D,L “A Linearized
Model for MOV-Protected series capacitors” Paper 86SM357–8 IEEE/PES summer meeting in
Mexico City July 1986) have resulted in construction of a non-linear equivalent circuit with series
connected capacitor and resistor. Their value depends on complete line (fault) current and
protection factor kp. The later is defined by equation 107.

VMOV
kp =
U NC
EQUATION2001-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 107)

Where
UMOV is the maximum instantaneous voltage expected between the capacitor immediately before the MOV has
conducted or during operation of the MOV, divaded by √2
UNC is the rated voltage in RMS of the series capacitor
jX

jX

jX

I I
£1 =2
Kp × In Kp × In

I
Kp × In
= 10

R R R

en06000615.vsd
IEC06000615 V1 EN-US

Figure 129: Equivalent impedance of MOV protected capacitor in dependence of protection

factor KP
Figure 129 presents three typical cases for series capacitor located at line end (case LOC=0% in
figure 127).

• Series capacitor prevails the scheme as long as the line current remains lower or equal to its
protective current level (I £ kp · INC). Line apparent impedance is in this case reduced for the
complete reactance of a series capacitor.

• 50% of capacitor reactance appears in series with resistance, which corresponds to

approximately 36% of capacitor reactance when the line current equals two times the
protective current level (I £ 2· kp· INC). This information has high importance for setting of
distance protection IED reach in resistive direction, for phase to ground fault measurement as
well as for phase to phase measurement.

• Series capacitor becomes nearly completely bridged by MOV when the line current becomes
higher than 10-times the protective current level (I £ 10· kp· INC).

Line differential protection RED670 223

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

8.1.2.10 Impact of series compensation on protective IED of adjacent lines SEMOD168320-318 v2

Voltage inversion is not characteristic for the buses and IED points closest to the series
compensated line only. It can spread also deeper into the network and this way influences the
selection of protection devices (mostly distance IEDs) on remote ends of lines adjacent to the
series compensated circuit, and sometimes even deeper in the network.

VA VD
ZSA IA
EA ~ ZLA
A
-jXC
IF
F
VB Z LF
ZSB IB
EB ~ ZLB
B
D

en06000616_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000616 V1 EN-US

Figure 130: Voltage inversion in series compensated network due to fault current infeed
Voltage at the B bus (as shown in figure 130) is calculated for the loss-less system according to the
equation below.

VB = VD + I B × jX LB = ( I A + I B ) × j ( X LF - X C ) + I B × jX LB
EQUATION1998-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 108)

Further development of equation 108 gives the following expressions:

é æ IA ö ù
VB = jI B × ê X LB + ç 1 + ÷ × ( X LF - X C ) ú
ë è IB ø û
EQUATION1999-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 109)

X LB
X C (VB = 0 ) = + X LF
IA
1+
IB
EQUATION2000-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 110)

Equation 109 indicates the fact that the infeed current IA increases the apparent value of
capacitive reactance in system: bigger the infeed of fault current, bigger the apparent series
capacitor in a complete series compensated network. It is possible to say that equation 110
indicates the deepness of the network to which it will feel the influence of series compensation
through the effect of voltage inversion.

It is also obvious that the position of series capacitor on compensated line influences in great
extent the deepness of voltage inversion in adjacent system. Line impedance XLF between D bus
and the fault becomes equal to zero, if the capacitor is installed near the bus and the fault appears
just behind the capacitor. This may cause the phenomenon of voltage inversion to be expanded
very deep into the adjacent network, especially if on one hand the compensated line is very long
with high degree of compensation, and the adjacent lines are, on the other hand, relatively short.

Extensive system studies are necessary before final decision is made on implementation and
location of series capacitors in network. It requires to correctly estimate their influence on
performances of (especially) existing distance IEDs. It is possible that the costs for number of

224 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

protective devices, which should be replaced by more appropriate ones due to the effect of
applied series compensation, influences the future position of series capacitors in power network.

Possibilities for voltage inversion at remote buses should not be studied for short circuits with
zero fault resistance only. It is necessary to consider cases with higher fault resistances, for which
spark gaps or MOVs on series capacitors will not conduct at all. At the same time this kind of
investigation must consider also the maximum sensitivity and possible resistive reach of distance
protection devices, which on the other hand simplifies the problem.

Application of MOVs as non-linear elements for capacitor overvoltage protection makes simple
calculations often impossible. Different kinds of steady-state network simulations are in such
cases unavoidable.

8.1.2.11 Distance protection SEMOD168320-338 v3

Distance protection due to its basic characteristics, is the most used protection principle on
series compensated and adjacent lines worldwide. It has at the same time caused a lot of
challenges to protection society, especially when it comes to directional measurement and
transient overreach.

Distance IED in fact does not measure impedance or quotient between line current and voltage.
Quantity 1= Operating quantity - Restraing quantity Quantity 2= Polarizing quantity. Typically
Operating quantity is the replica impedance drop. Restraining quantity is the system voltage
Polarizing quantity shapes the characteristics in different way and is not discussed here.

Distance IEDs comprise in their replica impedance only the replicas of line inductance and
resistance, but they do not comprise any replica of series capacitor on the protected line and its
protection circuits (spark gap and or MOV). This way they form wrong picture of the protected line
and all “solutions” related to distance protection of series compensated and adjacent lines are
concentrated on finding some parallel ways, which may help eliminating the basic reason for
wrong measurement. The most known of them are decrease of the reach due to presence of series
capacitor, which apparently decreases the line reactance, and introduction of permanent memory
voltage in directional measurement.

Series compensated and adjacent lines are often the more important links in a transmission
networks and delayed fault clearance is undesirable. This makes it necessary to install distance
protection in combination with telecommunication. The most common is distance protection in
Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip mode (POTT).

Underreaching and overreaching schemes SEMOD168320-348 v2

It is a basic rule that the underreaching distance protection zone should under no circumstances
overreach for the fault at the remote end bus, and the overreaching zone should always, under all
system conditions, cover the same fault. In order to obtain section selectivity, the first distance
(underreaching) protection zone must be set to a reach less than the reactance of the
compensated line in accordance with figure 131.

Zone 2 A
A B
-j X
C
Zone 1 A
X 12

X 11
Zone 1 B
G
DA DB

Zone 2 B
en06000618.vsd
IEC06000618 V1 EN-US

Figure 131: Underreaching (Zone 1) and overreaching (Zone 2) on series compensated line

Line differential protection RED670 225

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

The underreaching zone will have reduced reach in cases of bypassed series capacitor, as shown in
the dashed line in figure 131. The overreaching zone (Zone 2) can this way cover bigger portion of
the protected line, but must always cover with certain margin the remote end bus. Distance
protection Zone 1 is often set to

X Z 1 = K S × ( X 11 + X 12 - X C )
EQUATION1914 V1 EN-US (Equation 111)

Here KS is a safety factor, presented graphically in figure 132, which covers for possible
overreaching due to low frequency (sub-harmonic) oscillations. Here it should be noted separately
that compensation degree KC in figure 132 relates to total system reactance, inclusive line and
source impedance reactance. The same setting applies regardless MOV or spark gaps are used for
capacitor overvoltage protection.

Equation 111 is applicable for the case when the VTs are located on the bus side of series
capacitor. It is possible to remove XC from the equation in cases of VTs installed in line side, but it
is still necessary to consider the safety factor KS .

If the capacitor is out of service or bypassed, the reach with these settings can be less than 50%
of protected line dependent on compensation degree and there will be a section, G in figure 131, of
the power line where no tripping occurs from either end.

1.0
KS

0.8

0.6

0.4
0.2

0 20 40 60 80 100
KC[%]

en06000619.vsd
IEC06000619 V1 EN-US

Figure 132: Underreaching safety factor KS in dependence on system compensation degree

KC
For that reason permissive underreaching schemes can hardly be used as a main protection.
Permissive overreaching distance protection or some kind of directional or unit protection must
be used.

The overreach must be of an order so it overreaches when the capacitor is bypassed or out of
service. Figure 133 shows the permissive zones. The first underreaching zone can be kept in the
total protection but it only has the feature of a back-up protection for close up faults. The
overreach is usually of the same order as the permissive zone. When the capacitor is in operation
the permissive zone will have a very high degree of overreach which can be considered as a
disadvantage from a security point of view.

226 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

A B
-jX C Permissive Zone A
X 12
X 11
Permissive Zone B
DA DB

en06000620_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000620 V1 EN-US

Figure 133: Permissive overreach distance protection scheme

Negative IED impedance, positive fault current (voltage inversion) SEMOD168320-367 v3

Assume in equation 112

X 11 < X C < X S + X 11
EQUATION1898 V1 EN-US (Equation 112)

and in figure 134

a three phase fault occurs beyond the capacitor. The resultant IED impedance seen from the DB
IED location to the fault may become negative (voltage inversion) until the spark gap has flashed.

Distance protections of adjacent power lines shown in figure 134 are influenced by this negative
impedance. If the intermediate infeed of short circuit power by other lines is taken into
consideration, the negative voltage drop on XC is amplified and a protection far away from the
faulty line can maloperate by its instantaneous operating distance zone, if no precaution is taken.
Impedances seen by distance IEDs on adjacent power lines are presented by equations 113 to 116.

I = I1 + I 2 + I 3
EQUATION1915 V1 EN-US (Equation 113)

IF
X DA1 = X A1 + ⋅ ( X C − X11 )
I A1
EQUATION1916 V2 EN-US (Equation 114)

IF
X DA2 = X A2 + ⋅ ( X C − X11 )
I A2
EQUATION1917 V2 EN-US (Equation 115)

IF
X DA3 = X A3 + ⋅ ( X C − X11 )
I A3
EQUATION1918 V2 EN-US (Equation 116)

Line differential protection RED670 227

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

A1 B
jX 1
IA1
A2
-jX C
jX 2 jX11
X
A3 IA2 F
IF
jX 3

DA1 IA3
DB
DA2

DA3

en06000621_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000621 V1 EN-US

Figure 134: Distance IED on adjacent

power lines are influenced by
the negative impedance

Normally the first zone of this protection must be delayed until the gap flashing has taken place. If
the delay is not acceptable, some directional comparison must also be added to the protection of
all adjacent power lines. As stated above, a good protection system must be able to operate
correctly both before and after gap flashing occurs. Distance protection can be used, but careful
studies must be made for each individual case. The rationale described applies to both
conventional spark gap and MOV protected capacitors.

Special attention should be paid to selection of distance protection on shorter adjacent power
lines in cases of series capacitors located at the line end. In such case the reactance of a short
adjacent line may be lower than the capacitor reactance and voltage inversion phenomenon may
occur also on remote end of adjacent lines. Distance protection of such line must have built-in
functionality which applies normally to protection of series compensated lines.

It usually takes a bit of a time before the spark gap flashes, and sometimes the fault current will be
of such a magnitude that there will not be any flashover and the negative impedance will be
sustained. If equation 117

X 11 < X C < X S + X 11
EQUATION1898 V1 EN-US (Equation 117)

in figure 135, the fault current will have the same direction as when the capacitor is bypassed. So,
the directional measurement is correct but the impedance measured is negative and if the
characteristic crosses the origin shown in figure 135 the IED cannot operate. However, if there is a
memory circuit designed so it covers the negative impedance, a three phase fault can be
successfully cleared by the distance protection. As soon as the spark gap has flashed the situation
for protection will be as for an ordinary fault. However, a good protection system should be able
to operate correctly before and after gap flashing occurs.

228 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

jX jX X12

X 12
R RV

X11

X FW
X 11

R R FW
ZS

X RV
XC
ZS

XC

en06000584_small.vsd
en06000625.vsd IEC06000584-SMALL V1 EN-US
IEC06000625 V1 EN-US

Figure 135: Cross-polarized Figure 136: Quadrilateral

quadrilateral characteristic with
characteristic separate impedance and
directional measurement

If the distance protection is equipped with a ground-fault measuring unit, the negative impedance
occurs when

3 × X C > 2 × X 1 _ 11 + X 0 _ 11
EQUATION1919 V1 EN-US (Equation 118)

Cross-polarized distance protection (either with mho or quadrilateral characteristic) will normally
handle ground-faults satisfactory if the negative impedance occurs inside the characteristic. The
operating area for negative impedance depends upon the magnitude of the source impedance
and calculations must be made on a case by case basis, as shown in figure 135. Distance IEDs with
separate impedance and directional measurement offer additional setting and operational
flexibility when it comes to measurement of negative apparent impedance (as shown in figure
136).

Negative IED impedance, negative fault current (current inversion) SEMOD168320-408 v2

If equation 119

X C > X S + X11
EQUATION2036 V2 EN-US (Equation 119)

in figure 121 and a fault occurs behind the capacitor, the resultant reactance becomes negative
and the fault current will have an opposite direction compared with fault current in a power line
without a capacitor (current inversion). The negative direction of the fault current will persist until
the spark gap has flashed. Sometimes there will be no flashover at all, because the fault current is
less than the setting value of the spark gap. The negative fault current will cause a high voltage on
the network. The situation will be the same even if a MOV is used. However, depending upon the
setting of the MOV, the fault current will have a resistive component.

The problems described here are accentuated with a three phase or phase-to-phase fault, but the
negative fault current can also exist for a single-phase fault. The condition for a negative current in
case of an ground fault can be written as follows:

Line differential protection RED670 229

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

3 × X C > 2 × X 1_ L1 + X 0 _ L1 + 2 × X 0 _ S + X 1_ S
EQUATION1920 V1 EN-US (Equation 120)

All designations relates to figure 121. A good protection system must be able to cope with both
positive and negative direction of the fault current, if such conditions can occur. A distance
protection cannot operate for negative fault current. The directional element gives the wrong
direction. Therefore, if a problem with negative fault current exists, distance protection is not a
suitable solution. In practice, negative fault current seldom occurs. In normal network
configurations the gaps will flash in this case.

Double circuit, parallel operating series compensated lines SEMOD168320-417 v2

Two parallel power lines running in electrically close vicinity to each other and ending at the same
busbar at both ends (as shown in figure 137) causes some challenges for distance protection
because of the mutual impedance in the zero sequence system. The current reversal phenomenon
also raises problems from the protection point of view, particularly when the power lines are short
and when permissive overreach schemes are used.

A -jXC B
ZAC ZCB

Zm0AC Zm0CB
-jXC
ZAC ZCB

en06000627.vsd
IEC06000627 V1 EN-US

Figure 137: Double circuit, parallel operating line

Zero sequence mutual impedance Zm0 cannot significantly influence the operation of distance
protection as long as both circuits are operating in parallel and all precautions related to settings
of distance protection on series compensated line have been considered. Influence of
disconnected parallel circuit, which is grounded at both ends, on operation of distance protection
on operating circuit is known.

Series compensation additionally exaggerates the effect of zero sequence mutual impedance
between two circuits, see figure 138. It presents a zero sequence equivalent circuit for a fault at B
bus of a double circuit line with one circuit disconnected and grounded at both IEDs. The effect of
zero sequence mutual impedance on possible overreaching of distance IEDs at A bus is increased
compared to non compensated operation, because series capacitor does not compensate for this
reactance. The reach of underreaching distance protection zone 1 for phase-to-ground measuring
loops must further be decreased for such operating conditions.

A -jXC B
j(X0L -Xm0)

jXm0

j(X0L -Xm0) -jXC

en06000628.vsd
IEC06000628 V1 EN-US

Figure 138: Zero sequence equivalent circuit of a series compensated double circuit line with
one circuit disconnected and grounded at both IEDs
Zero sequence mutual impedance may disturb also correct operation of distance protection for
external evolving faults, when one circuit has already been disconnected in one phase and runs
non-symmetrical during dead time of single pole autoreclosing cycle. All such operating conditions
must carefully be studied in advance and simulated by dynamic simulations in order to fine tune
settings of distance IEDs.

230 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

If the fault occurs in point F of the parallel operating circuits, as presented in figure 139, than also
one distance IED (operating in POTT teleprotection scheme) on parallel, healthy circuit will send a
carrier signal CSAB to the remote line end, where this signal will be received as a carrier receive
signal CRBB.

RAA IFC1 IFC1 RBA RAA IFC1 RBA

X X
F F

RAB IFC2 RBB RAB IFC2 RBB

CSAB CRBB CSAB CRBB

en06000629_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000629 V1 EN-US

Figure 139: Current reversal phenomenon on parallel operating circuits

It is possible to expect faster IED operation and breaker opening at the bus closer to fault, which
will reverse the current direction in healthy circuit. Distance IED RBB will suddenly detect fault in
forward direction and, if CRBB signal is still present due to long reset time of IED RAB and
especially telecommunication equipment, trip its related circuit breaker, since all conditions for
POTT have been fulfilled. Zero sequence mutual impedance will additionally influence this process,
since it increases the magnitude of fault current in healthy circuit after the opening of first circuit
breaker. The so called current reversal phenomenon may cause unwanted operation of protection
on healthy circuit and this way endangers even more the complete system stability.

To avoid the unwanted tripping, some manufacturers provide a feature in their distance
protection which detects that the fault current has changed in direction and temporarily blocks
distance protection. Another method employed is to temporarily block the signals received at the
healthy line as soon as the parallel faulty line protection initiates tripping. The second mentioned
method has an advantage in that not the whole protection is blocked for the short period. The
disadvantage is that a local communication is needed between two protection devices in the
neighboring bays of the same substation.

Distance protection used on series compensated lines must have a high overreach to cover the
whole transmission line also when the capacitors are bypassed or out of service. When the
capacitors are in service, the overreach will increase tremendously and the whole system will be
very sensitive for false teleprotection signals. Current reversal difficulties will be accentuated
because the ratio of mutual impedance against self-impedance will be much higher than for a non-
compensated line.

If non-unit protection is to be used in a directional comparison mode, schemes based on negative

sequence quantities offer the advantage that they are insensitive to mutual coupling. However,
they can only be used for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase faults. For three-phase faults an
additional protection must be provided.

8.1.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD168241-1 v2

8.1.3.1 General SEMOD168247-4 v2

The settings for the distance protection function are done in primary values. The instrument
transformer ratio that has been set for the analog input card is used to automatically convert the
measured secondary input signals to primary values used in the distance protection function.

The following basics should be considered, depending on application, when doing the setting
calculations:

Line differential protection RED670 231

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

• Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly under

transient conditions.
• Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the calculated
value of the ground-return compensation factor.
• The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the influence of different
Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources.
• The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops. The difference
between the impedances for different phase-to-ground loops can be as large as 5-10% of the
total line impedance.
• The effect of a load transfer between the IEDs of the protected fault resistance is
considerable, the effect must be recognized.
• Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.

8.1.3.2 Setting of zone1 SEMOD168247-15 v2

The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching zone
(normally zone 1) to 75 - 90% of the protected line.

In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according to section "Parallel
line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are valid in your application. We
recommend to compensate setting for the cases when the parallel line is in operation, out of
service and not grounded and out of service and grounded in both ends. The setting of ground
fault reach should be selected to be <85% also when parallel line is out of service and grounded at
both ends (worst case).

8.1.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone SEMOD168247-19 v3

The first overreaching zone (normally zone2) must detect faults on the whole protected line.
Considering the different errors that might influence the measurement in the same way as for
zone1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching zone to at least 120% of the
protected line. The zone2 reach can be even higher if the fault infeed from adjacent lines at remote
end are considerable higher than the fault current at the IED location.

The setting must not exceed 80% of the following impedances:

• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the shortest
adjacent line.
• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the maximum
number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote end of the protected
line.

If the requirements in the bullet—listed paragraphs above gives a zone2 reach less than 120%, the
time delay of zone2 must be increased by approximately 200ms to avoid unwanted operation in
cases when the telecommunication for the short adjacent line at remote end is down during faults.
The zone2 must not be reduced below 120% of the protected line section. The whole line must be
covered under all conditions.

The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent line at
remote end is highlighted with a simple example below.

If a fault occurs at point F (as shown in figure 140, also for the explanation of all abbreviations
used), the IED at point A senses the impedance:

232 Line differential protection RED670

Application manual
1MRK 505 376-UUS D Section 8
Impedance protection

VA I A + IC I A + IC + IB  IC   IC + IB 
Z AF = = Z AC + ⋅ Z CF + ⋅ RF = Z AC + 1 +  ⋅ Z CF + 1 +  ⋅ RF
IA IA IA  IA   IA 

EQUATION302 V5 EN-US (Equation 121)

Z AC Z CB

F
A C Z CF B
IA IB

I A+ I C
21 IC

ANSI05000457-3-en.vsd
ANSI05000457 V3 EN-US

Figure 140: Setting of overreaching zone

8.1.3.4 Setting of reverse zone SEMOD168247-33 v2

The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current reversal logic,
weak-end-infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the back-up protection of the bus bar or
power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always covers the overreaching zone, used at
the remote line IED for the telecommunication purposes.

Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent lines.
Equation 122 can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the zone is used for
blocking scheme, weak-end infeed and so on.

Zrev ³ 1.2 × ( ZL - Z 2 rem )

EQUATION1525 V5 EN-US (Equation 122)

Where:
ZL is the protected line impedance
Z2rem is zone2 setting at remote end of protected line.

In some applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to fault current
infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction to obtain certain sensitivity.

8.1.3.5 Series compensated and adjacent lines SEMOD168247-142 v2

Directional control SEMOD168247-145 v2

The directional function (ZDSRDIR) which is able to cope with the condition at voltage reversal,
shall be used in all IEDs with conventional distance protection (ZMCPDIS,ZMCAPDIS, 21). This
function is necessary in the protection on compensated lines as well as all non-compensated lines
connected to this busbar (adjacent lines). All protections that can be exposed to voltage reversal
must have the special directional function, including the protections on busbar where the voltage
can be reversed by series compensated lines not terminated to this busbar.

Line differential protection RED670 233

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 376-UUS D
Impedance protection

The directional function is controlled by faulty phase criteria. These criteria must identify all
forward and reverse faults that can cause voltage reversal. Setting of the corresponding reach of
the impedance measuring elements is separate for reactive and resistive reach and independent
of each other for phase-to-ground and for phase-to-phase measurement.

It is also necessary to consider the minimum load impedance limiting conditions:

Setting of zone 1 SEMOD168247-150 v3

A voltage reversal can cause an artificial internal fault (voltage zero) on faulty line as well as on the
adjacent lines. This artificial fault always have a resistive component, this is however small and can
mostly not be used to prevent tripping of a healthy adjacent line.

An independent tripping zone 1 facing a bus which can be exposed to voltage reversal have to be
set with reduced reach with respect to this false fault. When the fault can move and pass the bus,
the zone 1 in this station must be blocked. Protection further out in the net must be set with
respect to this apparent fault as the protection at the bus.

Different settings of the reach for the zone (ZMCPDIS, 21) characteristic in forward and reverse
direction makes it possible to optimize the settings in order to maximize dependability and
security for independent zone1.

Due to the sub-harmonic oscillation swinging caused by the series capacitor at fault conditions
the reach of the under-reaching zone 1 must be further reduced. Zone 1 can only be set with a
percentage reach to the artificial fault according to the curve in 141

p
%
100

80

60

40

20

0 C
20 40 60 80 100 %

99000202.vsd
IEC99000202 V1 EN-US

Figure 141: Reduced reach due to the expected sub-harmonic oscillations at differen